Loading...
AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER - 09-0011-PR (A) - VOLUME 2VOLUME Z Technical Specifications I Aging Well Center at The Lon Center Project No. 09-0011-PR (A) City of Clearwater Parks and Recreation Department, Clearwater, Florida 1 Revision 1 October 7, 2009 1 1 '1. Architect Won nemacher Jensen Architects, Inc. 180 Mirror Lake Drive "5t: Petersburg, Florida 33701-3214 2 CIP 727-822-5566 AA0002277 Aging Well Center at The Long Center TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 01100 SUMMARY 01230 ALTERNATES 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01420 REFERENCES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01635 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04200 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 5 - METALS 05400 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ' 07190 WATER REPELLENTS 07210 BUILDING INSULATION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07920 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08411 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 08800 GLAZING 08830 MIRRORS ` DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09220 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09250 09310 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES CERAMIC TILE 09511 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09651 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09652 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09671 RESINOUS FLOORING 09680 CARPET 09910 PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10155 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10431 SIGNAGE 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10651 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15170 MOTORS 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15242 VIBRATION ISOLATION 15260 PIPING INSULATION 15280 EQUIPMENT ISOLATION 15290 DUCTWORK ISOLATION 15310 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS 15400 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 PLUMBING PIPING 15415 GAS PIPING 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15853 PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT (AAON) 15870 POWER VENTILATORS 15875 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS 15890 DUCTWORK 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15936 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16111 CONDUIT 16120 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16130 BOXES 16141 WIRING DEVICES 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING 16470 PANELBOARDS TABLE OF CONTENTS Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center 16485 . 16510 16670 16720 APPENDIX CONTACTORS LUMINAIRES LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS ASBESTOS REPORT I END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS s I TABLE OF CONTENTS iii r t Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Work restrictions. 5. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls"„for limitations and procedures governing ttnporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project identification: Aging Well Center at The Long Center. 1. Project Location: 1501 North Belcher Road, Clearwater, Florida 33765. B. Owner. City of Clearwater, Florida. C. Architect: Wannemacher Jensen Architects, Inc., 1801 Mirror Lake Drive North, St. Petersburg, Florida 33701. 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Alterations and additions, primarily interior renovations, to Building 300 of the Long Center building complex B. Type of Contract 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. SUMMARY 01100 -1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.5 ACCESS TO SITE A. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. I. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work ito.normal business working hours of 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Saturday. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. ' 2. Obtain Owner s written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, oroother disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking, is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of t entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on the Project site is not permitted. G. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on the Project site. Require personnel to utilize identification tags at all times. H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements regarding drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on the Project site. ' 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner s Representative. 1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. SUMMARY 01100 - 2 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 1 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 1 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbrevia#ions: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual. 1.8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100 f SUMMARY 01100 - 3 t Aging Well Center at The Lang Center SECTION 01230 - ALTERNATES . PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates. B. Definition: An Alternate is an amount proposed by Bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain ' construction activities defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems or installation methods described in Contract Documents. ' C. Coordination: Coordinate related Work and modify or adjust adjacent Work as necessary to ensure that Work affected by each accepted Alternate is complete and fully integrated into the project. D. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, prepare and distribute to ; each party involved, notification of the status of each Alternate. Indicate whether Alternates have, been accepted, rejected or deferred for consideration at a later date. Include a complete descri ption of negotiated modifications to Aftemates. E. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods necessary to achieve the Work described under each Alternate. 1. Include as part of each Alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects and similar items required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate No. 1: Provide all work and materials including, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical, to renovate the STAFF BREAK ROOM 141 located on the First Floor in Building 100 of the Long Center Building Complex ' B. Add Alternate No. 2 Provide all work and materials, including mechanical, fire protection, and electrical, to renovate the Storage Room located on the Second Floor in Building 100 of the Long Center Building Complex so as to provide new MEETING ROOM 201. ALTERNATES 01230 -1 f Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Add Alternate No. 3 Provide all work and materials to provide (1) OPERABLE PARTITION ASSEMBLY located. in the Aging Well Center (Base Bid) Rooms 102 / 103 (PROGRAM ROOMS "A° and "B j on the First Floor in Building 300 of the Long Center Building Complex (The structural additions and alterations required to support the partition assembly are in the Base Bid.). D. Add Alternate No. 4 Provide all work and materials to provide (1) OPERABLE PARTITION ASSEMBLY located in the Aging Well Center (Base Bid) Rooms 104 / 105 (PROGRAM ROOMS "C" and "D°) on the First Floor in Building 300 of the Long Center Building Complex (The structural additions and alterations required to support the partition assembly are in the Base Bid.). E. Add Alternate No. 5 Provide all work and materials including the (4) supporting CONCRETE COLUMNS, stomiwater drainage system, and electrical lighting to provide (1) ALUMINUM CANOPY ASSEMBLY located at the south entry to the BREEZEWAY in Building 300 of the Long Center Building Complex. F. Add Altemate No. 6 Provide all work and materials, including mechanical, fire protection, and electrical, to enlarge the FITNESS ROOM 117 located on the First Floor In Building 300 of the Long Center Building Complex by removing the partition separating the FITNESS ROOM from the DOLPHIN ROOM and renovating the DOLPHIN ROOM..This work also includes providing ONE HOUR FIRE RATED GLAZING ASSEMBLIES in the North Wall of the DOLPHIN ROOM matching the existing ONE HOUR RATED GLAZING ASSEMBLIES in the North Wall of the FITNESS ROOM and providing new resilient athletic flooring in the Dolphin Room matching the existing RAF flooring in the fitness room. Begin this work after completing the work covered under the base bid. G. Add Alternate No. 7 Provide all work and materials, including mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical, to create (2) meeting rooms, 121 DEP "A° and 128 DEP "13° by renovating the (2) spaces created by removing (2) masonry walls separating the (4) UPARC meeting rooms located on the First Floor in the northeast quadrant of Building 300 of the Long Center Building Complex. Complete this work prior to beginning the work covered under the base bid. H. Add Alternate No. 8 Provide all work and materials, including electrical, to replace (19) existing exterior light fixtures mounted to the bottom existing exterior floor deck located around the Main Exterior Courtyard of Building 300 of the Long Center Building Complex. Add Alternate No. 9 Provide ;all work and materials, including mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, and electrical, to renovate the (2) public toilet Rooms, 119 WOMEN and 120 MEN, and the JANITOR CLOSET, Room 118, located on the First Floor in Building 300 of the Long Center Building Complex. END OF SECTION 01230 ALTERNATES 01230-2 i I J Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1 PART 1 - GENERAL. L1 RELATED.-DOCUMENTS k - Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Prooedures" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of submittal schedule. 1:3 DEFINITIONS - A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. IA SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. C. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractors construction schedule. 1 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction ' schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each element. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290-1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Identification: - Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. C. Arch tecr's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. ' b. Description of the Work. C. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1). -Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of Contract Sum. 4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar, total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include. materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include. evidence of insurance. 6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by , measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 9. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 2 Aging Well! Center at The Lang Center a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual ' work-in-pisoe may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense,-at Contractor's option. 10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 1.5 A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments ' as certified by Architect and paid for.by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated 'in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the perad'indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted'to Architect by the last day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. . D. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. E. Application Preparation:., Complete every entry on fiorm. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for worts completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being.carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. F. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1 _ Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested With amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Materials previously stored and Included in previous Applications for Payment. b. Work completed for this Application utilizing previously stored materials. C. Additional materials stored with this Application. d. Total materials remaining stored, including materials with this Application. G. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for *ainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. , 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on fortes, executed In a manner acceptable to Owner. . Waivers of Mechanic's. Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors,` sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Schedule of unit prices. PAYMENT PROCEDURES `01290 - 4 L 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 8. List of Contractors staff assignments. 9. List of Contractors principal consultants. 10. Copies of building permits. 11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for ' performance of the Work. 12. Initial progress report 13. Report of preconstruction conference. 14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 15. Performance and payment bonds. 16. Data needed to acquire Owners insurance. K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an. Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion-of.the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a ' statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued . ' previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. L. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of.completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were-paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractors Affidavit of Release of Liens," 6. AIA Document G797, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled..- 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) ¦ PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 5 Aging Weq Center at The Long Center SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Project coordination including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Coordination. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. General installation provisions. ' 4. Cleaning and protection. B. Requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule are included in Section "Submittals". 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Wont. Coordinate construction operations included under'different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. These facilities are to remain operational. Notify Owner and Architect of any forseen construction activity that would impact the facility's operation and safety of occupants and users. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include. but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilitiess. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Close-out activities. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 -1 Aging Well Center at TheLong Center D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. E. Periodic Coordination Meeting: Job progress meetings between Owner, Contractor and Architect will be held every week during construction. When neccessary subcontractor representatives will be invited to attend. F. Full time on site Contractor supervision: The Contractor is required to provide a full time project superintendent assigned to this project, on site at all times when construction activity. is under way. G. On site documents: Contractor is to maintain a copy on site for Owner and Architect reference.a copy of all drawings, specifications, submittals, ASI's, PR's, C.O's and other pertinent documents that describe or direct the progress of the project. These documents are to be administered by the Contractors designated job superintendent. . .. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination Drawings where close and careful coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated off-site by separate entities, and where limited space availability necessitates maximum . utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the interrelationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals." 4. Refer to Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements," and Division-16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements" for specific coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. B. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and each temporary telephone. 1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and-.conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 2 J Aging Well Center at The Lang Center 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. ' 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect; and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shalt attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. C. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. o. lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. 1. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment ' j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. 1. Preparation of record documents. M. Use of the premises and eAsting building. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. S. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. U. Parking availability. V. Office, work, and storage areas. W. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x First aid. y. Security. Z. Progress cleaning. i 11 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferances: Conduct a pneinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with otter materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change. Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. L Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 3 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center k. Time schedules. 1. Weather limitations. M. Manufacturers written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each patty present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. C. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractors punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. L Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owners partial occupancy requirements. 1. Installation of Owners furniture, fixtures, and equipment. M. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-4 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owners, and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity .concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work 3. Agenda: Review and 'correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other Items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule'revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Progress cleaning. 10) Quality and work standards. 11) Status of correction of deficient Items. 12) Field observations. 13) Status of RFIs. 14) Status of proposal requests. 15) Pending changes. 16) Status of Change Orders. 17) Pending claims and disputes. 18) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 5. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory,conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Manufacturers Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices tothe Architect for final decision. F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. i 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry and ADA for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, .completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Excessive static or dynamic loading. 3. Excessively high or low temperatures. 4. Thermal shock. 5. Excessively high or low humidity. 6. Air contamination or pollution. 7. Water or ice. 8. Solvents. 9. Chemicals. 10. Abrasion. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 6 Aging Welt Center at The Long Center 11. Heavy traffic. 12. Soiling, staining and corrosion. 13. Rodent and insect infestation. 14. Combustion. 15. Electrical current. 16. Improper lubrication, 17. Unusual wear or other misuse. 18. Contact between incompatible materials. 19. Misalignment 20. Unprotected storage. 21. Improper shipping or handling. 22. Theft.and Vandalism. END OF SECTION 01310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310-7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 01330 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Contractors construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Shop Drawings. 5. Product Data. 6. Samples. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division-1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: f ' 1. Permits. 2. Applications for payment. 3. Performance and payment bonds. 4. Insuranoe certificates. 5. List of Subcontractors. ' C. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section "Payment Procedures". " " D. Quality Requirements . Inspection and test reports are included in Section ' 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals ' and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330.1 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center a. Allow two weeks for initial review: Allow additional time if'processing must be delayed ' to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow two weeks for reprocessing-each submittal. d. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. B. Submittal Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. 2. Include the following information on the label'for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. ' b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. ' e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. , i. Drawing number and detail references, as'appropriate. C. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a- transmittal form.- Submittals ' received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. On the transmittal Record relevant information and requests for data. On "the form, or separate sheet, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor ' variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. 2. Transmittal Form: Contractors standard format. ' D. Use of Architect's Electronic Files: Contractor may request a copy of electronic drawing files for use in preparation of submittals. These files will be transmitted on zip disk, one time, to Contractor only.. The Architect's fee for copying drawing files is $500.00, paid direct to Architect. ' These files are to be used only for preparation of submittals for this Project, any other use is strictly forbidden. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ' A The Preliminary Project Schedule is to be prepared for submittal at the pre-construction meeting. The Owner will provide to the Contractor a notice of intent to award notification to the successful bidder shortly after submission of bids. The successful bidder is to use the time period between Notice of Intent to Award and the pre-construction meeting to prepare the Project Schedule. B Critical Path Schedule: Prepare a fully developed, critical path Contractors construction , schedule. Submit for review no latter than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed. 1. Provide a separate time line for each significant construction activity. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values", and any other item that would impact the Project's schedule, ex; Mechanical equipment delivery. Indicate SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2 1 fJ 1 1 1 Aging Well.Center at The Long Center durations of each activity and the sequence of all activities through project completion. Confirm with Architect format of schedule prior to preparation. 2. Prepare the schedule on a sheet, or series of sheets, of stable transparency, or other reprooducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. 3. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work.. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 4. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule; progress reports, payment requests and other schedules. 5. Indicate completion by the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Distribution:, Following response to the initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made; or as a minimum submit an updated schedule with each payment application. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the submittal schedule within 15 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well as the Contractor's oonstruction.schedule. 2. Prepare the schedule in chronological order, include submittals required during the first 90 days of construction. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmiittal g. Scheduled date the Architect's final release or approval. B. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required W comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. - . 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center D. All submittals must be made within the first 90 days after the Notice to Proceed. 1.6 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS' A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit multiple copies to the Architect at weekly progress meetings: 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. fi_ Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 7. Emergency procedures. 8. Orders and requests of-governing authorities. 9. Change Orders received, implemented. 10. Services connected, disconnected. 11. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 12. Partial Completions, occupancies. 13. Substantial Completions authorized. 1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specked standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 6. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no 'larger than 24" x 36". 7. Initial Submittal: Submit one correctable translucent reproducible print and two blue- or black-line print for the Architect's review; the reproducible print will be returned. 9. Retain one set of approved submittals for distribution to the Owner at the end of the Project. 10. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating.action taken in connection with construction. C. Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. 1. Preparation of coordination Drawings Is specified in section "Project Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data. 2. Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. 1.8 PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4 fl ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing4n diagrams and templates; standard wiring diagrams and ' performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop. Drawings." 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data ' includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency tab®Is and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do net submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. re re d for tt l b it 4 i h i bm f h i d l qu i a ; su m cop es w e re eac requ re su s: Submit 2 copies o 3. Submitta maintenance manuals. The Architect will retain one, and will return the other marked with ' action taken and corrections or modifications required. d h b i l , t e su m tta a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is, observe may serve as the final submittal. ' 4. Distribution: Furnish copies of final. submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installers possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. 1.9 SAMPLES ' A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets; and swatches showing ' color, todure and pattern. ualities d t f ilit te review of ifi l i th di l k S q e o ac amp es n e manner spec a 1. Mount, sp ay, or pac age indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's Sample_ Include the following: ' a. Generic description of the Sample. b. Sample source. c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. ' e. Availability and delivery, time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color. pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 0.1330-5 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. 3. Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a one full set of choices for the material or product. a. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark 1.10 ARCHITECTS ACTION A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified 'characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Accepted," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Accepted as Noted," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed. provided it. complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Not Accepted, Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittals marked "Not Accepted, Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for infomiation or record purposes, special processing or other activity, the submittal will be returned, marked "Action Not Required". C. For all computer file plan backgrounds requested by the Contractor for use in preparing submittals, shop drawings and/or close-out documents - the Contractor shall pay the Architect $100 for each plan background forwarded. Note that in all cases only the background or base plan drawing will be available - notes, detail references, dimensions, etc. will not be included. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable). END OF SECTION 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 6 1 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART I GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions ' and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY r A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services. B. Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including reports, performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor. They do not r include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Architect. C. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document requirements. D. Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and- installation procedures, not ' production of standard products. 1.. Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements, including inspections and tests, cover productidn of standard products as well as customized fabrication and installation ' procedures. 2. Inspections, test and related actions specified' are not intended to limit the Contractors . quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements .for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by the Architect, ' Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES ' A. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing r authorities, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. 1. The Contractor shall engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to perform inspections and tests specified. Note that any conflicts in the Construction Documents which specifically state that the Owner will pay for the testing services is incorrect and is superceeded by this Section. r 2. Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractors responsibility. ' a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractors responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. r 3 Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as r QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400-1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: a. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. b. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. c. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. d. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. e. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. B. Duties of the Testing Agency: The independent testing agency engaged to perform inspections, sampling and testing of materials and construction specified in individual Specification Sections shall cooperate with the Architect and Contractor in performance of its duties, and shall provide qualified personnel to perform required inspections and tests. 1. The agency shall notify the Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. The agency is not authorized to release, revoke, alter or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents, or approve or accept any portion of the Work 3. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor. C. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. The independent testing agency thru the Contractor, shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service, to the Architect, in duplicate. 1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs. 2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall include, but not be limited to: a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. I. Test results and an interpretations of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with Contract Document requirements. 1. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center m. Recommendations on retesting. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, which are prequalified as complying with "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed. 1. Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in which the Project is located. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect repaired onstruction. C. Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services. END OF SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. I 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Terns such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location. C. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases. D. Approved: The term-approved, when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractors submittals, -applications, and requests, is limited to the Architects duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws; ordinances, statutes, and 'lawful-'orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. Furnish: The term fumish means supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. Install: The term install describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. 1. Installer: An Installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienod in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means having a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. 3. Assigning Specialists: Certairi Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities-shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are REFERENCES 01420-1 A Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. a. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. ' J. Project site is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific ' inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's 16-Division format and MASTERFORMAT numbering system. B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or. circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: ' 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated,.shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be ' interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. The word " h ll b " im li d he e l is d ithi t r a. s s a e a p e w rev r a co on (:) use w n a sen ence or e phrase. 1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. ' C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is.specified and where the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, refer requirements that are different but apparently equal and other uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or REFERENCES 01420 -2 [1 1 r 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center maximum, as appropriate, for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in constriction on the Project is, required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity.. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the. trade association, itandards- generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or other entity applicable to the context of the Text provision. Refer to the "Encyclopedia of Associations," published by Gale Research Co., available in most libraries. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, and similar documents,, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01420 REFERENCES 01420 - 3 1 ' Aging -Nell. Center at The LongrCenter SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of, the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies requirements for temporary services and facilities, including utilities, .construction and support facilities, security and protection. B. Temporary utilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Temporary electric power and light. 3. Telephone service. 4. Storm and sanitary sewer. C. Temporary construction.and support facilities required include but are not limited to 1. Field offices and storage sheds. 2. Sanitary facilities, including drinking water. 3. Temporary Project identification signs and bulletin boards. 4. Waste disposarservices. 5. Rodent and pest control. 6. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. D. Security and protection facilities required include but are not limited to: 1. Temporary fire protection. 2. Barricades, warning signs, lights. 3. Fencing around construction limits. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations if authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to: 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations", ANSI-A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition", and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities." TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services", prepared jointly by AGC and ASC, for industry recommendations. 2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with National Electric Code (NFPA 70). C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of temporary service to use of the permanent service. B. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire' prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged previously used materials in serviceable condition maybe used. Provide materials suitable for the use intended. B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division-6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 1. For signs and directory boards, provide exterior type, Grade B-B High, Density Concrete Form Overlay Plywood conforming to PS-1, of sizes and thickness indicated. 2. For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8" thick exterior plywood. C. Paint: Comply with requirements of Division-9 Section "Finish Painting." 1. For job-built temporary offices, shops, sheds, fences and other exposed lumber and plywood, provide exterior grade acrylio-latex emulsion over exterior primer. 2. For sign panels and applying graphics, provide exterior grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. 3. For interior walls of temporary offices, provide two coats interior latex fiat wall paint. D. Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities. Water will be provided by the Owner through sources at the existing Center. E Open-Mesh Fencing: Provide 11-gage, galvanized 24nch, chain link fabric fencing 6-feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts, 1-1/2" I.D. for line posts and 2-1/2" I.D. for corner posts. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment; if acceptable to the Architect, undamaged, previously used I equipment in serviceable condition may be used. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 2 Aging Well Ce ftr at The Lang Center B. Water Hoses: Provide. 3/4" heavy-duty, abrasion-resistant, flexible rubber hoses 100 ft. long, with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system; provide adjustable shut-off nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured NEMA polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110-120 volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground- fault circuit interrupters, reset button and pilot liight, for connection. of power tools and equipment. Owner will provide construction power through sources at the existing Center. The source of ' power will be available, the Contractor will make the necessary safe modifications to deliver the power where needed. ' D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use "hard-service" cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths.of electric cords, if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. E. Lamps and Light Fixtures:. Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for ' adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered glass enclosures, where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Temporary Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances, operable windows and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air- conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide a meeting room with table and chairs capable of accommodating 12 people. The temporary office must be equipped with a facsimile machine, answering machine and telephone. G. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester`shell or similar nonabsorbent material. H. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. I Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable UL-rated, Gass "A" fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, class "ABC" dry chemical extinguishers, or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA 1 recommended classes for the exposures. ' Comply with NFPA 10 and 241 for classification, extinguishing agent and size required by I. location and class of fire exposure. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed, or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. C. Temporary Lighting: Whenever overhead floor or roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 3 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements, without operating the entire system, and will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. D. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction'period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. E. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service for all personnel engaged in construction activities, throughout the construction period. Install telephone on a separate line for each temporary office and first aid station. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. F. Sewers and Drainage: Sewers facilities are available, provide temporary connections to remove effluent'that can be discharged lawfully. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off the site in a lawful manner. 1. Filter out excessive amounts of soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. 2. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition: Following heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. G. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. H. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, `wash facilities and drinking water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location, operation and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the project's needs. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material. 1. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit-type privies will not be permitted. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel involved in handling materials that require wash-up for a healthy and sanitary condition. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each condition. K. Drinking Water Facilities: Provide containerized tap-dispenser bottled-water type drinking water units, including paper supply. L. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepareproject identification and other signs of the size indicated; install signs where indicated to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative treated wood or steel. Do not permit- installation of unauthorized signs. Have sign copy approved by Architect prior to sign fabrication. Attain Owner approval prior to installation. 1. Project Identification Signs: Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics. Comply with details indicated. Only one 4'x8' sign by Contractor is allowed. Contractor, major subcontractors and members of the Design team are to be identified. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 4 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2r Temporary Signs: Prepare signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. M. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with-requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when Zhe temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by. containerizing properly. Dispose of material in a lawful manner. N. Rodent and Pest Control: Retain a local exterminator or pest control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of,rodents, roaches and other pests. Employ this ' service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so the Project will be relatively free of pests -and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations in a lawful manner using environmentally safe materials. 3A SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as-soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer as requested by the Architect. B. Temporary FireProtection: Until fire protection needs. are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire protection.facilities of,the types needed to protect against reasonably ' predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers," and NFPA 241 "Standard. for Safeguarding Construction,. Alterations and Demolition Operations" 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire4afe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary.fire protection facilities, stairways and. other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire exposure areas. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. C. Barricades, Warning Signs and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed provide lighting, -including. flashing red or amber lights. D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure of partially completed areas of construction. Provide locking entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft and similar violations of security. 1. Storage: Where materials and equipment must be stored, and are of value or attractive for ' theft, provide a secure lockup. Enforce discipline in connection with the installation and release of material to minimize the opportunity for theft and vandalism. E. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities and conduct ' construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations, and minimize the possibility that air, waterways and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted, or that other undesirable effects might result Avoid use of tools and equipment which produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise making tools. and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation and similar facilities on a 24-hour. day basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, or when replaced by authored use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of the Contractor. The Owner reserves the right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities that have been used during the construction period, including but not limited to: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings. b. Replace significantly wom parts and parts that have been subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps that are bumed out or noticeably dimmed by substantial hours of use. END OF SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500 - 6 1 Aging Wed Center at The Long Center SECTION 11524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contrail, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following- I 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Demolition Waste: a. Asphaltic concrete paving. b. Concrete. C. Concrete reinforcing steel. d. Brick. 9. Concrete masonry units. f. Wood studs. g. Wood joists. h. Plywood and oriented strand board. i. Wood paneling. j. Wood trim. k. Structural and miscellaneou$ steel. 1. Rough hardware. M. Roofing. n. Insulation. o. Doors and frames. p. Door hardware. q. Windows. r. Glazing. S. Metal studs. t. Gypsum board. U. Acoustical tile and panels. V. Carpet. W. Carpet pad. X. Demountable partitions. y. Equipment. Z. Cabinets. aa. Plumbing fixtures. bb. Piping. CC. Supports and hangers. dd. Valves. ee. Sprinklers. ff. Mechanical equipment. gg. Refrigerants. hh. Electrical conduit. ii. Copper wiring. B. Lighting fixtures. kk. Lamps. II. Ballasts. mm. Electrical devices. nn. Swkchgear and panelboards. oo. Transformers. 2. Construction Waste: a. Site-clearing waste. b. Masonry and CMU. C. Lumber. d. Wood sheet materials. e. Wood trim. f. Metals. g. Roofing. h. Insulation. I. Carpet and pad. j. Gypsum board. k. Piping. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGI=MENT 01524 - 2 11 F Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Electrical conduit. M. Packaging: Regardless of salvagefrecycle goal indicated in paragraph above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS ' A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. 1 1 1 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report. Use Form CWM-7 for construction waste and Form CWM-8 for demolition waste. Include the following information: 1. Material category. 2. Generation point of waste. 3. Total quantity of waste in tons. 4. Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons. 5. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons. 6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons. 7. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste. B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated end-of-Projed rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the Work. C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt. E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. G. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator and refrigerant recovery technician. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center H. Statement -of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA - regulations. Include, name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered... 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications': Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of Projects with similar requirements. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct, conference at, Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities, of waste management coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability. of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and coalfrevenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste.management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing and construction waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form , CWM-2 for demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form ' CWM4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. 1. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this , Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and ' organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 4 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 4. Recycled Materials:. Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 5. Disposed- Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for ' separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located. D, Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste and Form CWM-6 for demolition waste. Include the following: i f t was e. ty o 1. Total quant 2. Estimated asst of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of ' collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials., 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. ' 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 8. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NoOsed) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, ' signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section 'Temporary Facilities and Controls' for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator. Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible ' for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site fu 11 time for duration of Project C.. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management ' procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls:. Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,- walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 5 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE A. ' Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows: ' 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. ' 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with Installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to ' make items functional for use indicated. I B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site. l I ' ' , C. vaged tems for Owner Sa s User Salvage items for Owner s use and handle as follows: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. ' 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors. E. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures: Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect ' equipment from exposure to weather. F. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size. , G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage. H. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, ' panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type. 3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received ' for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Owner. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. i Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan. 1 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 6 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from project site. Include list of acceptable and :unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials ' if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. I Stodcpite materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from t and transport r. to recycling receiver or ' 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property processor. r 3.4 -RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility. B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals. ' 1. Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2,inch size. C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals. 1. Pulverize masonry to maximum 3/44nch size. 2. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets. D. wood and stack members according treated wood matand length. erials. Separate Wood Materials: ducts, panel products, and to engineered Pro mber l ' , , u E. Metals: Separate metals by type. Structural Steel: Stack-members according to size, type of member, and length. 1 . 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware. . F. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories. G. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry move edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners. R i ' e locat on. allets and store in a dry ood H. p Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on w location. ' I. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from l s. acoustical panels and tile and sort with. other meta I Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 7 1 r Aging Well Center at'The Long Center 1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer prrivided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler. K. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size. L. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size. 3.5 A. B. C. D. 3.6 A. RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE Packaging: 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging Into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. DISPOSAL OF WASTE General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not bum waste materials. C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's properly and legally dispose of them. 3.7 ATTACHMENTS A. Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 8 I J I Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification. C. Form CWM-3 for oonstruction waste reduction work plan. D. Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan. E. Form CWM-5 cost/revenue analysis of construction waste reduction work plan. F. Form CWM-6 cost/revenue analysis of demolition waste reduction work plan. G. Form CWM-7 for construction waste H. Form CWM-B for demolition waste. END OF SECTION 01524 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - 9 Aging Well. Center at The Long Center ' SECTION 01635- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART I -GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,. apply to this Section. A. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. Section includes administrative and procedurral requirements for substitutions. B. Related Sections: ' 1. Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section "Alternates' for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 4. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment; and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by ' Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or owner. SUBMITTALS A. IA A Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable specification section. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE=S 01635-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, If any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and.addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports 'evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from ICC-ES. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule 'using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Qontract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including:a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's certification 'that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is-appropriate for applications indicated. M. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architects Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation -for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental1ristructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate worn of the approved substitutions. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635 - 2 1 1 1 I PART Z - PRODUCTS 2.1 1 1 1 SUBSTITUTIONS Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately upon discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results, b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. C. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. 1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owners additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. C. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and property submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractors construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Wok h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. L Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01635 k SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01635-4 f 1 1 1 1.3 A. I a I D. 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Alternates". 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities' for temporary construction and environmental- protection measures for selective demolition operations. 3. Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management". DEFINITIONS Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for reuse. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. MATERIALS OWNERSHIP Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. Historical items indicated remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner. Historical items, relics, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, antiques, and other items of interest or value to 1.4 A B. C. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center the Owner, which may be encountered during demolition, remain the Owner's property. Care- fully remove and salvage each item or object in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this-Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Divi- sion 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Proposed dust-control measures. C. Proposed noise-control measures. D. Schedule of demolition activities indicating the following: 1. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. 2. Dates for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. E. Inventory of items to be removed and salvaged. F. Inventory of items to be removed by Owner. G. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition opera- tions. H. Record drawings at Project closeout according to Division 1 Section "Project Closeout." 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical conditions. 1. Landfill records for record purposes indicating receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 2 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' E. Predemolitibn Conference. Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Coordination " Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss condition of constriction to be selectively demolished: 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. ' 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions eodsting at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained W Owner, as far as practical. ' B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. C. Hazardous Materials: It is unknown whether hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and prated them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 - EXECUTION .. 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. SELECTNE DEMOLITION 01732 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that.conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey .condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. F G. 2.2 A. B. Survey of Existing Conditions:, Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICALIELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanicallelectrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. The Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If servicestsystems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary. services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall. 2.3 PREPARATION , A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal ¦ operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section 'Temporary Facilities". B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. ' SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 4 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Prated walls, ceilings, floors, and other Ming finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities". C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and -to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished: 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 2.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated; Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: a 1. Proceed -with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or 'tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes- plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction 'to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.- 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area Is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as dud and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. B_ Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and, promptly dispose of off-site.` 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates for reuse of building -elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval. 1. Building Structure and Shell: 100 percent. 2. Nonshell Elements: 50 percent. C. Removed and Salvaged Items: SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 5 Aging. Well Center ' at The Long Center 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area off-site designated by Owner, 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. D.. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate.for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for ,new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a"suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. F. Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction, as follows: 1. Completely remove below-grade construction, including foundation walls and footings, ' unless indicated to remain. 2. Break up and remove below-grade concrete slabs, pipes, culverts, miscellaneous footings, conduit, wiring, drain inlets, tanks, unless indicated to remain. G. Filling Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demoli- tion of buildings and pavements with soil materials according to requirements specified in Divi- sion 2 Section "Earthwork." H. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition operations. I. At close of demolition project, all soil material remaining in the upper twelve inches of the site shall pass a one and one half inch (1 1/2") screen. 2.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular. intervals, using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts, C.. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 6 1 iI Aging Wel1'Cehter at The Long Center 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. Refer to Division 07 Section 07610 for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. F. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. 2.6 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted. 2.7 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. 1. Do not create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution, when using water. B. Remove and transpdrt debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and ar- eas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level. C. Clean adjacent buildings and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition opera- tions. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of demolition. 2.8 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owners property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." B. Burning: Do not bum demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owners property and legally dispose of them. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 7 I it Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.9 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 2.10 SELECTIVE. DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Existing Construction to Be Removed: See contract drawings. B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: See contract drawings. C. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: See contract drawings. D. Existing Items to Remain: See contract drawings. END OF SECTION 01732 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 - 8 0 S, Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 01740 -WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 . SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural' requirements for warranties and bonds required 'by the Contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special wai anties. 1: Refer to the General Conditions for terns; of the Contractors special warranty of workmanship and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specked to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions-2 through AS.' 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B: Disclaimers and I- rnkations: Manufacturers disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that'incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor. . . C.- Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime Contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the Owner. B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the Owner. f 1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide acxess for correction of warranted Work. B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and.been corrected by 1 replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adustment for depreciation. Y WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-1 1 ? Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or ' rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements-of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. D. Owner's Recourse: Written warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations,,rights, or remedies 1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. The Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept Work for the Project where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required on. such Work or part of the Work, until evidence is presented that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so. F. Provide a general warranty in addition to specific warranties for a duration of one year beyond Substantial Completion. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other thaln.the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties. upon request of the Architect. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the.Owner, by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit ' properly , executed warranties to the Architect within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. C. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions-2 through. -16 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties. D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion compile two copies of each required warranty and bond properly executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer. Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on, the table of contents of the Project Manual. E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial quality, durable 3-ring vinyl covered loose- leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-112" by 11" paper. 1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of.the -product, and the name, address and telephone number of the installer. 2. Identify each binder on the front and the spine with the typed or printed title' WARRANTIES AND BONDS, the Project title or name, and the name of the Contractor. WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3. When operating and maintenance manuals are required for warranted construction, provide additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required manual. PART x - PRODUCTS (not applicable). PART S - EXECUTION (not applicable) END OF SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center r SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not limited to: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project record document submittal. 3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal. 4. Submittal of warranties. 5. Final cleaning. B. Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriate Sections in Divisions-2 through -16. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request. 1. In the Application for Payment. that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, Include a fist of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to 1 services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases. 5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 6. Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's personnel of change-over in security provisions. 7. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770-1 1 ? Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE 1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum. 3. Submit a certified copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Architect. 4. Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 5. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 6. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. ' B. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. 3. Re-inspections: The Contractor will compensate the Architect at a rate of $95.00 per hour per person to review any outstanding Report item more than one time. Compensation will be made to the Architect by Change Order to the Contract Sum (credit in the amount of the Architect's changes). To prevent this compensation the Contractor is advised not to request the Final Completion Report until each item in the Substantial Completion Report and previous or subsequent Field Visit Reports have been carefully verified to be completed. 1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and ' loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours. 1. Status of documentation of Record Documents will be reviewed at monthly job progress meetings. If documentation is found not to be correlating with job progress, applicable month's payment application will be delayed until Record Documents are brought up to date. B. Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation where the installation varies substantially from the Work as originally shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross- reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. 1. Record sets should be produced in a reproducible format and should clearly distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work. 2. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 2 Aging Well Center at Time Long Center 3. Note related Change Order numbers where applicable. 4. Organize record drawing sheets Into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set. C. Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the, site, and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders -and mark-up of record drawings and Specifications. D. Submit a summary list of all paint products used on the project List manufacturer, paint name, paint color, speck paint mix and location where additional quantities may be purchased. E. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 24nch, 3-ring vinyl- covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Marts appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: ' 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list 8. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping'schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper i ' on operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruct by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items: 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards. 10. Cleaning. 11. Warranties and bonds. 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments. ' B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Start-up. 2. Shutdown. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. S. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section 'Temporary Facilities'. ' B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion, a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains; films and similar foreign substances. Restore reflective surfaces to, their original reflective condition. Leave concrete floors.broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces. d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps. e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign substances. Sweep .paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even- textured surface. C. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction. D. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not bum waste'materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's ' property. Do not discharge volatile; harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner. 1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed. END OF SECTION 01770 i CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 4 .1 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 7 -GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section species cast-in place concrete, including fomiwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section `Construction Waste Management` ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A General - Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: B.. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures; patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems. curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect. ' B. Shop drawings for reinforcement, prepared by registered Professional Engineer for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete .reinforcement Include special reinforcement,. required for openings through concrete structures. C. Shop drawings for formwork, prepared by a registered Professional Engineer for fabrication and erection of forms for specific finished concrete surfaces. Show form construction including jointing, special form joint or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually. Formwork shop drawings must be signed ' and sealed by a professional engineer In the State of Florida 1. Architect's review is for general architectural applications and features only. Design of formwork-for structural stability and efficiency is Contractors responsibility. D. Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions, as follows: 1. Normal weight aggregates: 2. Fibrous reinforcement. 3. Reglets. 4. Waterstops. 5. Vapor retarder. E. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test. Provide test data sample with standard deviation calculations for each mix submitted. F. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each ' material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 i Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1 4 QUALITY-ASSURANCE . A. Codes and Standards - Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: ' 1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. ACI 301 `Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.' 3. ACI 304 `Recommended Practice for Measuring, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.` " ' 4. ACI 311 Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection. 5. ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structures" 6. ACI 347 'Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork' 7. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." B. Concrete Testing Service - Engage a testing laboratory acceptable to Architect to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be dine at Contractor's expense. D. Full cooperation shall be given to mechanical, electrical, and plumbing installers to allow them time to coordinate and install all items of their work which are to be encased or built into concrete. Contractor to assure that other work such as sleeves, electrical conduits, pipes, anchors, etc., are properly placed and secured in position before concrete is placed. Items that require inspection shall have been inspected and tested for both material and mechanical operation and shall have been completed before concrete is placed. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE; AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to insure uninterrupted progress of work. B. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep reinforcement steel under cover and off the ground using supports. Protect reinforcing steel from rusting, oil, grease, or distortion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with a rigid non-absorptive material to offer optimum appearance and leave a smooth, stain-free surface. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without objectionable bow or deflection. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings. 1. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form," Class I. 2. Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood," Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete - Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at feast 2 edges and. one side for tight fit. C. Form Coatings - Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg/l that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center D. Form Ties - Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 14x2 inches to-exposed surface. 1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 14nch diameter in concrete surface. E. Form Release Agent; Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will, not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars - Reinforcing steel must be conectly rolled to section and free from all surface defects and shall be in accordance with ASTM A615 Grade 60 as evidenced by manufacturers certificates. The grade of steel shall be intermediate, new billet stock. All bars shall be deformed and rolled with raised symbols to identify the manufacturer and the size of the bar. B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars - ASTM A 767, Class II (2.0 oz. zinc psf) hot-dip galvanized, after fabrication and bending. C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars - ASTM A 775. .D. Steel Wire - ASTM A 82, plain, ,cold-drawn steel. E. Welded Wire Fabric - ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric. F. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric - ASTM A 497. G. Supports for Reinforcement - Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices-for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI. Class 2). 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement - ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fly Ash - ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F., 20% max. C. Normal Weight Aggregates - ASTM C 33 and as herein specked. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. . - 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect. D. Lightweight Aggregates - ASTM C 330. E. Water - Drinkable. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3 t Aging Well Center at The Long Center F, Admixtures, General - Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. G. Air-Entraining Admixture - ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated In the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Air-Tide," Cormix. b. "Air-Mix" or "PermaAir, " Euclid Chemical Co. C. "Darex AEA" orr"Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co. d. "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air," Master Builders, Inc. G. "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc. f. "Sika AER," Sika Corp. 2. Omit Air-entraining admixture from all concrete mixtures for all interior concrete floor slabs. H. Water-Reducing Admixture - ASTM C 494, Type A. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp. b. "PSI K" Cormix. c. "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co. e: "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries. g. "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp. High-Range'Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer) - ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. May be used in all pumped concrete and concrete with a water-cement ratio below 0.50. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: a. "Super P," Anti-Hydro Co., Inc. b. "PSI Super," Cormix. C. 'Eucon 37," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "WRDA 19" or "Daracem," W.R. Grace & Co. G. "Rheobuild," Master Builders, Inc. f. "PSP," Prokrete Industries. g. "Sikament 300; Sika Corp. J. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture - ASTM C 494, Type E. 1. Available Products -Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Q-Set," Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co. b. "Gilco Accelerator," Cormix. c. "Accelguard 80," Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Daraset," W.R. Grace & Co. e. "Pozzutec 20," Master Builders, Inc. K. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture - ASTM C 494, Type D. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "PSI-R Plus," Cormix. b. "Eucon Retarder 75," Euclid Chemical Co. c. "Daratard-17," W. R. Grace & Co. d. "Pozzolith R," Master Builders, Inc. e. "Protard," Prokrete Industries, f. "Plastiment," Sika Corporation. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4 1 J C L Aging Well Center at The Long Center L Fibrous Reinforcement - Engineered polypropylene fibers designed for secondary reinforcement of concrete slabs. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated In the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Fiberstrand 100," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "Fibermesh," Fibermesh, Inc. c. "Forts CR," Forts Corp. d. "Grace Fibers," W.R. Grace & Co. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint Filler. Expansion joint fillers shall be asphalt impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D-1751. Joint fillers shall extend .full depth of slab or joint and be thickness and lengths indicated on drawings. B. Anchor Slots: Hot-Dipped ,galvanized, #22 ga. metal, felt filled, equal to No. 305 made by Hohman & Bernard or approved equal. ' C. Inserts: Inserts shall be either adjustable, threaded or wedge types depending on use as manufactured by Hohman &,Bernard or approved equal. D. Reglets - Where resilient or elastometic sheet flashing or bituminous membranes are ' terminated in reglets, provide regk is of not less than 0.0217 inch thick (26-gage) galvanized sheet steel. Fill reglet or cover face opening to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 1 E. Waterstops - Provide flat, dumbbell-type or centerbulb-type waterstops at construction joints and other joints as indicated. Size to suit joints. F. RubberWaterstops - Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513. 1. Available Manufacturers Subject to -compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. The Burke Co. b. Progress Unlimited. c. Williams Products, Inc. G. Polyvinyl Chloride Waters" - Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 1. Available Manufacturers - Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, ' but are not limited to, the following: a. The Burke Co. b. Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. c. W.R. Meadows, Inc. d. Progress Unlimited. e. Schlegel Corp. f. Vinylex Corp. ' H. Granular Base - Evenly graded mixture of fine and coarse aggregates to provide, when compacted, a smooth and even surface below slabs on grade. 1. Sand Cushion - Clean, manufactured or natural sand. J. Vapor Retarder - Provide vapor retarder cover over. prepared base material where Indicated below slabs on grade. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with.ASTM E 154, as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Water-resistant barrier consisting of 'heavy Kraft papers laminated together with glass-fiber reinforcement and overcoated with black polyethylene on each side. K. Vapor Barrier - Pfemoulded membrane, seven-ply construction consisting of reinforced core and carrier sheet with fortified bitumen layers, protective weathercoating, and plastic antistick sheet. Water vapor transmission rate of 0.00 grains/sq. ft./hr. when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. Provide manufacturer's recommended mastics and gusset tape. 1. Product - "Sealtight Premoulded Membrane with Plasmatic Core," W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2. Absorptive Cover - Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. L. Moisture-Retaining Cover - One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. M. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound - ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 1. Available Products - Subject to,compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Conhard," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. b. "Safe Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp. C. "Aqua-Cure;" Euclid Chemical Co. d. "Dress & Seal #18W8," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. "Masterseal W," Master Builders, Inc. f. "Intex," W.R. Meadows, Inc. g. "Sike Membrane," Sika Corp. N. Evaporation Control - Monomolecular film forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces-for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "Eucobar," Euclid Chemical Co. b. "E-Con," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. C. "Confilm," Master Builders, Inc. 0. Underlayment Compound - Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable, cement-based compound for applications from one inch thick to feathered edges. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. "K-15;" Ardex, Inc. b "Conflow;' Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. C. "LevelLayer II," Dayton Superior Corp. d. "Flo-Top," Euclid Chemical Co. e. "Levelex," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. If. "Pourcrete," Master Builders, Inc. g. "Stoncrete UL1," Stonhard, Inc. h. "Thom Undedayment Self-Leveling," Thoro System Products. P. Bonding Compound - Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base. 1. Available Products - Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Polyvinyl Acetate (Interior Only): 1. "Superior Concrete Bonder," Dayton Superior Corp. 2. "Euco Weld," Euclid Chemical Co. 3. "Weld-Crete;' Larsen Products Corp. 4. "Everweld," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6 ?I u J E I L ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center b. Acrylic or Styrene Butadiene:. 1. "Acrylic Sondcrete," The Burke Co. 2. "Strongbond," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. 3. "Day. Chem Ad Bond," Dayton Superior Corp.. , 4. "SBR Latex," Euclid Chemical Co. 5. "Daraweld C," .W.R Grace iii Co. 6. "Homweld"A.C. Ham, Inc. 7. "Everbond," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., 8.. "Acryl-Set," Master Builders Inc. 9. "Intralok," W.R. Meadows, Inc. 10.."Son9crete," Sonnebom-Rexnord...- 11. "Stonlock L132," $tonhard, Inc. Q. Epoxy Adhesive - ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material "Type;' "Grade," and "Class" to suit project requirements. 1. Available Products- Subject to compliance with requirements, products that maybe incorporated in the work include, but areFnot limited to, the following: a. "Burke Epoxy M.V.," The Burke Co. b. "Spec-Bond 100" Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co. C. "Euco E=poxy System #452.otr #620," Euclid Chemical Co. 1 d. "Epoxtite.Binder 2390,".A_C. Hom, Inc. e. "Epabond" L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. f. "Concresive 1001," Master Buikiers,1nc. ' g. "Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod," Sika Corp. R. Non-Shrink Grout: Non-Shrink Grout: Pre-mixed non-shrink grout as called for on drawings shall be manufactured by. . 1. The Euclid Chemical Company - Euoo N-S Group" (All exposed grout). 2. The Euclid Chemical Company - "Firmix". 3. Master, Builders - "Embeco 885". 4. Anto-Hydro Comparry. - "Axpandcrets Metallics," 5. Sonnebom - "Ferrolith G". 6. Lambert Corporation - "Vibropruf #11" S. Chemical Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous. solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lbs. of fluosilicate per gal. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete. by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batches are selected as the method of proportioning, the mix design shall be proportioned to achieve an average 28-day compressive strength of 1200 psi in excess of the design strength indicated on the Contract drawings, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing. ' 1. Limit use of fly ash to not e 0 percent of ggM%aLqmtent weight. B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. - Do not .begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect . C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on drawings and schedules: 1. 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.42 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.40 maximum (air-entrained). 2. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.45 maximum CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.6 (non-air-entrained), 0.42 maximum (air-entrained) 3. 3500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.48 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.45 maximum (air-entrained). 4. 3000-psi, 2"ay compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.52 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.48 maximum (air?entrained). 5. 2500-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.56 maximum (non-air-entrained), 0.54 maximum (air-entrained). 6. Maximum water-cement (W/C) ratio for the following conditions should be as follows: a. Subjected to freezing and thawing; W/C 0.45. b. Subjected to brackish water, salt spray, or deicers; W/C 0.40 C. Concrete required to be watertight; W/C 0.40. D. Lightweight Concrete - Proportion mix as specified. Design mix to produce strength and modulus of elasticity as noted on drawings, with a splitting tensile strength factor (Fct) of not less than 5.5 for 3000-psi concrete and a dry weight of not less than 95 lbs. or more than 110 lbs. after 28 days. Limit shrinkage to 0.03 percent at 28 days., E. Maximum Slump: 1. Concrete containing the specified high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer) shall have a maximum slump of 8 inches after addition of HRWR, unless otherwise approved by the Architect. 2. Ramps Slabs, and sloping surfaces -- Not more than 3 inches. 3. Reinforced foundations system - Not less than 1 inch and not more than 4 inches. 4. All other concrete shall have a maximum slump of 4 inches, +/-1 inch. F. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes - Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C). C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for industrial slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50. ' D. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturers prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5% within following limits: E. 1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: a. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 5.5 percent (severe exposure) 1-1/2-inch max. aggregate. b. 4.5 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 1-inch max. aggregate. C. 5.0 percent (moderate exposure); 6.0 percent (severe exposure) 3/4-inch max. aggregate. d. 5.5 percent (moderate exposure); 7.0 percent (severe exposure) 1/2-inch CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center max. aggregate. 2. Other concrete (not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure) or to receive a surface hardener. 3% air. F. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control In strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Job-Site Mixing - Mix materials for concrete in appropriate drum type batch machine mixer. For mixers of one cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than one cu, yd., increase minimum and maximum mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof. B. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. C. Ready-Mix Concrete - Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. D. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours* to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is ' above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders with placement of forms ' and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS ' A. General - Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction ' tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for ' openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, messes, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work: Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints ' and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place ' concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, eaglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. ' E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inacoessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate ' temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Provisions for Other Trades - Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. H. Cleaning and Tightening -'t'horoughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement ,as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 VAPOR RETARDERIBARRIER INSTALLATION A. General - Following leveling and tamping of granular base for slabs on grade, place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. B. Lap joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturers' recommended mastic and pressure-sensitive tape. C. After placement of vapor retarder/barder, cover with sand cushion and compact to depth as shown on drawings. 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General - Comply With Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. C. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect. E. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. F. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. 3.5 JOINTS A. Construction Joints - Locate and install construction joints as-indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect. Construction joints must be per FBC Sections 1907.4.1 and 1907.4.2. B Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-10 for slabs. Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements. D. Use, bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. E. Waterstops - Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint.. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress. of work. Field-fabricate joints in waterstops In accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. F. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground - Construct isolation joints in slabs-0n-ground at points of contact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and elsewhere as indicated. G. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Sections of these specifications. - 1 H. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Constrict contraction joints in slabs-on-ground to form panels of patterns as shown. Use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 slab depth or inserts 1/4 inch wide by 1/4 of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard ' strip into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. 2. Cortraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon ' as possible. after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate. 3. If joint pattern not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located, to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, ' half bays, third bays). 1. Joint Spacing: Unless otherwise noted, the maximum spacing of construction joints shall be as follows: 1. Foundation walls, walls: Forty-five (45) feet. 2. Slabs: Fifteen (15) feet. ' 3.6 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General - Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting ' drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Install reglets to receive top edge of foundation sheet waterproofing and to receive thru wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, relieving angles, and other conditions. C. Forms for Slabs - Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to ' obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 1 3.7 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. General - Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 Aging Wnll'Center at The Long Center 3.8 B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in'forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the forms as quickly as possible by method which will prevent segregation and loss of materials. Concrete shall be deposited In the forms as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid re-handling. Special care shall be 'exercised to prevent splashing of forms or reinforcement with concrete in advance of pouring. Concrete shall be deposited in a continuous manner until a given unit of construction, as approved by the Architect, has been completed. P_I_acement of the following concrete shall be rzroftited: L_ Partialiv hardened concrete. 2`_ Cnn nuked concrete. . 3._ Re-Ae=ered concrete. 4. Concrete that has been re-mixed after initial set. B. Inspection - Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other'trades in setting such work. C. General - Comply 'Wgh ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified. . D. Deposit concrete continuously or'in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. E. Placing Concrete in Forms - Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each.layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. F. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. 1. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. G. Placing Concrete Slabs - Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints,'until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly wdiked around reinforcement'and other embedded items and into comers. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 Aging Well Center at The Long Center floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces pdor.to beginning finishing operations. . 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement. H. Cold-Weather Placing - Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect ' concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. Water shall not be heated over 180 deg. F. 2. Do not use frozen. materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3.. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical acoelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 4. Concrete worts shall be protected by wind breaks, curing compounds, and blanket covers if necessary in order to maintain the concrete in-place temperatures of at least 50 deg. F. for a period of seven (7) days after placing. If ' high early strength concrete Is used, this time period may be reduced to three (3) days 1. Hot Weather Placing .- When hot weather eondfioris exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 1. Cool ingredients beforemixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90. deg F (32 deg C). Mpdng water may be. chilled, or chopped ice may be*used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of muting water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in ooncrete. 3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low ' humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect. 3.9 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES ' A. Rough Form Finish - For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exoeeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. v r d t t b d t f i o v ew or o e co e e aces expose e sur B. Smooth Form Finish - For formed concre with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly ' to sonde, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and other projections completely removed and ' smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish - Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form ' removal 1. Moisten concrete-surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-13 Aging Well Center at The Long Center D. Grout-Cleaned Finish - Provide grout=cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces that have received smooth form finish treatment 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture of acrylic or styrene butadiene-based bonding admixture and water to consistency of thick paint. Blend 'standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill .small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Relates! Unformed Surfaces - At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike--off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue filial surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.10: MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish - Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerances for floor flatness (Ff) of 15 and floor levelness (Fl) of 13. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set=with stiff brushes, brooms; or rakes. B. Float Finish - Apply float finish to= monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finished, as hereinafter specked; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane ov-elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated. After screening, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. 'Check and level surface plane to tolerances of Ff 18 - Fl 15. Cut down, high spats and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish - Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved -over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of Ff 20 - Fl 17. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish - Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming: E. Nonslip Broom Finish - Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffid route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-14 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1 F. After completion of float finishing and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lbs. of dampened nonslip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not-force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. ' G. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose nonslip aggregate. 3.11 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General - Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture- l i l i ' y n a . App loss before and during finishing'operations with an evaporation-control mater accordance with manufacturers instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days at 50 degrees F minimum temperature. ' C. Curing Methods - Perform, curing 'of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist i n curing; by moisture,-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as here specified. D. Provide moisture curing by,foikawing methods. 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete - surface with • specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage 'of concrete surfaces and edges, with 44nch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. ' E. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: 1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. F. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, ' walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Apply. specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturers directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 1 Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with ' finish materials applied directly to concrete. G. Curing Formed Surfaces - Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full ' curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. H. Curing Unformed .Surfaces - Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and ' other flat surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method. I. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-16 Aging Well Center at The Long Center moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. General - Comply with ACI 347 for shoring and reshoring in multistory construction, and as herein specified. B. Extend shoring from ground to roof for structures 4 stories or less, unless otherwise permitted. C. Extend shoring at least 3 floors under floor or roof being placed for structures over 4 stories. Shore floor directly under floor or roof being placed, so that loads from construction above will transfer directly to these shores. Space shoring in stories below this level in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members where no reinforcing steel is provided. Extend shores beyond minimums to ensure proper distribution of loads throughout structure. D. Remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially'cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support work without excessive stress or deflection. E. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 15 days after, placing upper tier, and longer if required, until concrete has attained its required 28-day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General - Fdrmwork not' supporting weight of concrete; such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports. REUSE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In - Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE . 03300 -16 1 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work B. Reinforced Masonry - Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond ' beams where indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas - Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect. ' B. Cut out honeycomb,. rode pockets, voids over 114 Inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place ' patching mortar before bonding cgmpound has dried. C. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portiand cement and standard portland ' cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. ' D. Repair of Formed Surfaces - Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other Orojections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. E. Flush out form be holes-, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. F. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete. G. Repair of Unformed Surfaces - Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface- plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain ' for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required slope. H. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that ' penetrate to n3mforoement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 1. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 ' days. J. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface ' finishing operations by cutting out law areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish repaired areas to blend into. adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect. K. Repair defective arms, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-17 Agin# Well Center ' at The Long Center apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. L. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack ' method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for ' handling and placing. Place dry-pack before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. , M. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. N. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect. , 3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General - The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by Architect. ' 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete - ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. ' 2. Slump - ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day s pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 3. Air Content - ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for , each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 4. Concrete Temperature - Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. 5. Compression Test Specimen - ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. ' C. Compressive Strength Tests - ASTM C 38; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens ' tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing 9 required. D. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if ' fewer than 5 are used. E. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., Architect may waive strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength Is provided. I F. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective ' procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. G. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 _ 18 e i i Aging Well Center at The Long Center consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. H. Test results will be reported, in - writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.: 1. Nondestructive Testing - Impact hammer,- sonoscope, or other nondestructive device . may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-19 ,, North Port Youth Community Center J. Additional Tests - The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained In the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with K. ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 20 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1 SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with governing codes and applicable provisions of the following: ' 1. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA), including ";MK Bulletins", 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI), including ACI 531, ACI 531 R and ACI 531.1. 3. Portland Cement Association (PCA), "Concrete Masonry Handbook". B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Where fire-resistance ratings are indicated for unit masonry work, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies ' whose fire endurance has been determined by testing in compliance with ASTM E 119 by a recognized testing and inspecting organization or by another means, as acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. C. Field Construction Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of masonry work, erect sample wall ' representative of completed masonry work required for project with respect to qualities of appearance, materials and construction. Locate mock-ups during construction as standard for judging completed masonry work. Build mock-ups which are approximately 6' long by 4' high by full thickness. When directed, demolish mock-ups and remove from site. 1.3 SU BMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of masonry unit, accessory and other manufactured products, including certifications that each type complies with specified requirements. 1.4 JO B CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with waterproof sheeting at end of each days work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. ' B. Extend ever a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. C. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours after building masonry walls or columns. ' D. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. UNIT MASONRY 04200-1 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center E. Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed ' or painted. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with such masonry. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over all surface. F. Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar. G. Cold Weather protection 1. Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen. 2. Remove all masonry determined to be damaged by freezing conditions. 3. No masonry work shall be performed when the air temperature is 38 deg. F. and ' falling. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MASONRY UNITS - GENERAL A. Manufacturer. Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. B. Masonry Unit Characteristics: Provide units complying with standards referenced and requirements indicated. ' 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU) ' A. Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long x 8" (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual), unless otherwise indicated. B. Special Shapes: Provide where required for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. C. Hollow Load Bearing (HL) CMU - ASTM C 90 and as follows: 1. Grade N. D. Weight Classification: Normal weight units unless otherwise indicated. (125 ibs. per cu. ft. or more, oven dry weight of concrete.) E. Cure units by atmospheric drying for not less than 30 days before installation, to comply with ASTM C 90, Type II. ' F. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. Where special finishes are indicated, provide units with exposed faces of the following general description matching color and texture as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard color and texture. a. Standard aggregate, ground finish, b. Standard aggregate, split face finish. ' G. Prefaced Concrete Block: Provide lightweight concrete units indicated below with manufacturer's standard smooth resinous the facing complying with ASTM C744: UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 2 1 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. For units on which prefaced surfaces are molded, comply with the following requirements: a. Hollow Loadlearing Block: ASTM C90, Grade N, Type I. 2. ` Size: Manufacturer's standard with nominal facie dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) x thickness indicated for units on which prefaced ' surfaces are molded; with 1/160 thick returns of facing to create 1/4" wide mortar joints with modular coursing. 1. Color and Pattern: Match remaining adjacent concrete masonry in coursing and finish appearance. ' 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. ' C T e S ASTM C 207 t d Li H d . , yp . e me: y ra D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than 1/4" use aggregate graded ' with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. F. Water: Clean and potable. 2.4 MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing and Ties for Masonry: Provide welded wire units prefabricated in straight lengths of not less than 10', with matching comer ("L') and intersecting ('T') units. Fabricate from cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A 82, with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods, into units with widths of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and partitions as required to position side rods for full embedment in mortar with mortar coverage of not less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and not less than ' 1/2" elsewhere. Provide the following type of joint reinforcing unless otherwise indicated. 1. Truss type with diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16" o.c. B. Number of Side Rods: Single pair for single wythe masonry. C. Wire Sizes: Fabricate with 9-gage side and cross rods, unless otherwise indicated. D. Wire Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard mill galvanized finish except as otherwise indicated. E. For exterior walls hot-dip galvanized joint reinforcing after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating (1.5 oz. per sq. ft.). 1 UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center F. Steel Strap Anchors: Provide straps, bars, bolts and rods fabricated from not less than 16 ga. sheet metal or 318" diameter rod stock, unless otherwise indicated. G. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories 1. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18. 2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES ' A. Do not lower the freezing point of mortar by use of admixtures or anti-freeze agents. B.' Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. C. Mortar for, Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise indicated. , D. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement - lime. E. Use Type N mortar for all interior masonry work. F. Use Type S mortar for all exterior masonry work. G. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use in construction of unit masonry. Use grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (tine or coarse) at. time of placement which will completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Thickness: Build masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. B. Build chases and recesses as shown and as required for the work of other trades. Provide not less than 9' of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses unless otherwise noted. C. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units. D. Do not wet concrete masonry units. E. Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in running bond vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below except as otherwise noted. F. Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement-type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center G. Lay-up walls plumb and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work H. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-masonry unit length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly (if required to be wetted), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 1. Built-In Work: As the work progresses, build-in items specified under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. J. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. K. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer 'metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. L. Fill CMU cores with grout 3 courses (24'1 under bearing plates, beams, lintels, pots and similar conditions unless otherwise Indicated. M. Non-Loadbearing Interior Partition Walls: Build full height of story to underside of solid stricture above, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units will full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in all courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or to be filled with concrete or grout. For starting courses on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. B. Joints: Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. If not otherwise indicated, lay walls with 318" joints. Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or to be covered by other materials. Tool all exposed joints in masonry walls slightly concave using a jointer larger than joint thickness. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of caulking or sealants where shown. C. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound comers at jambs to ft stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 3.3 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCING A. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Full embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 518" on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6". Do not bridge control and expansion joints with reinforcing, unless otherwise indicated. Provide continuity at comers and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and 'T' sections. Cut and bend units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. B. Space conditions horizontal reinforcing as follows: 1. For single wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless -otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 5 A"ging'Well Center at The Long Center 2. Reinforce masonry openings greater than T-0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above lintels and below sills. 3. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 7-0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. 3.4 ANCHORING MASONRY WORK A. See Drawings. 3.6 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than V-0" are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precast or formed in place lintels. Cure precast masonry before handling or installing. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 REPAIR, POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise , damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar. or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints at comers, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of..caulking or sealant compounds. C. Clean exposed CMU masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Comply with recommendations in NCMA .TEK Bulletin No. 28. END OF SECTION 04200 , I I r UNIT MASONRY 04200 - 6 1 1 r? Aging Well'Center at The Long Center SECTION 05400 - COLA-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Bidding Requirements, Contractual Conditions, and General Requirements of Division 1 shall apply to all work hereunder. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. The intent of this Section provides for the furnishing and installation of structural steel studs as shown on Drawings and specified herein, including all materials, labor, equipment, accessories and incidental items necessary to complete the work. B. Work under this Section shall be coordinated with other trades to insure proper spacing and location of studs for application of other materials, windows, equipment, etc. 1 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior r bn•load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non'-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Ceiling joist framing. B. Related Sections include the following: . 1. Division'9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies". 2. Division 9 Section "Portland Cement Plaster". 1 A QUALITY ASSURANCE AISI d AISC alt f i h th A. e an con orm w t All structural properties and allowable weld loads sh Specifications for the Design Light-Gauge of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition, as well as Standard Engineering Design Practices. B. Welding - In accordance with the Standard Code of Ar and Gas Welding in Building Construction and conform to American Welding Society (AWS) D.13, latest edition of Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel_ C. Materials shall be obtained in as much as possible from a single manufacturer. 1.5 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) - Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members, latest edition. B. American Welding Society, (AWS) D.1.3, latest edition, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A446. 2. ASTM A525. ' 3. ASTM A568. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 4. ' ASTM A645. D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) - Manual of Steel- Construction, latest edition. E. - All Federal, State and Local Codes. Should conflict occur, the most stringent requirements shall prevail. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings - In- accordance with Section 01340; furnish complete calculations, properties, loading, fabrication and erection drawings for approval prior to commencement of fabrication. Include descriptive literature containing product installation specifications and details, as well as current and valid welder's certificates. Indicate that calculations for wind loading are based on ASCE 7.02 Code, and shall be designed for the wind speed shown in the structural plan documents. The deflection shall be limited to U600 for those areas with brick cladding, and L/360 for other finishes. Submit drawings and calculations for all framing required to support all surfaces and finishes Indicated on the drawings. B. Product Data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. C. Certification - Submit written certification from manufacturer that studs, components and accessories are compatible and suitable for intended application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Upon delivery, all materials shall be protected from inclement weather. Store material off ground, covered where required to protect material from the elements, ventilated to prevent condensation and sloped to permit drainage. B. Handle materials to prevent damage. Any material damaged, rusted, bent, etc. shall be removed from the job site immediately. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER'S A. Subject to compliance with requirements, the following manufacturer's offer products that may be incorporated into the work: 1. Unimast. 2. Dale/Incur Industries. 3. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 4. Gold Bond Building Products. B. Other manufacturers offering similar products may be considered subject to complete data submittal and Architect approval prior to bidding in accordance with Division 1. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All framing members shall be. formed from hot-dipped galvanized steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A653, with a minimum yield strength of 50 ksi for studs, and ASTM A653, with a minimum yield strength of 33 ksi for runner tracks. Materials shall comply with AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", Eight Edition. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2 1 1 1 Cl t F 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Studs shall be "C" shaped of minimum 18 gauge galvanized, punched members. Channel shaped runner tracks shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized, unpunched members, and as shown on the Drawings. C. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A525, G-60. All framing components shall be galvanized. Other components or accessories shall be galvanized or given a coat of rust= resistant paint, lead free. D. Bridging channels shall be 1-1W cold-rolled 16 gauge galvanized steel with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. Bridging channels shall be spaced vertically 4'-0" o.c. maximum. E. Miscellaneous clips, angles,' splice plates, etc. shall. be of minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel, located as shown or where required, to complete the stud assembly. F. Welding is the preferred method of attachment, however, if screws are used, Type S-12, head type as required, shall be utilized. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for screw attachment, quantity, torque, etc.* 2.3 FABRICATION A. Structural metal stud framing components maybe prefabricated into panels prior to erection. Prefabricated panels must fit precisely into wall system. No splicing will be allowed at any time. B. All framing components shall be cut squarely, or on an angle, as required to fit squarely and accurately against abutting members. Members shall be held firmly in position until properly fastened. ' C. Attachments of similar components shall be done. by welding. Dissimilar stud components shall be attached by welding, screw attaching, or bolting. Wine tying of framing components in structural applications shall not be permitted. D. Prefabricated panels shall be square and braced against racking. Lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner so as not to cause local distortion in any member. E. Tracks shall be continuous and welded to all vertical studs. F. Abrasions and welds shall be touched-up with approved galvanizing paint. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Inspection - Prior to installation, inspect work of all other trades. Verify that all such work is complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly commence in strict accordance with framing Shop Drawings. B. Discrepancies 1. Immediately notify Architect of all discrepancies. 2. Do not proceed with installation In areas of discrepancies until such discrepancy has been fully resolved. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of conditions and responsibility for performance of complete specified system. 3.2 ERECTION I COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. All studs and runner tracks shall be welded to horizontal steel angles, welded to steel structure or anchored to concrete slab as shown on Drawings. Provide diagonal stud braces as shown or otherwise required to resist lateral loads. B. Studs shall be seated squarely in the track with the stud web and flanges abutting the track web, plumbed or aligned and securely attached to the flanges or web of both the upper and lower tracks. Studs shall be plumb, aligned, and vertical to maximum 1/8" in 10'-0" any direction. Maximum deviation in any one (1) run shall be 3/8" total variation. C. Butt welds or splices shall be used at all butt joints in the track. D. Splices in axial loaded studs shall not be permitted. ' E. All welds shall be fully developed fillet plug, butt or seam type. F. Where studs abut back to back, they shall be secured together by bolting or welding at the point of attachment to horizontal steel angles. G. All connections shall be carefully examined. Defective, faulty or suspect conditions shall be corrected immediately. ' H. Temporary bracing, where required, shall be provided until erection is completed. 1. Provide insulation equal to that specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs, double header members, or other areas which may be inaccessible to the insulation installer at time of ' installation. J. Isolate all studs and metal components from dissimilar materials that may cause adverse reactions. K. At door and window openings, unless otherwise specified, provide double studs at each side of opening and headers of 16 gauge runner track. At window sill, provide 16 gauge runner track. L. At all building expansion joints, discontinue runner track top and bottom and place stud each side of joint. At other material control joints, provide stud each side of joint as required. 3.3 WELDING RECOMMENDATIONS A. Arc welding is the most common method for joining framing components. 1. Shielded metal arc welding (SMAW) is typically used for 18 gauge and heavier steel members. Good welds may be obtained with 3/32" or 1/8" diameter AWS Type E-6012, E-6013 or E-7014 rods. Equipment heat settings vary depending on material thickness. A 200 ampere "hot bo)e' electric welder or gasoline generator welder is suitable. 2. Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) is preferred for lighter 20 gauge members. Good welds may be obtained with AWS E-705-3, -5 or -6 wire electrode in .030" to .035" diameter using CO2, Argon-oxygen, or Argon CO2 gas shielding. A wire-feed welder with a capacity of 60-11- amperes at approximately 23 volts requiring 220-volt, 3 phase electric service is suggested for fast, uniform welding. B. Welding may be employed in the field, or in the shop when prefabricated panels are utilized. r C. All welds and abrasions shall be touched-up with approved galvanizing paint after erection. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 4 ' 1, 1 North Port Youth Community Center 3A D. Welds and techniques shall be verified with steel stud manufacturer prior to fabrication or erection. CLEANING A. Prior to installation of any track, thoroughly. clean surface to receive track. B. During and after installation, remove discarded, scrap and excess materials, waste products, construction debris, etc. caused by steel stud erection process. Leave site clean and ready for next trade. C. After installation, and just prior to enclosing the stud system with sheathing or gypsum wallboard, inspect complete assembly for proper attachment, weld integrity, rigidity, etc. Remove, replace or repair any faulty conditions immediately. Any rust shall be removed and spot painted. END OF SECTION 05410 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 5 ' L 1 1 I 1 Aging Well Center at The Long, Center SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel framing and supports for operable partitions. 2. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 5. Shelf angles. 6. Metal bollards. 7. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 2 Section "Site Furnishings". 2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete". 3. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies!'. 4. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpenhy". 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements' from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing budding, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental erects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1 1 • Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.4 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 7.5 A. B. 1.6 A. 1.7 A. B. SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless steel certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Welding certificates. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1 /D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" 2. AWS D1.21D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel." PROJECT CONDITIONS Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. COORDINATION Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 1 1 Aging Well Center, at The Lang Center PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces,. General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 FERROUS METALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. l Pl a ASTM A 36/A 36M B. . ates, Sh pes, and Bars: Stee C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304. D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type- 304. E. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. F. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793. G. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface] [or] [with " abrasive material metallically bonded to steel. M. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing. 1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 531A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated. J. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold formed metal boot channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches. 2. Material: Galvan¢ed steel, ASTM A 6531A 653M, commercial steel, Type, with G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness. 3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B; [0.0966- inch minimum thickness; unfinished. K Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B"209, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. C. Aluminum Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM S 6328 632M, Alloy 6061-T6. D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/8 26M Alloy 443.0-F. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center E.. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 3616 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz metal, 60 percent copper). F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze). G. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83800 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400 (leaded semired brass). H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500. 1. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel bronze). 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3.. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections. C. Universal Shop Primer. Fast-curing, lead- and chromate free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. 1 i it U i t i i i t th t k il di ti i h bl f h i i . rom z nc-r mer. se pr mer con a n ng p gmen s a ma e eas y s ngu s a e c pr D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat. , E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. G. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 1. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal- weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4 1 r 2.6 1 1 1 I t 1 FABRICATION, GENERAL Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. Shop Assembly. Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas-on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the. following: 1. Use materials and methods that minunize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately: 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows, after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where. possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. F. G. N. 1. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and comers of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS General: Provide steel framing and supports not specked in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. A. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction. B 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Fumish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3. Revise first paragraph below if tubing is used. Revise default weld size requirement, or delete C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. D. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated. 2.8 SHELF ANGLES A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide mitered and welded units at comers. 2. Provide open. joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint. B. For cavity walls, provide vertical.channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete. C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls. D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer. E. Fumish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-in- place concrete. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. 1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim. D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. 2.10 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate. 2. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary cutouts for controls and holes for wire. 3. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for fixtures and holes for wire. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 6 1 Aging Weil Center at The Long Center B. Fabricate bollards with 31$4nch thick steel baseplates for boiling 'to concrete slab. Drill ' baseplates at all four comers for 3/4-inch anchor bolts. 1. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle baseplates for plumb alignment of bollards. C. Fabricate sleeves for bollard anchorage from steel pipe or tubing with 114-inch-thick steel plate welded to bottom of sleeve. Make sleeves not less than 8 inches deep and 314 inch larger than OD of bollard. D. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch wall- thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch less than ID of bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch steel machine bok. E. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Pro ducts" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ' .B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove 'tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated. 1. Shop prime with primers-specified in Division 9 painting Sections unless indicated. ' C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning" 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Division 9 Section "High-Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commerclal Blast Cleaning." ' 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting 'of'Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. fl IViI=tIl>!1_13:t191?Y1LO1;61 05500 - 7 F_ L Aging.Well Center at The Long Center 2.13 ALUMINUM FINISHES ' A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish:. AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class 1, clear coating ' 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL , A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are , not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of. exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to in-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, ' and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 8 Aging Well Center. at The Long Center' B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of pipe columns. 1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or ' masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. D. 'Install pipe columns on-concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article. 1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and leveled. ' 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before installing. 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. B. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors. Provide four 3/4-inch bolts at each bollard unless otherwise indicated. ' 1. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete. C. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 118 inch (3 mm) toward - bollard. D. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. E. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves preset into concrete. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 118 inch toward internal sleeve. ' F. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align sleeves in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured. G. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch machine bolts and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish padlocks. ' H surface to shed water ndi Fill b ll d lidl ith te t . . o ar s so y w concre , mou ng op 1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete. .METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 9 F L? Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds,. bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. .1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9 painting Sections. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 11 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-10 0 N. Aging Well Center at-The Long Center SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART1-GENERAL A. The Conditions of the Contract apply to this section. 1.1 SCOPE A. Furnish all labor, material and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and/or specified. These items of work to be performed shall include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Nailing strips and grounds. 2. Hardware for securing rough carpentry materials. 3. Lay work out accurately to lines inducaled. 4. Select materials to suit the required function of the part. 5. Furnish shop drawings for work which will be made in any shop of factory. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that trued materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterbome treatrent, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of. warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. ReseardVEvaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in effect for Project: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Engineered wood products. 4. Power-driven fasteners. 5. Powder-actuated fasteners. 6. Expansion anchors. 7. Metal framing anchors. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 -1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Workmen: Provide sufficient workmen-and supervisors of who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work, and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of construction involved and the materials and techniques specified. B. Rejection: In acceptance or rejection -of rough carpentry, the Architect will make no allowance for lack of skill on the part of the workman. C. Forest Certification: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": 1. Dimension lumber framing. 2. Miscellaneous lumber. D. Product Handling 1. Protection a. Store all materials in such a manner as to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage and the weather. ..b. Keep all materials clearly identified with all grade marks legible. Keep all damaged material clearly identified as damaged, and store separately to prevent its inadvertent use. C. Do not allow installation of -damaged or otherwise noncomplying material. d. Use all means necessary to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 2. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 INSPECTION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.2 WORKMANSHIP A. General: All rough carpentry shall produce joints true, tight and weil-nailed, with all members assembled in accordance with the drawings and with all pertinent codes and regulations. B. Selection of Lumber Pieces: Carefully select all members. Select individual pieces so that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with placing bolts or proper nailing or making connections. C. Cut out and discard all defects which will render a piece unable to serve it intended function. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not it has been installed, ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 2 North Port Youth Community Center' ' for excessive warp, twist, bow, rook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting. D. Shimming: Do not shim joists, short studs, trimmers, headers, lintels, or other framing components. ' 2.3 PRESSURE TREATED LUMBER A. General: Use only pressure treated lumber for all sills, nailing grounds in, or in contact with, concrete. B. Treatment: Pressure treat all wood, as indicated on drawings and Section 06100. All pressure treated lumber for use on site shall have cut ends saturated with same preservative used on the material originally. C. Perform all treatment in strict accordance with the published recommendations of the manufacturer of the treatment preservative. ' PART 3 - GENERAL FRAMING 3.1 GENERAL 1 A. In addition to all framing operations normal to fabrication and erection indicated on the drawings, install all backing required for work of other trades. B. Set all horizontal or sloped members with crown up. C. Do not notch, bore, or cut members for pipes, ducts, conduits, or other reasons except as ' shown on the drawings or as specifically approved id advance by the Architect. 3.2 BEARINGS A. Make all bearings full unless. otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. Finish all bearing surfaces on which structural members are to rest so as to give sure and even support. Where framing members slope, cut or notch the ends as required to give uniform bearing surface. ' 3.3 BLOCKING AND BRIDGING ' A. Blocking: Install all blocking required to support all items of finish and to cut off all concealed draft openings, both vertical and horizontal, between ceiling and floor areas. 1. Fire-blocks, when wood, shall be two inches (nominal) in thickness by the full ' width of the opening being blocked. 2. The distance between a line of bridging and a bearing shall not exceed eight feet. 3. Install solid blocking between joists at all points of support and wherever sheathing or flooring is discontinuous. 3.4 BUILT-UP BEAMS A. Use no less than two joists spiked together to support partitions running parallel to the joists, provided however that where necessary to permit passage of pipes such joists may be separated by solid blocking spaced at no more than four feet on centers. 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 3 11 North Port Youth Conununity Center 3.5 FASTENING A. Nailing: Use only common wire nails or spikes of the dimension shown on the Nailing Schedule, except where otherwise called for on the drawings. All nails shall be hot dipped galvanized. B. For conditions not covered in the Nailing Schedule, provide penetration into the piece receiving the point of not less than % the length of the nail or spike provided, however, that 16d nails may be used to connect tow pieces of two-inch nominal thickness. C. Do all nailing without splitting wood.. Pre-bore as required. Replace all split members. D. Bolting: drill holes 1/16 inch larger in diameter than. the bolts being used. Drill straight and true from one side only. Bolt threads shall not bear on wood. Use washers under head and nut where both bear on wood; use washers under all-nuts. No counter boring of bolts will be allowed unless shown on drawing. E. Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, pre-bore holes same diameter as'root of thread; enlarge holes to shank diameter for length of shank. Screw, do not drive, all lag screws and wood screws. F. Nailing Schedule: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or required by pertinent codes and regulations, provide at least the following nailing: 1. Blocking to joist bearing: Two 10d toe nailed each side 2. Blocking to joist or stud: Two 10d toe nailed.each side 3. One inch brace to stud: Two 8d face nailed 4. Two inch brace to stud: Two 16d face nailed 5. Bridging to joist: Two 8d toenailed 6. Built-up beams eight inches or less in depth: 16d @ twelve inches on-centers, staggered 7. Joist and rafter to support: Two 10d toenailed each side at laps (twelve inches minimum): four 16d face nailed 8. Multiple joists: 16d @ twelve inches on centers, staggered 9. Joist to sill or girder: Two 8d (one straight, one slanted) 10. One inch furring to underside of joists: Two 16d (one straight, one slanted) 11. Studs toenailed to plate: Two 10d each side 12. Studs end nailed to plate: Two 20d 13. Studs nailed together: 16d @ twelve inches on centers, staggered 14. Upper to lower. 16d @ twelve inches on centers, staggered 15. At splices: Two 16d face nailed PART 4 - WORKMANSHIP 4.1 WORKMANSHIP A. Work shall be performed in conformance with good trade practice, recommendations of manufacturer's building codes, and these specifications unless specifically indicated otherwise on the drawings., END OF SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 1 Aging Weg Center at The Long Center SECTION 06402 -INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK ' PART I -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section- includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. ' 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops. 4. Closet and utility shelving. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section 'Construction Waste Management'. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry". 3. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers`. 4. Division 8 Section 'Door Hardware. 1 11 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For panel products, Solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and other items installed in architectural woodwork. 3. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 2. Plastic laminates. 3. PVC edge material. 4. Solid-surfacing materials. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402-1 I I Aging Well Center ' at The Long- Center D. Samples for Verification: ' 1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 2. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square. 3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. ' E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. F. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. G.. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabric ate products ' similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. , C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, ' finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and, certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified_ ' D. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WI's "Manual of Millwork' for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. ' 1. Provide WI-certified compliance labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. ' E. Forest Certification: Provide interior architectural woodwork produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 2 1 1 1 s Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Environmental Limitations: 'Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 43 and 70 percent during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork is supported and installed as indicated. B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde. 3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: a. Formica Corporation. b, Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div. C. wisonart International; Div. of Premark Intemational, Inc. D. Quartz Solid-Surfacing Material: 93 percent crushed quartz aggregate combined with resins and pigments and fabricated into slabs using vacuum vibro corpaction processcomplying with ISSFA 2. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 3 Aging. Well Center at The Lang Center 1. Manufacturers: Basis of. Design Products: See plan sheet a2.3. 2. Colors and Patterns: Basis of Design: See plan sheet A2.3. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural -cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products)". B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 100 degrees of opening. C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011. ' D. Pulls: See plans sheet A5.4_ E. Catches: Roller catches, BHMA A156.9, B03071. ' F. Adjustable Shelf. Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, 804081. G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal. ' H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, 605091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1 HD-100 and Grade 1 HD-200): Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches high and. 24 inches wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 11-113-100; for drawers more than 6 inches high or 24 inches wide. . ' 4. Keyboard Slides: Grade 1 HDA 00; for computer keyboard shelves. 5. Trash Bin Slides: Grade 11-113-100; for trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 inches wide. 1. Door Locks: BHMA Al 56.11, E07121. J. Drawer Locks: BHMA Al 56.11, E07041. ' K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 1-1/4-inch OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. " ` " , by Doug OG series 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mockett & Company, Inc. L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with , BHMA A156.18 for. BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturers standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 4 1 1 1 iI Aging Well Center at The,Long Centel` 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.' Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. ..B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant4reated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 1. Douglas fir4arch. 2. Douglas fir-south. 3. Douglas fir4arch (north). 4. Hem-fir. 5. Hem-fir (north). 6. Southern pine. 7. Spruce-pine-fir (south). 8. Spruce-pine-fir. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. D. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following. limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 58, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. F. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Woodworker's option. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hat-melt adhesive. G. Adhesive for Bonding Quartz Surfacing: Manufacturer's specifications. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise, indicated, provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Sand fire retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Comers of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 5 1 ? 0 Aging Welt Center ' at The Long Center E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum , extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance. for scribing, trimming, and fitting. F. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive "hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. ' 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade: Custom. ' B. WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless. C. WI Construction Type: Type II, single-length sections to fit access openings. D. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. E. Reveal Dimension: 1/8 inch. ' F. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: ' 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: Grade VGS, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. ' G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1 Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorativ anel ' " e p s. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels. ' H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High:pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL. ' 1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories: ' a. Solid colors, gloss and/or matte finish. J. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and , drawers, unless located directly under tops. K. Core Material at Base: Exterior-grade plywood. ' INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 6 " 1 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Custom. B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As indicated by manufacturers designations. 2. Match Architects sample. 3. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories: a. Solid colors, gloss and/or mss finish. . b. Solid colors with core same color as surface, gloss and/or matte finish. C. Patterns, gloss and/or matte finish. D. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. G. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. H. Backer Sheet: Provide plastio-laminate. backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. ..I. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. 2.7 QUARTZ SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1-1/4 inch. C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid- surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. Basis of Design Products: See plan sheet A2.3. D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz-surfacing-material manufacturers written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. 2. Fabricate tops with shop-applied backsplashes. E. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop. F. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop. 2.8 . CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. Grade: Custom. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 7 f N, Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel with PVC or polyester edge banding. C. Cleats: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork Involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure . with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush. with ' woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. F. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. 1. Install flush paneling with no more than 1/16 inch in 964nch vertical cup or bow and 1/8 , inch in 96-inch horizontal variation from a true plane. G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers ft openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide , unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood I framing, blocking, masonry or hanging strips. H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 8 1 1 i i r Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Align adjacent quartz-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturers written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 964nch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where passible, to eliminate functional 'and, visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. S. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06402 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 07190 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This specification covers preparation, materials, services, and equipment required for the application of PROFESSIONALD Water Sealant & Anti-GnaFitieant for projects Involving either old or new construction. Any substantial.deviations shall be referred to the manufacturer or authorized representative. 1:03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 042200 [04220] - Concrete Masonry Units: Concrete Block walls to receive water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant. B. Section 09-2400 [09220] - Portland Cement Piaster. Cement plaster wall finish to receive water repellent and/or anti-graffitiant. 1.03 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit in accordance with Section 01330- Submittals. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data sheets for the specked water repellents, graffiti ' resistant coatings and cleaners. Submit description for protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, and final cleaning. C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit qualifications of applicator, stating applicator has a minimum of 3 years experience using the specified or a simli ar products. Provide a list of several most recently completed projects, including project name and location, names of owner and architect, and description of products used, substrates, and method of application. D. Environmental Regulations: Submit applicable environmental regulations. E. VOC Certification: Submit certification that water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings furnished comply with regulations controlling content of volatile organic compounds (VOC). 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. 1. Experience in the application of the specified or similar products. 2. 2. Employs persons trained in the application of the specified products or similar products. s B. Pre-Application Meeting: Convene a pre-application meeting 2 weeks before the start of application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including the Contractor, Architect, Applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas' representative. Review environmental regulations, test panel procedures, protection of surrounding areas and non-masonry surfaces, surface preparation, application, field quality control, final cleaning, warranty application procedures, and coordination with other work. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS A. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local environmental regulations. WATER REPELLENTS 07190 -1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.06 TEST PANELS A. Before full-scale application, review manufacturer's product data sheets to determine the suitability, of each product for the specific surfaces. Apply each water repellent and graffiti resistant coating to test panels to determine appropriate strengths, coverage rates, compatibility, effectiveness, surface preparation, application procedures, and desired results. B. Apply graffiti resistant coatings to test panels in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Allow a minimum of 5 days curing time prior to applying graffiti paint to test panels. Apply graffiti paint to test panels and allow at least 24 hours or longer for paint to cure. Apply cleaner to evaluate ease of graffiti removal. Repeat cycles of cleanings as directed by Architect. Do not begin full-scale application until test panels are inspected and approved by the Architect. C. Submit Sections 1 & 2 of Manufacturers warranty application using information resulting from test panel application. These sections must be submitted to Manufacturer for approval prior to project commencement. Section 3 to be completed and submitted at project completion. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in original, tightly sealed, unopened containers, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Verify that the product matches that of the original sample applied on the test panel. B. Storage and Handling: Store containers upright in a coot, dry place. Keep away from sparks and open flame. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Surface Preparation: Contractor or applicator shall be responsible for providing a clean, dry substrate free from oil, dirt, grease, efflorescence, form release agents or any other coating, which may.inhibit . penetration and adhesion of water repellent and graffiti resistant coating. This requirement applies to , new construction, renovation or remedial projects. Substrate must be completely dry prior to applying product. B. Environmental Requirements: .1. Temperature: Product maybe applied at.any temperature providing that there is no frozen moisture present in the substrate. When applied at temperatures below 40 degrees Fahrenheit the product may cure at a slower rate. Optimal temperature range for application is between 409 F (5° C) or below 95° F (35° C). 2. Do not apply material if the substrate is wet or contains frozen moisture. Allow substrate to dry for a minimum of 48 hours after rain or 72 hours after power washing. 3. Do not apply material during inclement weather or if precipitation is expected within 12 hours. 4. Do not commence application under windy conditions. C. Protection: 1. Special precautions should be taken to avoid fumes from entering the building. Heating and air conditioning, ventilation systems, and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. 2. Protect shrubs, metal, glass, vehicles, and other building hardware from overspray. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER Professional Products of Kansas, Inc., 4456 S. Clifton, Wichita, KS 67216, (800) 676-7346, (316) 522- 9300, Fax (316) 522-9346 WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 2 1 1 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.02 WATER REPELLENT AND GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATINGS A. Professional@ Water Sealant & Anti-Graffifiant, Super Strength: First coat in the two-coat process. Depending on the porosity of the substrate, it may be used for the second coat as well. Penetrating silicone rubber graffiti resistant coating for use on vertical concrete, brick, sandstone, limestone, stucco, split face block, concrete block, and fluted block Non-sacrificial, will withstand repeated cycles of graffiti tagging and removal with no requirement to reapply the sealant. May enhance or darken some substrates. Will not form a surface film or gloss. Inorganic, it is not affected by UV rays, salts, acid rain, etc. Breathable, it allows moisture vapor to escape while preventing liquid penetration. Flexible, it bridges hairline cracks and allows for building movement. Provides a graffiti barrier as well as waterproofing protection. 1. Form: Liquid 2. Color. Clear 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4. Percent Active Material: 15% 5. Flash Point: 105° B. Professional(& Water Sealant & Anti-Graflitiant, Extra Strength: Maybe used as the second coat in the two-coat process. Porosity of substrate is the determining factor. THE SECOND COAT SHOULD BE APPLIED TO THE ENTIRE STRUCTURE TO ACHIEVE WATER REPELLENT PROTECTION.-IN ADDITION TO GRAFFITI PROTECTION. - 1. Form: Liquid 2. Color. Clear 3. Active Substance: RTV Silicone Rubber 4. Percent Active Material: 8% 5. Flash Point: 1050 4 C. The graffiti resistant coating product listed above is selected as a standard"of qualfty..Application procedure and coverage rates must be in conformance with results achieved in test panels and manufacturer's application instructions. 1. Proposed alternate products must be equal in terms of chemical composition and performance standards. Products must be penetrating, permanent treatments using a silicone rubber base and not contain any paraffin waxes, urethanes or polysiloxanes. Silane and siloxane based products will not be considered because of their lack of elongation. Products must be non-sacrificial, allowing for repeated cycles of tagging and cleaning without the requirement to reapply the sealant. 2.04 CLEANERS A. CLEANER: Phase II Cleaner (for graffiti removal), manufactured by Professional Products of Kansas, Inc. No other product will be accepted as they may void the warranty. B. Extra Material: provide one gallon Phase II Cleaner, manufacturers instructions, MSDS and product data to Owner. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify the following: 1. 1. The required joint sealants have been installed. 2. 2. New masonry and mortar have cured a minimum of 28 days. 3. 3. Surface to be treated is clean, dry, and contains no frozen moisture. 4. 4. Environmental conditions are appropriate for application. 3.02 PROTECTION WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. Protect surrounding areas, glass, landscaping, building occupants, pedestrians, vehicles, and non- masonry surfaces during the work from contact with water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Special precautions should be taken to prohibit fumes from entering the building. Heating and air , conditioning ventilation systems and fresh air intakes should be turned off and covered. 3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean all dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, efflorescence, form release agents or any other coating or material from surfaces that may interfere with penetration, performance, adhesion, or aesthetics of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Thoroughly remove cleaner residues. Allow surfaces to dry , completely before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. B. Repair, patch, and fill all cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas in surface as approved by the Architect. Allow repair materials to cure completely before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings: C. Seal all open joints. D. Allow new masonry and concrete construction and repointed surfaces to cure for a minimum of 28 days before application of water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Apply water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings to substrates in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, environmental regulations, and application procedures determined from the test panel results approved by the Architect. Graffiti protection requires a two-coat application. In most cases, the first coat will be Super Strength. The second coat will be either Super or Extra, depending on the porosity of the substrate. B. Apply to clean, dry, cured, and properly prepared surfaces approved by Architect. C. Apply material as shipped by the manufacturer. Do not dilute. D. Do not apply to below-grade surfaces. E. Do not apply to painted surfaces. F. Do not apply anti-graffitiant to horizontal surfaces. G. Do not apply to compensate for structural or material defects in substrates. H. Do not apply to substrates such as asphalt or polystyrene, which may be affected by the solvent carrier. I. Apply material using a high-volume, low pressure, pump-up sprayer (between 40-60 psi), with ' solvent resistant fittings. Foam roller, or brush of natural bristle or foam may be used in areas where spray application is not appropriate. 1. Vertical Applications: Apply in a flood coat, from top to bottom, being sure to obtain a 4 to 6 inch rundown of product from the point where the spray makes contact with the surface. Work all the way down the building covering the rundown as you go. Avoid excessive overlapping. Allow first coat to dry to the touch prior to applying second coat. Apply the second coat in the same manner. a. Extremely dense substrates may require back rolling after product is applied to smooth out any rundown lines. WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - 4 ' Aging. Well Center at The Long Center ' b. Brush any excess product that may accumulate on ledges and other areas that may hold excess material. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Inspect the water repellent and graffiti resistant coating work with the contractor, Architect, applicator, and Professional Products of Kansas representative, and compare with test panel results approved by the Architect_ Determine If the substrates are suitably protected. Allow the test panel to cure for 5 days prior to applying graffiti paint for testing purposes. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide the services of a manufacturer's authorized field representative to verify specified products are used; protection, surface preparation, and application of graffiti, resistant coatings are in accordance with the manufacturer's written Instructions; the test panel has been approved by the Architect C. Provide manufacturer's written warranty covering material performance for a period of five (5) years for graffiti protection and Ten (10) years for Vertical water repellent applications from the date of project completion. 3.06 FINAL CLEANING A. Upon completion of all work covered in the specification, the Contractor shall remove all equipment, material and debris, leaving the area in an undamaged and acceptable condition. Dispose of coating containers according to state and local environmental regulations. B. Repair, restore, or replace to the satisfaction of the Architect, all. materials, landscaping, and non- masonry surfaces damaged by exposure to water repellent and graffiti resistant coatings. Professional Products of Kansas, inc. 4456 S. Clifton Wichita, KS 67216 (800) 676-7346 (316) 522-9300 Fax (316) 522-9346 www.watersealant.com I END OF SECTION 07190 1 WATER REPELLENTS r. 07190 - 5 Aging Well Center At The Long Center SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. . 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: insulation - forced foam installation in masonr led b ildin 1 C y. u g . oncea 2. Cavity-wall insulation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES. IA QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test- response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 3 . 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING soilin ist re i b ti i h i l d d f d t A. g, e er ora on y mo u , ys ca amage an rom on materials from p Protect insulat and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. - Comply with manufacturets written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. BUILDING INSULATION 07210-1 Aging Well Center At The Long Center 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Forced Foam insulation in Masonry: a. Core-Fill 500 by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. b. Thermco Foam Insulation by Thermco Corporation of America. C. cfiFOAM, Inc, by Southern Foam Insulation, Inc. 2. Glass-Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville Corporation. C. Knauf Fiber Glass. d. Owens Coming 3. Spray Foam Polyurethane. a. BioBased 501 (0.5 lb/ft 3 spray foam polyurethant semi-open celled insulation) b. Manufacturer by BioBased Systems, LLC -- 800-803-5189 - www.biobased.net 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Faced Formaldehyde-Free Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane-faced surface with a flame spread of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil-scrim-kraft, foil-scrim, or foil- scrim-polyethylene vapor-retarder membrane on one face; consisting of fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. B. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. 2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 1 u Aging Well Center At The Long Center 1. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Eckel Industries of'Cahada Limited; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. C. Gemco; Spindle Type. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; RC150. b. AGM Industries; Inc.; SC150. C. Gemca; Dome-Cap, d. Gemco; R-150. e. Gemco; S-150. 3, Anchor Adhesives: ; TACTOO Adhesive AGM Industries Inc a . , . . b. Eckel Industries of Canada Limited; Mc-Klip Type S Adhesive. C. Gemoo; Taff Bond Hanger Adhesive. h thick alvanized 0164n f 0 d f lf l ki h B. g rom . c orme - oc ng was ers Insulation-Retaining Washers: Se steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in the following locations: a. Crawlspaces. b. . Calling- plenums. C. Attic spaces. d. Where indicated. C. Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of insulation anchor to maintain air space of dimension indicated between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor Is attached. 1. Air Space- 1 inch. 2. Air Space: 2 inches. 3. Air Space: 3 inches. D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3 ['I Aging Well Center At The Long Center 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders..or of interfering with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be Insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Apply single layer of insulation to' produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3A INSTALLATION OF MASONRY CELL INSULATION A. Foam wall insulation is to be pumped into open block cavities indicated to receive insulation, taking care to fill voids completely. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close ports after confirming. complete coverage. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for product liquid ratios at mixing gun. B. Foam wall insulation shall be installed from exterior face of masonry units wherever possible so that holes in masonry will be covered with exterior finish material. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended . by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for firestopping. D. Install minerai-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. BUILDING INSULATION 1 07210 - 4 1 Aging: Well Center At The Long Center 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs. E. Stuff glass-fiber, loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling ' a density of approximately 2.54b/cu. ft. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation. B. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items. penetrating vapor retarders. With vapor-retarder tape. to create, an airtight seal between penetrafing objects and vapor retarder. . E. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 11? BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5 1 t t t 1 Ll Aging Well Center At The Long Center SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A." Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Manufactured though-wall flashing. 2. Manufactured regleb. 3. Formed law-slope roof flashing and trim. 4. Formed wall flashing and trim. 5. Formed equipment support flashing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. All manufacturers shall meet ES-1 Wind Standards. B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG. Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections and other detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result of sheet metal and trim thermal movements. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar beat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to building interior. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans and elevations. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identify material, thickness, weight and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams and dimensions. 3. Details for fastening, joining, supporting, and anchoring sheet metal flashing and trim, including fasteners, clips, cleats and attachments to adjoining work. 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-1 Aging Well Center At The Long Center 4. Details of expansion joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing and trim Indicated with factory-applied color finishes. 1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and. trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage., C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might.cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation '.of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. . 2.2 SHEET METALS A. Aluminum Sheet: =ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3004, 3105, or 5005, Temper suitable for forming and structural performance required, but not less than H14, finished as follows: 1. Mill Finish: Standard two-sides bright. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 2 Aging.Well Center At The Long Center 2. Anodized Finish: Apply the following coil-anodized finish: a. Class 1, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class 1, clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611. B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. ' 1.. Finish: No. 2D (dull,, cold rolled). 2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS with ASTM D 4397 th lene sheet com l in l Sh t 6 il thi k l l h A. . y p y g ene ee : -m c po ye Po yet y B. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated. C. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized paper, minimum 5-lb/100 sq, ft. ' 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 2. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex washer head. 3. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. 4. Spikes and Ferrules. Same material as gutter, with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. C. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. D. Solder for Lead: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead. E. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. F. Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape. G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet meal flashing and trim and remain watertight. H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single?omponent, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM . 07620 - 3 1 Aging Well Center ' At The Long Center 1. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. K. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM , A. Through-Wall Ribbed Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal flashing for embedment in. masonry with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face to receive counterflashing. 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. a. Products: 1) Cheney-Flashing Company, Inc.; Cheney Flashing (Dovetail). , 2) Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.; Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth). 3) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone Three-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing. T B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory- mitered and -welded comers and junctions. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hickman, W.P. Company b. Metal Era 2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 4. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length to match thickness of applied finish materials. 5. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to ensure alignment of reglet section ends. 6. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. j 7. Flexible Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing. 8. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 4 ' Aging Well Center At The Long Center ' 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricates items where practicable. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with ' performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. C. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat- lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations. - E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet type expansion provisions in the Work cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked. flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. F. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Thickness: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. H. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers of dimensions required and as detailed on the drawings with no flange trim to exterior, 44nch, wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond caret or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. ' 1. Fabricate parapet scuppers from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. ' 2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Caps: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch long, but not exceeding 10-foot long, sections. Furnish with 6-4nch wide joint cover plates. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 124nch wide concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate with scuppers as shown on drawings. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper. 3. Fabricate scuppers from the following material: a. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 964nch- long, but not exceeding 104bot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-5 1 ' 1 Aging Well Center , At The Long Center edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter comers, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12-inch wide concealed backup plate. 2. Fabricate copings from the following material: a. Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: 0.0396 inch thick. C. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: '0.040 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. D. Counterflashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. E. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following material: 1. ' Aluminum: 0.0320 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. F. Roof penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0-lb/sq. ft, hard tempered. G. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: 1. Lead: 4.0-lb/sq. ft, hard tempered. H. Gutter and Downspouts: 1. Fabricate from the following materials: Zinc Coated Steel: 24 gage 2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 964nch long, but not exceeding 12 foot long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch high-end dams. Fabricate from the following material: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 inch thick. , 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following material: , 1. Stainless Steel: 0.0187 inch thick. 2.10 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. , B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 6 ' Aging Well Center At The Long Center ' variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. f PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas,' and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, dean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous Items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. B. Metal Protectiorx Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, ' protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by fabricator or manufacturers of dissimilar metals. 1. Coat side of uncoated aluminum, stainless-steel and lead sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or oementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt undedayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof perfomnance. C. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool D. marks. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant E. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 1. Space cleats not more than 12 inches part. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. F. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would SHEEP METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 7 Aging Well Center , At The Long Center not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing 'rooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. G. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws. 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Aluminum: Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners. 3. Copper Use copper or stainless steel fasteners. 4. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. H. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less .than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 60 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionatgly for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-12 inches except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1.: Do not solder prepainted, metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. ' 2. Pretinning is not required for lead. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Pretin edges of uncoated sheets to be soldered using solder recommended for stainless steel and phosphoric acid flux. Promptly wash off acid flux residue from metal after soldering. 4. Where surfaces to be soldered are lead coated, do not tin edges, but wire brush lead coating before soldering. S. Lead-Coated Copper Soldering: Wire brush edges of sheets before soldering. 6. Do not use open flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. Aluminum Flashing: Rivet or weld joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength. ' 3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers where indicated through parapet. Continuously support , scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane. 1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and seal or solder to scupper. C. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion joint covers at locations and of configuration ' Indicated. Lap joints a minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 8 1 1 1 Aging Well Center At The Long Center 3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturers written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight. . B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified 150 mph wind zone. 1. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 24-inch centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified, 150 mph wind zone. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 244nch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with screw fasteners and washers at 24-inch centers. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflgshing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap eounterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. 1. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant. F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof except for lead flashing on vent piping. 3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete and 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - 9 Aging Well Center At The Lang Center 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620-10 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 07820 - JOINT SEALANTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Note that all exterior joints shall be approved by the Architect and Owner prior to completion. 1.2 -SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. E)derior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete. b. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems. d. Joints between different materials listed above. e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. f. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. g. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. ' b. Tile control and expansion joints. C. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated. Il Li I 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. C. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation joints in c:ast4n-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in file flooring. C. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: JOINT SEALANTS 07920-1 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry° for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and gaskets. 2. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 4. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for sealing tile joints. 5. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealants. 1 3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS . A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water- resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. S. Product Data for sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting. of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch wide. joints formed between two 6-inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. E ned b l i d t P d ifi t F h t f i t t d ' . an accessorys g y pro uc an ca es: or eac ype o jo n sea ro uct Cert manufacturer. Indicate that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC). F. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specked to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. G. Qualification Data: For Installer. ' H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufactureras authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of.joint sealants under the following conditions: , JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 2 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- ' sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. ' 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7• WARRANTY A. Special Installers Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements ' specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. r d d f i hi h l t i l t f i r W t M f t t ar orm n w c e as omer c sea an an s arran y: anu ac ure s s B. Special Manu ach re manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturers written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other ' Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience, ' B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. C. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 3 Aging Well Center , at The Long Center 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. ' 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where .elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone ' testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. D. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Dow Coming Corporation; 799. b. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. C. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000AC. d. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-631. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus. f. g. Tremco; Proglaze SG. Tremco; Spectrem 2. h. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). , 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. , a. Use O Joint Substrates: Coated glass and ceramic tile. E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Pecora Corporation; 898. b. Tremco; Tremsil 600 White. C. Dow Coming. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). ' 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G. A and, as applicable to joint substrates ' indicated, O. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 4 11 - A A A A A A 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center a. Use O Joint Substrates: vertical surfaces of ceramic tile and at joints between walls and plumbing surfaces. F. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: a. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 900. b. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 915. C. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk 916 Textured. d. Bostik Findley, Chem-Calk 2639. e. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL. f. Polymeric Systems Inc.; Flexiprene 1000. g. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-901. h. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM7100. i. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Pemrathane SM7108. j. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; Pennathane SM7110. k: Sika'Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex-15LM. L Tremco; DyMonic. M. Tremco; Vulkem 921. n. Tremco; Vulkem 931. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. B. For use to bridge joints between hollow metal frames and drywall surfaces and other similar conditions. C. Products: 1. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. 2. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. 3. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. 4. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for -Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by besting representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2. Available Products: a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co., SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 5 Aging Well Center , at The Long Center B. Aooustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturers standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. Products: a.. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. b. Tremoo; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed SlliconeSealant System: Manufacturers standard system consisting of precured * to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutral- low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes curing silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. Products: 1 ' . a. Dow Coming Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. GE Silicones; UltraSpan US1100. ' C. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. d. Tremco; Spectrem Ez Seal. B. Preformed Foam Sealant: Manufacturers standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam ' sealant that is manufactured from high-density urethane foam impregnated with'a nondrying, water-repellent agent; is factory produced in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; is coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrappin6; develops a watertight and airtight seal when compressed to the degree specified by manufacturer; and complies with the following: . 1. Products: ' a. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. b. illbruck Sealant Systems, Inc.; Wilseal 600. C. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite B. d. Polytite Manufacturing Corporation; Polytite Standard. , e. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. 2. Properties: Permanently elastic, mildew resistant, nonmigratory, nonstaining and , compatible with joint substrates and other joint sealants. a. Density: Manufacturers standard. ' 2.7 PREFORMED TAPE SEALANTS A. Back-Bedding Mastic Tape Sealant: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape sealant with a ' solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod.as recommended in writing by tape manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Tape Sealant: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape sealant; factory coated with ' adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 6 1 1 2.8 1 ?I 1 2.9 B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cimners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 1. Type 1, for applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin). or any of. the. preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable. A MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer. Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Aging Well Center at The Long Center JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturers written instructions and the following requirements: 3.2 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil- free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. C. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal_ b. Glass. C. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing, by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturers written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturers written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. I 1 1 1 u JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 8 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. r 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 56 in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per n ' ASTM C 1193. Figure 5C i a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: i 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be: covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with prefonned silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a ' bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape. 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform ' contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate. 4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical ' joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. J. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturers written instructions. 1 JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses ! by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating. substances and from damage resulting from. construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS 07920-10 1 1 1 1 I Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART I-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include the furnishing of all items shown on the drawings and as specified, but not limited to, the following. 1. Steel Doors 2. Steel Door Frames 3. Steel Sidelight, Borrowed liite & transom frames 4. Louvers Installed in Steel Doors 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Masonry mortar B. Steel lintels C. Finish carpentry D. Wood Doors and Frames E. Finish Hardware F. Glass and Glazing G. Painting of steel doors and frames 1.03 REFERENCES A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing. 1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1. 2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition). 3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition). 4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition) 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Coordinate approved shop drawings with all other trades and manufacturers whose products are used in conjunction with the Steel Doors and Frames under section 08100. B. Finish hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items. C. Each floor of the building is to be detailed separately. D. The steel door and frame supplier will furnish to the architect (6) complete copies of the proposed steel door and frames schedule and/or shop drawings. Using the same reference number for details and openings as those on the contract drawings. After receipt of the approved door schedule the steel door and frame supplier will make any corrections submit to the architect (6) sets of corrected schedules, for file and field use. E. All door openings including wood, aluminum, overhead etc. must be listed on the steel door schedule. Include details on the following list of items: 1. Frame elevations 2. Door design elevations 3. Frame sections 4. Details of construction 5. Anchorage 6. Opening conditions 7. Joints and connections 8. Hardware locations F. If any opening is not by the steel door manufacturer only the door opening number should be shown along with the type of material (alum, wood etc.). G. Upon request of the architect or for any substitution to this specification, (4) copies of the door manufacturers catalog cut sheets are to be submitted to the architect before any material is placed on the job site. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide Steel Doors and Frames complying with the Steel Door Institute recommended specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames ANSI/SDI. 100 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All steel doors and frames must be properly marked with door opening mark number to correspond with the schedule. B. Deliver all the steel doors in cartons and palletized-to provide protection during transit and job storage. C. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage is to be repaired, provided they are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the architect. D. Store doors and frames at the building site undercover. Place units on wood sills or on the floor in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4 Inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART II_- PROJ]l1CTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company B. Curries Company C. Ceco Door Products 2.02 HARDWARE LOCATIONS AND GENERAL REINFORCEMENTS A. Locate hardware on doors and frames in accordance with the manufactures standard location. B. Steel frames for use with wood doors the hardware preparation on the doors is governed by its location on the frames. If the doors are factory mortised, the door supplier is responsible for coordinating hardware locations. C. Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. D. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced and function holes provided at the factory in accordance with the hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Through bolt holes, attachment holes, drilling and tapping for surface hardware, shall be done by others. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Material . Exterior doors and as indicted on the schedule 1. Face Sheets to be made of commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A924 A60. Grade III -14ga. 2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the seam shall be sealed with epoxy. 3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7gage (3116') plate 1-1/4!'X 9". Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped. The manufacture to provide test information that this type reinforcement is equal to a 3/16' or 7 gage plate reinforcement. 4. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steel closure channel flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. Plastic fillers are not acceptable. STEEL DOORS AND.FRAMES 1 1 1 08110 - 2 t 1 1 1 1 1 Aging Well. Center at The Long Center 5. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to insidefaces of both panels using contact adhesive applied to both panels and honeycomb core. 6. Acceptable Manufactures a) Steelcraft Manufacturing - L Series with flush top closure. b) Curries Company - 707T, flush top closure, 12 gage hinge channel. c) Ceco Door Products - Regent. B. Materials - Interior doors as indicted on the schedule 1. Face sheets are to be made of commercial quality Cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A366 or 620. Grade II -1 $ga. 2. Vertical edges are to have continuous vertical mechanical interlocking joints at lock and hinge edges with visible edge seams. The internal portion of the seam shall be sealed with epoxy. . 3. Hinge reinforcement shall be not less than 7 gage (3/161 plate 1-1/4" X 9". Approved equal is a 12 gage continuous channel with formed holes drilled and tapped. The manufacture to provide test infurmadon that this type reinforcement is equal to a 3/16" or 7 gage plate reinforcement. 4. Doors over 7 feet in height and or 3 feet in width shall have continous type gear hinges 5. Reinforce tops and bottoms of all doors with a continuous steel channel not Iess'than' 14 gage galvanized A60, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel shall have a steetclosure channel screwed in place so that the web of the channel is flush with the face sheets and screwed into the door. 6. Doors shall be reinforced, stiffened, sound deadened and insulated with impregnated kraft honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the doors and laminated to inside faces of both panels using contact adhesive applied.to both panels and .honeycomb core. 7. Acceptable Manufactures: a) Steek:raft Manufacturing - L. b) Curries Company - 707T with flush top:closure and 12 gage hinge reinforcement. c) Coco Door Products - Regent 2.06 STEEL FRAMES A. Materials - exterior and as indicted on the schedule. 1. Are to be hot dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM designations A924 A60,16ga. 2. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame comer or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer ever the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 3. Acceptable Manufactures: a) Steekxaft Manufacturing - F series . b) Curries Company -.M. series c) Cow Door Products - SF series B. Materials all other frames as indicted on the schedule. 1. Will comply with ASTM A366-68 or ASTM A569-66T, 169a. 4. All frames are to have back welded face seams only of the frame comer or intersection. Grind and dress smooth the weld area. Apply a factory baked on zinc rich primer over the grinding area, and finish with a matching prime paint. 2. Acceptable Manufactures: d) Steelcraft Manufacturing - F series e) Curries Company - M series f) Ceoo Door Products - SF series ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Fabrication 1. General design and construction . a) Provide steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lites, and other openings to the size and design as shown on the architectural drawings. b) All finished work to be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects. c) Jamb depths, trim, profile and backbends to be as scheduled and shown on approved shop drawings. d) When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections designed for splicing in the field by others. e) Hardware reinforcements are to be in accordance with the minimum standard gages as listed in SDI-100. f) Frames shall be mortised; reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for template mortised hardware only, in accordance with. approved hardware schedule and template provided by the hardware contractor. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall have reinforcing plates only; all drilling; and tapping shall be done.by others. g) Hinge reinforcements, to be 7ga steel. D. Anchors 1. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb. 2. Anchors for in masonry are to be of the wire type. 3. Anchors for stud partitions are to be steel of a suitable design, not less than 18ga thickness. 4. Dust boxes/mortar guards to be no less than 26 gage. S. All frames that, are welded, to be provided with a steel spreader temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only not to be used to size the frame opening. 6. Loose`glazing stops are to be of 18 gage galvanized at labeled openings and 20 gage galvanized on non-labeled openings, butted at the comer joints and secured to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws. 7. Provide 3 silencers on single door and 2 silencers for double door openings. 2.07 LABELED DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80, as scheduled. B. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings are to bear either a stamped or applied label from Warnock Hersey or Underwriters Laboratory 2.08 PRIME FINISH: A. Doors and frames are to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. All surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view shall receive a coat of rust inhibiting baked on primer applied at the factory. The finish shall meet the requirements for acceptance stated in ANSI A224.1 "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces." The baked on prime finish is not intended to be the final layer of protection from the elements. Field painting using a good grade of paints are to be used in accordance with the recommendations of the door and frame manufacturer. For specialty types of finished coatings, the paint supplier should also be consulted. PART III -_EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1 1 1 1 08110-4 1 1 Aging Wel Center at The Long Center A. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to make sure that all dimensions for existing opening or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.) given to the steel manufacturer are accurate. B. It is the responsibility of the General Contractor to see that any scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are properly cleaned and touched up with a rust inhibiting primer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Frames 1. Prior to installation, all frames must be checked for rack, twist and out of square conditions. 2. Place frames prior to enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. 3. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar. . 4. When temperature conditions. necessitate an additive to be used in the plaster or mortar to prevent freezing, the contractor installing the frames will coat the inside of the frames, in the field, with a corrosion inhibiting bituminous material. 5. SDI-105, "Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames" and SDI-110' "Standard Steel Doors and Frames for Modular Masonry Construction" shall indicate the proper installation procedures. B. Doors 1. Install doors plumb and in true alignment in a prepared opening and fasten them to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance. 2. Proper door clearance must be maintained in accordance with SDI-110. 3. Where necessary; only. metal hinge shims are acceptable to maintain clearances. 4. "Installation Guide:for Doors and Hardware" published by DHI is recommended for further details. C. Hardware must be applied in accordance with hardware manufacturers templates and instructions. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metalwork just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper condition. B. Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply to touch-up or compatible air-drying primer. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. After installation, copies of the door schedules will be turned over to the owner when the building is accepted. END OF SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 5 n Aging Well Center at The- Long Center SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART I - GENERA 1.01 WOOD DOORS, NON-RATED`AND FIRE-RATED A. Flush B. Glazed C. Louvers 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 11, A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry B. Section 06400 -Architectural Woodwork C. Section 08100 - Metal Frames D. Section 08700 -- f=inish hardware E. Section 08800 - Glazing 1.03 REFERENCES AND REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. ASTM E152-81 a - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. B. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 1995 Edition.. C. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, 9th Edition. D. UBC 43-2 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. Quality Standards: 1. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97 (National Wood Window and Door Association). 2. AWI Qu4lity Standards 7th Edition, Version 1.01997. 3. ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards. (American National Standard Institute) G. Labeling Agencies 1. Intertek Testing Services-Warnock Hersey (ITS-WH) 1.04 DOOR DESCRIPTION A. Interior Doors (Non-rated) 1. DPC-1, 5 Ply Particle Board Core Door, 1-3/4" (44mm) B. Interior Doors (Rated) 1. DFM-90, 90 Minute Mineral Core Door, 1-3/4" (44mm), rated by ITS/WH 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, special beveling, blocking for hardware in mineral core doors, identify cutouts. C. Product Data: Indicate door core materials, thickness, construction, veneer species, cut and matching requirements, factory machining and factory finishing criteria. D. Construction Samples: Submit one or more of manufacturers standard samples demonstrating door construction. E. Finish Samples: A set of 3 illustrating the range of color and grain of the specified door face materials. F. Manufacturer's Full Lifetime Warranty 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Meet or exceed NWWDA I.S.1-A Premium Grade and/or AWI Version 7 Custom Grade. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING, AND SITE CONDITIONS A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products under provisions of NWVVDA, AWI and manufacturer's instructions. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1 1 .' Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's standard packaging. Inspect for damage upon receipt. C. Do not store in damp or wet areas or in areas where light might cause oxidization. D. HVAC systems should be operating and balanced prior to arrival of doors. Acceptable humidity shall be no less than 25% nor greater than 55%. E. Break seal on packages while at site to permit ventilation. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01620. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, doorframe and. door hardware installation with a pre-installation conference. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty to the following term: 1. Interior Solid Core Doors: "Full Life of Original Installation" including re-hang and - refinish if door(s) do not comply with Warranty tolerance standards. PART 11- PRODUCTS - 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Algoma B. Eggers C. Weyerhaeuser Company 2.02 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with` NWWDA/AWI,workmanship for veneer faces, vertical edges, crossbands, horizontal edges and dimensional tolerances. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Door Construction Grade 1. Except as maybe otherwise shown on the drawings, fabricate the work of this section to NWWDA "Premium GraderAWI "Custom Grade°. B. Flush Door Facing, Slice Or Cut, Matching, And Finish 1. Wood Veneer: AWI - A Grade: The veneer species, slice or cut, finish and matching shall be: a. White Maple, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear finish / OR b. Red Oak, Plain Sliced, Book Match, Clear finish C. Doors In Pairs Or Sets 1. Specify per project requirements. Door schedule shall reflect pairs and sets by door numbers. 2. The veneer, slice or cut, finish and veneer matching shall match. Matching between paired doors shall be in a sequence. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Door And Transom Panel Core Construction 1. Non-rated: ANSI A208. 1-LD-2 Particleboard. 2. 45, 60 or 90 minute Fire-Rated: Mineral Core. 3. Bond stiles and rails to core, abrasive sand core assembly to achieve un"rform thickness. B. Vertical Edges (Stiles) 1. Non-rated FLUSH WOOD DOORS 11 08211 - 2 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center ' a. Edges to match face veneer. (May include veneer banding and structural composite lumber backers or inner-plies). 2. 45, 60, 90 Minute Rated Palm a. Mineral core door stiles to be veneer banded to match faces veneer over manufacturer's edge for improved screw holding. (Metal edges required). 3. Mineral Core a. Mineral core door stiles to be veneer banded to match faces veneer over manufacturers edge for improved screw holding. C. Horizontal Edges (Rails) 1. Mill option structural composite lumber or hardwood lumber. D. Adhesives 1. Facing Adhesive: Type 1 - Waterproof. E. Inner-blocking For Mineral Core Fire Doors 1. Supply inner-blocking for all surface applied hardware, Through bolts not accepted. F. Machining For Rated Doors 1. Factory fit and machine doors for frame and finish hardware in accordance with hardware and NFPA 80 requirements and dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Apply appropriate fire labels. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Louvers 1. Non-Rated Metal Louvers: Equal to Air Louver model 800A1. 2. rated Metal Louvers: Equal to Air Louver model 1900A1. ' B. Glazing Stops 1. Non-Rated: a. Wood, of the same specdes/compatible with door species, with mitered comers. 2. Fire-Rated: a. Metal Vision Frames. 2.06 FACTORY FINISH ' A. Factory finish doors in accordance with NWWDA G-17 Finish System Description or AWI Division 1500-S-4 - Finish System Standards. Factory finish to be water based stain and ultraviolet (UV) cured polyurethane sealer to comply with EPA Title 5 guidelines for Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) emissions limitations. Finish must meet or exceed performance standards of TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. Color shall be a Clear finish as specified in section 2.3.6. B. Factory Finished doors to be installed just prior to substantial completion. PART III - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate opening conditions. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable and ready to receive this work. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out of tolerance for size or alignment. ' 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install fire-rated and non-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80, manufacturers' instructions and fire rated labeling requirements. B. Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. 1 .. FWSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 I Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maAmum 3/4 inch (19 mm). D. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. E. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes using templates provided by hardware manufacturer. (Use threaded throughbolts for half surface hinges). F. Coordinate. installation of.doors with installation of frames and hardware G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. H. Install door louvers and light kits plumb and level. 1. Reseal or refinish. any doors that required site alteration. 3.03 WARRANTY TOLERANCES A. Conform to NWWDA standards and testing methods for warp, cup, bow and telegraphing. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions Division 1. B. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. 3.05 DOOR AND FRAME COMPONENTS SCHEDULES A. Refer to door and frame schedule. END OF SECTION 08211 ' FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Rolling Counter Door 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the following: 1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. C. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 -1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows: Aluminum Door Curtain Slats: ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Aluminum Extrusion Thickness: Not less than 0.051. inch. 2. Flat profile slats. B. Endlocks: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer's standard continuous channel or tubular shape, fabricated from manufacturer's standard hot-dip galvanized steel, stainless steel, or aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish. D. Astragal: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper. E. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtai. 2.2 HOOD A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging. 1. Fabricate hoods for aluminum doors, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; 0.032-inch minimum thickness, complying with ASTM B 209. 2.3 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self- lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 -2 Aging Well Center at The Long Center thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load. C. Spring Balance: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs. D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate. 2.4 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator. 2.5 MAUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Subject to the requirements of this section provide the following products: Counter Door: Model ESD 10 by Cornell Ironworks, Inc. B. Products equal to the Basis of Design products by the following manufacturers: 1. ACME Rolling Doors. 2. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc. 3. AlumaTek, Inc. 4. C.H.I. Overhead Doors. 5. City-Gates. 6. Cookson Company. 7. Dynamic Closures Corp. 8. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc. 9. Mahon Door Corporation. 10. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. 11. Metro Door. 12. Overhead Door Corporation. 13. QMI Security Solutions. 14, Raynor. 15. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co. 16. Wayne-Dalton Corp. 17. Windsor Door. 2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 -3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified. B. Install overhead coiling doors,. hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 -4 fl t ;7 1 LJ Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 08411-- ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Related Documents: Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 - General Requirements, and Drawings apply to Work of this Section. B. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum doors complete with hardware. C. Products Fumished But Not Installed Under This Section 1. Anchoring devices which are built into masonry. 2. Anchoring devices which are cast in concrete. D. Related -Sections: 1. Division 5 - Metal Fabrications. 2. Division 6 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Division 7 - Joint Sealers. 4. Division 8 - Door Hardware. 5. Division 8 - Glazing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45 Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 1. 607.1 Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.. 2. 701.2 Specifications for Pile Weatherstripping. 3. Manual #10 Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. 4. SFMA Aluminum Storefront and Entrance Manual. C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A117.1 Safety Standards for the Handicapped. 2. 297.1 Safety Glazing Materials used in Buildings - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A36 Structural Steel. 2. A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 3. B209 Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. B221 Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 5. B308 Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Shapes, Rolled or Extruded. 6. E283 Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors. 7. E330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 8. E331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Differenoe. E. Federal Specifications (FS): 1. TT-P-641 G (1) Primer Coating, Zinc Dust Zinc Oxide (For Galvanized Surfaoss). 2. TT-13-645A Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type. ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -1 7 L Aging Well Center at-The Long Center F. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. Paint 12 Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 1.03 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not,purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing, anchorage, or moisture disposal. 2. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. 3. Provide concealed fastening. 4. Provide entrance and' storefront systems, including necessary modifications, to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 5. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 6. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 7. Perimeter fasteners to be installed per anchor chart locations based on surrounding structure and design loads. 8. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance. B. Hurricane Resistance Requirements 1., Large Missile Impact per Miami -- Dade County Building Code Compliance Office (BCCO) protocol (PA- 201), Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-201) and (ASTM E 1886/1996) requirements. 2. Cyclic Load Test per Miami - Dade County Building Code Compliance Office (BCCO) protocol (PA 203), Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-203) and (ASTM E 188611996) requirements. - 3. Forced Entry Resistance per South Florida Building Code (SFBC) Section 3603.2 (b) 5 test requirements. 4. Uniform Static Load Test per Dade - County Building Code Compliance Office (BCCO) protocol (PA- 202), Florida Building Code HVHZ (TAS-202) and ASTM E 330. E. Structural Requirements, as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330: 1. Wind loads for exterior assemblies: a. Basic loading: 1) [+70 Maximum] psf acting inward. 2) [-80 Maximum] psf acting outward. F. Testing Requirements: Provide components that have been previously tested by an Independent testing laboratory certified by Miami / Dade County (BCCO), Florida Building Code (FBC) and ASTM. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications. 2. Include information for factory finishes, hardware, accessories, and other required components. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings covering fabrication, installation and finish of specified systems. 2. Include following: a. Fully dimensioned plans and elevations with detail coordination keys. b. Locations of exposed fasteners and joints. ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -2 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3. Provide detailed drawings of: a. Composite members. b. Joint connections for framing systems and for entrance doors. c. Anchorage. ' d. System reinforcements. e. Glazing methods and accessories. f. Internal sealant requirements and recommended types 4. Schedule of finishes. D. Samples: 1. Submit manufacturers standard samples indicating quality of finish. 2. Where normal texture or color variations are expected, include additional samples illustrating range of variation. .3. Submit samples for each type of glass, 12 x 12 Inch size. E. Qualification Data 1. Submit installer qualifications verifying years of experience. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single.Source Responsibility. 1. To ensure quality of appearance and performance, obtain materials for systems from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturer approved by systems manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by system manufacturer.as qualified for installation of specified systems. ° C. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM-1 and manufacture's written instructions. D. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1 and local amendments. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Section 01600. B. Protect finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage. C. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings, which become firmly fronded when exposed to sun. D. Do not leave coating residue on any surfaces. E. Replace damaged units. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties in accordance with Section 01700. B. Provide written warranty , in form acceptable to Owner jointly signed by manufacturer, installer and Contractor warranting work to be free from deflective materials, defective workmanship, glass breakage due to defective design, and agreeing to replace components which fail within 1 year from date of Substantial Completion. C. Warranty shall cover folkiwing: 1. System is structurally sound and free from distortion. 1 ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' PART 2 - P RODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products by one of the following: 1. Vistawall Architectural Products, Terrell, TX. , B. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 01635, a minimum of 10 days prior to bid date. C. Acceptable Entrance Systems: 1 Hurricane Resistant Systems (0.125 wall thickness; 1-.V4° deep) Model MSD-375 - medium stile (9" bottom rail, 4° top rail, 4-314" verticals) , 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum: , 1. ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T6 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 5005-H16 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. 2. Minimum thickness of [0.080] inch for main framing members. B. Internal Reinforcing: Entrance Frames 1. ASTM A36 for carbon steel; or ASTM 8308 for structural aluminum. 2. (1 W x 4 9/16" x4Y4") steel channel (vertical mullions) and (1 Y4p x 411/16" x 12 ga) steel channel (vertical jambs) as required based on applied wind loads. 3. Steel components factory coated with alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS 17-P- 645. , C. Anchorage Devices: 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel or aluminum assemblies of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 2. Hot-dip galvanize steel assemblies after fabrication; comply withASTM A123, 2.0 ounce minimum coating- D. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with items being fastened. 2. Provide concealed fasteners wherever possible. 3. For exposed locations, provide Phillips flathead screws with finish matching item fastened. ' 4. For concealed locations, provide manufacturers standard fasteners. E. Expansion Anchor Devices: Toothed-steel or drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. , F. Protective Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness for each coat; or alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT-P-645. G. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Components: Zinc oxide conforming with FS TT-P-641. H. Glazing Gaskets: ' 1. Compression type design, replaceable extruded, of neoprene, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) at exterior gasket. Profile and hardness as required to maintain uniform pressure for watertight seal. 2. Dow Coming #995 structural silicone sealant at glazing bead with FG5188 E.P.D.M. spacer gasket. ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411.4 1 1 L Ll Aging Well Center at The Long Center Weatherstripping: 1. Provide WP-085 wool pile weathering) in A" adjustable astragal. 2. Provide D-120 vinyl weatherstripping in bottom door rail. 2.03 GLASS AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES 2.04 DOOR HARDWARE A. Refer to Section 08810. A. Hardware Items: 1. _ 2. Continuous gear hinge: 224 HD-Roton 3. Concealed overhead closers: LCN 2010 Series 4. Surface closers: LCN 4000 Series 5. Push bar f 6. Pulls:I - 1 7. Panic device: concealed rod 9947 Von Duprin, surface rod 9927-Von Dupdn 8. Deadlocks: 1850-505-Adams-Rite 9. Cylinders: BEST ACCESS 1/C cylinders and keying-per City of Clearwater Building Maintenance. 10. Threshold: TH-43-Vistawall 11. Flush bolts: FB-1201 VRM-Intematlonal 12. Weatherstripping: D-1 18/13-1 20-Vistawall 2.05 FABRICATION A. Coordination of Fabrication: 1. Check actual frame or door openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before fabrication. 2. Fabricate units to withstand loads, which will be applied when system is in place. S. General 1. Conceal fasteners whenever possible. 2. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to structure. 3. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum in contact with concrete utilizing protective coating or preformed separators, which will prevent contact and corrosion. 4. Comply with Section 08810 for glazing requirements. C. Entrance Doors: 1. Fabricate with mechanical joints using internal [steel] reinforcing plates and shear blocks attached with fasteners and by welding. 2. Provide extruded aluminum glazing stops permanently anchored on silicone bead side and ' removable on opposite side. D. Hardware 1. Install approved hardware tested in.accordance with Miami / Dade County BCCO.. 2. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware. 3. Comply with hardware manufacturers templates and instructions. F. Welding: 1. Comply with recommendations of the American Welding Society. 2. Use recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and,flush with adjacent surfaces; restore mechanical finish. ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' 2.06 FINISHES A. Clear Anodized: 1. Conforming to AA-M12C22A31 and AAMA 607.1. ' 2. Architectural Class II, etched, medium matte, clear anodic coating, 0.4 mil minimum thickness.] 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 01400. 3.02 INSTALLATION ' A. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plumb and level: a. Less than <1/8 inch in 10'-0" vertically. , b. Less than <1/8 inch in 20'-0" horizontally. 2. Limit variations from theoretical locations: 1/8 inch for any member at any location. 3. Limit offsets in theoretical end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignment: 1/16 inch from flush surfaces not more than 2 inches apart or out-of-flush by more than 1/4 inch. B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frame. D. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and contraction. E. Separate dissimilar materials at contact points, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with bituminous paint or preformed separators to prevent contact and corrosion. F. Set threshold in full bed of sealant. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles to provide weathertight construction. G. Coordinate installation of perimeter sealant and backing materials between assemblies and adjacent construction in accordance with requirements of Section 07920. H. Glazing: Refer to requirements of Section 08810. ' 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Test door operating functions. Adjust closing and latching speeds and other hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure smooth operation. 3.04 CLEANING ' A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove excess mastic, mastic smears, foreign materials and other unsightly marks. B. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage. ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 -6 Aging Well Center at The Long Center END OF SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 08411 _ 7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE PART I-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The work in this section shall include f4mishing of all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary to complete the building, except those items that are specifically excluded from this section of the specification. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ' B. Aluminum Doors' and Frames C. Wood Doors and Frames 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish labor and material to complete hardware work indicated, as specified herein, or as Inay be required by actual conditions at building. B. Include all necessary screws, bolts, expansion shields, other devices, if necessary, as required ' for proper hardware application. The hardware supplier shall assume all responsibility for correct quantities. C. All hardware shall meet the requirements of Federal, State and Local codes having jurisdiction over this project, notwithstanding any real or apparent conflict therewith in these specifications. D. I E-RA D OPENINGS: 1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with A.I.A. (NBFU) Pamphlet No. 80, NFPA Standards NO. 101, UBC 702 (1997) and UL10C. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and doorframe labels. 2. Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide supplementary, marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". E. FASTENERS: 1. Hardware as furnished shall conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. Typically, all exposed ' screws installation. I insofar as practical, furnished concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware. ' 4. Door closers and exit devices to be installed with closed head through bolts (sex bolts). F. Hurricane Openings . 1. Provide hardware for hurricane openings in compliance with local jurisdiction. ' This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such hardware. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by local authority for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame. ' 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The supplier to be a directly franchised distributor of the products to be furnished and have in their employ an AHC (Architectural Hardware Consultant). This person is to be available for consultation to the architect, owner and the general contractor at reasonable times during the course of work. B. The finish hardware supplier shall prepare and submit to the architect six (6) copies of a complete schedule identifying each door and each set number, following the numbering system and not DOOR HARDWARE 08710-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center creating any separate system himself. He shall submit the. schedule for review, make corrections as directed and resubmit the corrected schedule for final approval. Approval of schedule will not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for furnishing all necessary hardware, including the responsibility for furnishing correct quantities. C. No manufacturing orders shall be placed until detailed schedule has been submitted to the architect and written approval received. D. After hardware schedule has been approved, furnish templates required by manufacturing contractors for making proper provisions In their work for accurate fitting, finishing hardware setting. Furnish templates in ample time to facilitate progress of work. E. Hardware supplier shall have an office and warehouse facilities to accommodate the materials used on this project. The supplier must be an authorized distributor of the products specified.,. F. The hardware manufactures are to supply both a pre-Installation class as well as a post- Installation walk thru. This is to Insure proper installation and provide for any adjustments or replacements of hardware as required. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to job; sore in designated location. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location. 1.06 WARRANTY A. The material furnished shall be warranted for one year after installation or longer as the individual manufacturer's warranty permits. B. Overhead door closers shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a period of ten (10) years commencing on the Date of Final Completion and Acceptance, and in the event of failure, the manufacture is to promptly repair or replace the? defective with no additional cost to the Owner. PART 11- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. To the greatest extent possible, obtain each kind of hardware from only one manufacturer. B. All numbers and symbols used herein have been taken from the current catalogues of the following manufacturers. PRODUCT ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER 1) Hinges Hager 2) Locks & Latches Best 3) Cylinders, Keys, Keying Best 4) Exit Devices Von Duprin 5) Door Closers LCN 6) OH Stops/Holders Glynn Johnson 7) Push Button Access Schlage King Cobra II 8) Magnetic Locks Locknetics 9) Wall Stops/Floor Ives Stops, Flushbolts 10) Kick Plates Ives 11) ThresholdMeather-strip National Guard 12) Silencers Ives 13) Key Cabinet Lund DOOR HARDWARE ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTE Stanley, Bommer Schlage None (No Substitution) None (No Substitution) None (No Substitution) Rixson None (No Substitution) Sentronics Rockwood, Trimco Rockwood, Quality Pemko, Zero Rockwood, Trimco Key Control 1 08710 - 2 1 r Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. If material manufactured by other than that specified or listed herewith as an equal, is to be bid ' upon, permission must be requested from the architect seven (n days prior to bidding. H substitution is allowed, it will be so noted by addendum. 2.02 FINISH OF HARDWARE: A. Exterior Hinges to be Stainless Steel (32D), Interior Hinges to be Satin Chrome (26D). Door Closers to be Aluminum. Locks to be Satin Chrome (26D), Eat Devices to be Satin Chrome - (26D). Overhead Holders to be Satin Chrome (26D), Flat Goods to be Satin Chrome (26D) or Stainless Steel (32D) and the Thresholds to be Mill Finish Aluminum. 2.03 HINGES AND PIVOTS: A. Exterior butts shall be Stainless Steel. Butts on all out swinging doors shall be furnished with ' non-removable pins (NRP): B. Interior butts shall be as listed. C. Doors V or less in height shall have two (2) butts. Furnish one (1) additional butt for each 2'6' in height or fraction thereof. Dutch door shall have two (2) butts per leaf. 2.04 KEYING: A. All locks and cylinders to be keyed to the owner's existing BEST system. B. Combinated to Owners instructions. (Permanent cores need to be ordered at least 5 weeks prior to turning over to the City of Clearwater.) C. Provide Two (2) each change keys per lock. Owner to provide additional keys needed. D. Hardware supplier to provide temporary cores during the construction phase. The city will ' change out the temporary cores for the permanent cores. All cores become the property of the city.upon completion of the-work. 1 2.05 LOCKSETS: y A. Locksets shall be Heavy Duty Cylindrical type, unless specified otherwise, in 635H" series, 15H Design as manufactured by BEST on New Construction ' 0931' series, 15D Design as manufactured, by BEST only where scheduled. 1. Acceptable substitutions: SCHLAGE "L9000" series, 06C design 2.06 EXIT DEVICES: A. All devices shall be Von Duprin 98 Series In types and functions specified. All devices must be listed under "Panic Hardware" in accident equipment list of Underwriters Laboratories. All labeled doors with 'Fire Exit Hardware' must have labels attached and be in strict accordance with Underwriters Laboratories. B. All exit devices shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of ' 1,000,000 cycles must be provided. C. All surface strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a plate undemeath.to prevent movement. And shall be provided with a dead4atching feature to prevent latchbolt tampering. D. Vertical rob exdt devices NOT recommended. Key removable mullions with rim exit devices ' preferred. 1. Acceptable substitutions: A. None (No Substitution) 2.07 DOOR CLOSERS: A. All closers shall be LCN 4011 or 4111 Series having non4errous covers, forged steel arms separate valves for adjusting badkchedk, dosing and latching cycles and adjustable spring to provide up to 50% increase in spring power. Closers shall be furnished with parallel arm mounted on all doors DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center opening into corridors or other public spaces and shall be mounted to permit 180 degrees door swing wherever wall conditions. permit. Furnish with non-hold open arms unless otherwise indicated. B. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSIBHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided. C. Door closers shall utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees Fahrenheit to -30 degrees Fahrenheit, without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with the standards UBC 7-2 (1887) and UL 10C. D. Door closers shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to reduce possible clogging from particles within the closer. Closers shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments for latch speed, general speed, and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead stop location to protect the door frame and hardware from damage. Pressure relief valves (PRV) are not acceptable. 1. Acceptable substitutions: A. None (No Substitution) 2.08 TRIM AND PLATES: A. Kick plates, mop plates, and armor plates, shall be .050 gauge with 32D finish. Kick plates to be 8" high, mop plates to be 4" high. All plates shall be two (2) inches less full width of door. B. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls, and miscellaneous door trim shall be shown in the hardware schedule. 2.09 DOOR STOPS: A. Doorstops shall be furnished for all doors to prevent damage to doors or hardware from striking adjacent walls or fixtures. Wall bumpers equal'to Ives WS407 Series are preferred, but where not practical furnish floor stops equal to Ives FS436 or FS438 series. Where conditions prohibit the use of either wall or floor type stops, furnish surface mounted overhead stops equal to Glynn Johnson, 450 Series. 2.10 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIP: A. Thresholds and weather-strip shall be as listed in the hardware schedule. 2.11 DOOR SILENCERS: A. Furnish rubber door silencers equal to Ives SR64 for all new interior hollow metal frames, (2) per pair and (3) per single door frame. PART 111- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with the Finish Hardware schedule. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work. B. Contractor to provide a secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable, so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. C. No hardware is to be installed until the hardware manufactures have provided a pre- installation class. This is to insure proper installation of the specified products. DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 4 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Contractor shall adjust all hardware in strict compliance with manufacturers instructions. Prior to tuming project to owner, contractor shall clean and make any final adjustments to the finish hardware. 3.03 PROTECTION: A. Contractor shall protect the hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. B. Contractor shall protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW SET #1 DOOR: 101,102, EACH TO HAVE: ' 1 CYLINDER AS REQUIRED 1E72 OR 1 E74 US26D NOTE: BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY DOOR MANUR HW SET #2 DOOR: 110,115,116 EACH TO HAVE: ' 3 HINGES 661279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 LOCK 93K711151) US26D 1 STOPS 409 US32D ' HW SET #3 DOORS: 111A, 111B EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 LACK 93K7R15D US26D 1 CLOSER 4011 TB AL 1 STOP 409 US32D HW SET #4 DOORS: 113,106 EACH TO HAVE: ' 3 HINGES BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 ELEC. STRIKE 6211 US26D 1 PRIVACY 93KOL15D US26D ' 1 POWER OPER. 2 PUSH BUTTONS 463014640 ALUM 856 US26D 1 KICK PLATE 8X34 US32D . 1 STOP 409 US32D NOTE: INSTALL SWITCH IN RESTROOM TO CUT POWER TO OUTSIDE BUTTONS WHILE IN USE 1 = DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center HW SET #5 DOORS: 107,109 EACH TO HAVE: 6 HINGES BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 LOCK 93K7D15D US26D 2 FLUSH BOLTS 555-12 US26D 1 CLOSER 4111 76 AL. 2 STOP 409 US32D HW SET #6 DOORS: 112 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 US26D 1 LOCK 93K7D15D US26D 1 CLOSER 4011 TB AL 1 STOP 409 US32D HW SET #7 DOORS: 109 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D 1 LOCK 93K7AB15D US26D 1 CLOSER 4111 TB AL 1 STOP 409 US32D 1 THRESHOLD 2005AV 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV HW SET #8 DOORS: 119,120 EACH TO HAVE': 3 HINGES 661191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D 1 LOCK 93K7R15D U826D 1 ELEC. STRIKE 6211 US26D 1 POWER OPER_ 4640 ALUM 2 PUSH BUTTONS 856 US26D 1 KICK PLATE 8X34 US32D 1 STOP 409 US32D 1 THRESHOLD 2005AV 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV HW SET #9 DOORS: 118 EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP US32D 1 LOCK 93K71315D US26D 1 CLOSER 4111 TB AL 1 KICKPLATE 12 x 34 US32D 1 STOP 409 US32D DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 6 i i Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1 THRESHOLD 2005AV 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV HW SET #10 DOORS: 121A,121B,128A, 1288, 105B, 103A EACH TO HAVE: 3 HINGES BB1191 4.5 x 4.5 NRP 1 LOCK 93K7R15D 1 CLOSER 4111 TB AL 1 STOP 409 1 THRESHOLD 2005AV 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV HW SET #11 DOORS: 114 EACH TO HAVE 3 HINGES BB1279 4.5 X 4.5 1 LOCK 93K7131513 1 CLOSER 4011 TB AL 1 STOP 409 1 THRESHOLD 271A 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV 1 SWEEP 315CN HW SET #12 DOORS: 134 EACH TO HAVE 3 HINGES BB1191 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 1 POWER TRANSFER EPT-2 1 EXIT DEVICE EL99L SNB 1 CYLINDER 1E72 1 POWER OPER. 4640 2 PUSH BUTTONS 856 1 POWER SUPPLY PS-873-2-AO 1 STOP 409 1 THRESHOLD 2005AV 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV HW SET #13 DOOR: 104 EACH TOHAVE: 3 HINGES BB1191 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 1 ELEC. STRIKE 6211 1 LOCK 93K7R15D 1 POWER OPER. 4640 2 PUSH BUTTONS 856 1 STOP 409 1 THRESHOLD 2005AV 1 WEATHERSTRIP 303AV DOOR HARDWARE US32D US26D US32D US26D US26D US32D US32D US32D US26D US26D ALUM US26D US32D US32D US32D US26D ALUM US26D US32D 08710 - 7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center HW SET #14 DOORS: 103B, 105 EACH TO HAVE: 6 HINGES 1 LOCK 2 FLUSH BOLTS 1 CLOSER 2 STOP 1 THRESHOLD 1 WEATHERSTRIP END OF SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 661191 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 93K7R15D 555-12 4111 TB AL 409 2005AV 303AV 4 US32D US26D US26D US32D 08710 - 8 r t ' Aging'Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1 1 B. ' 1.3 1 1 A: B. C. IA A. B. 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed curtain walls. 4. Storefront framing. 5. Glazed entrances. 6. Interior borrowed lites. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section 'Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts". 3. Division 8 Section °Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls". DEFINITIONS Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. Interspace: Space between rites of an insulating-glass unit. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand nominal thermal, movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: As Indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine- design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCEISE17, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. GLAZING 08800-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Vertical Glazing: - For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. - 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F. ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches square. 1. Tinted glass. 2. Laminated glass with colored interlayer. C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by.the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. E. Qualification Data: For installers. F. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer. G. Product Test Reports. Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass„ insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. H. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. 1 GLAZING 08800 - 2 Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited ' according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. D. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass and ' insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. E. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." G. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. d l i H. g azing w th Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rate certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is for use in fire doors or other ' openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of -450 deg F, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes. 1. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to ' demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for.materials and execution. 1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts and Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match glazing systems required ' for Project, including glazing methods. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materiels from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. GLAZING 08800 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.90 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturers standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturers written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. WarrantyPeriod: 10. years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Manufacturers Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturers standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to -glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturers written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Thickness: Where glass thickness. is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat- treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.. Where fully, tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind. FT heat-treated float glass. C. Windbome-Debris-Impact Resistance: Provide exterior glazing that passes basic -protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1886 when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on the Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on the Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For ail glazing, regardless of height above grade. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. S. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. GLAZING 08800 - 4 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.2 LAMINATED GLASS A. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Viracon Solarscreen Low-E (VE) Laminated Glass VE 5-62 or comparable products by one of the following: 1. Southwall Technologies 2. Sully North America 3. Guardian 4. Oldcastle - Tampa B. Windbome-Debris-Impact-Resistant Laminated Coated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with- testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, with '1Nindbome-Debris- t Impact Resistance" Paragraph in "Glass Products, General" Article, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with one of the following to comply with intgrlayer manufacturer's written recommendations: 1 a. Polyvinyl butyral interlayer. b. Polyvinyl butyral interlayers reinforced with polyethylene terephthelate film. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that needed to comply with ' requirements. 3. Interiayer Color a. All exterior glazing: Clear C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article- as indicated by designations in "Laminated-Glass Types" Article. 2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing, General: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according, to NFPA 252 for door assemblies and NFPA 257 for window assemblies. B. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic fiat glass; 3/16-inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd. (distributed by Technical Glass Products); Standard FireLite. b. Safti First; Superl-ite C/P. C. Schott North America, Inc.; Pyran Star. d. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SGG Keral'ite FR-R. C. Fire-Protection-Rated Tempered Glass: 1/4-inch- thick, fire-protection-rated tempered glass, complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. InterEdge, Inc., a subsidiary of AFG Industries, Inc.; PyroEdge-20. b. Safti First; Suped ite20. GLAZING 08800 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain; SSG Pyroswiss. 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for applications and fire-protection ratings Indicated. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Hacking: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that fisted and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire- protection rating indicated. 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to tit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. GLAZING 08800 - 6 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. 2.7 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type: Clear float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. provide safety glazing labeling. 2.8 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES A. Glass Type: Low -e coated, tinted laminated glass with two plies of heat strengthened glass with outer ply Class 2 (tinted) and inner ply Class 1 (clear). 1. Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 1/4°. 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.050 inch. 3. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface. 4. Winter Nighttime U-Factor. 0.97 maximum. 5. Summer Daytime U-Factor. 0.88 maximum. 6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.42 maximum. B. Basis of Design: Vihacon Solar Screen Low-E (VE) Laminated Glass VE 5-52. 1. Outer Ply Tint Color: Blue VE-52 92. 2. Intedayer Color a. All exterior glazing: Clear. 2.9 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING TYPES A. Glass Type: 60-minute fire-rated glazing; monolithic ceramic glazing. 1. Provide'safety glazing labeling. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at comers. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. GLAZING 08800 - 7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant ' thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair D performance and appearance. A l i . pp y pr mers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lite$ where length plus width is larger than 50 inches . 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass, Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances nd t l ith a o comp y w system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of H tape. P . rovide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. 1. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. ' GLAZING 08800 - $ '. Aging Well Center at The Long Center K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize' sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at-comers and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent comers from pulling away: seal comer joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3A TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. tt d t th t l d m D. oge er, no appe . e ers of opening with adjoining lengths bu Place joints in tapes at co Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape' until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression' gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure lazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to ' produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. GLAZING 08800 = 9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass,face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into.glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. .C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK4TRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B: Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during. construction, but not-less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that.is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing. by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1 08800-10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 08830 - MIRRORS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following types of silvered fiat glass mirrors: 1. Tempered glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and spandrel lites. 2. Division 10 Section 'Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating components, edge. sealer, and quality-control provisions. B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of the following products: 1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges. 2. Mirror Clips: Full size. 3. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror, from manufacturer. F. Preconstruction Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. G. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. MIRRORS 08830-1 i Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified. under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single source. D. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations: 1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors." E. _ Safety Glazing Products: For mirrors, provide products complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category 11 materials. F. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test:_ . Submit mirror mastic products to mirror manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing and substrates on which mirrors are installed. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturers written instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. MIRRORS 08830 - 2 1 r J 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS A. Glass Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper free, low-lead mirror, coating process. ' 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: ' a. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. b. Avalon Glass and Mirror Company. C. Binswanger Mirror, a division of Vitro America, Inc. d. D & W Incorporated e. Donisi Mirror Company. f. Gardner Glass, Inc. g. Gilded Mirrors, Inc. h. Guardian Industries. i. Head West j. Independent Mirror Industries, Inc. k. Lenoir Mirror Company. 1. Maran-Wurzell Glass & Mirror. M. National Glass industries. n. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc. o. Sunshine Mirror, Westshore Glass Corp. p. Virginia Mirror Company, Inc. q. Walker Glass Co., Ltd. B. Tempered Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality, for blemish requirements; and comply with ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT, Condition A, tempered float glass before silver coating is applied. 1. Nominal Thickness: 5.0 mm. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. B. Edge Sealer. Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges. C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1, Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Franklin International; Titebond Division. b. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. MIRRORS 08830 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Macco Adhesives; Liquid Nails Division. d. OSI Sealants, Inc. e. Palmer Products Corporation. f. Pecora Corporation. g. Royal Adhesives & Sealants; Gunther Mirror Mastics Division. h. Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.. D. Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer. ' 2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors ,of thickness indicated -and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard '.'J" Channel. 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar. 3) Sommer & Mace Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.. 2. Top Trim; J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.062 inch. a Produ t S b t't . c s: u jec o compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel. . " 2) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Deep Nose J" Moulding Upper Bar. 3) Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Lower Bar.. 3. Finish: Clear bright anodized. B. Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece. 1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/16 and 3/4 inch in height, respectively. a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide D638 FHA Type "J" ' Channel by Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 2. Top Trim: Formed with front leg with a height of 5/16 inch and back leg designed to fit into the pocket created by wall-mounted aluminum cleat. ' MIRRORS 08830 - 4 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide D 1638 Top Channel and D 1637M Mirror Mount System Cleat by Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc. 3. Finish: Clear bright anodized. dicated A i B Cli t C. . n om ps: s Mirror ot D. Mirror Top Clips: As indicated. E. Plated Steel Hardware: Formed-steel shapes with'plated finish indicated. 1. Profile: As indicated. F. Fasteners: Fabricated of some basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed. G. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated. 2A FABRICATION A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes. B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts before tempering for notches and holes in mirrors without marring ' visible surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors. C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished. 1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric penetration of glass coating. 2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final sizes. D. Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other imperfections. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to' be mounted, with Installer present, for compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. MIRRORS 08830 - 6 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with mastic manufacturers written installation instructions for preparation of substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturers special bond coating where applicable. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturers written instructions and with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting reflected images. B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting, surface. C. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors. 1. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom?channel. 2. Top Channel/Cleat and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Fasten J-channel directly to wall and attach top trim to continuous cleat fastened directly to wall. 3. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced. 4. Install mastip as follows: a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrors and backing material. b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturers written instructions for coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface. C. After mastic, is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water. , C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time. D. Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08830 MIRRORS 08830 - 6 1 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ' PART I GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior portland cement plasterwork on metal lath, unit masonry, and monolithic ' concrete. 2. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath, unit masonry and monolithic concrete. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed .Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse - and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. " " ' for wood framing and furring included in portland Rough Carpentry 2. Division 6 Section cement plaster assemblies. 3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders included in pprtland cement plaster assemblies. i vision 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and 4. D _ suspension systems that support lath and portland cement plaster. 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Plaster" for gypsum-based conventional plaster and associated lath. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. C. Samples for verification purposes in units at least 12 inches square of each type of finish indicated, in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1A QUALITY ASSURANCE t f A. or Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of suspension system componen s 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE=, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and in manner to keep them dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum lath flat to prevent deformation. t C. Handle gypsum lath to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces. Protect metal comer beads and trim from being bent or damaged. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after application of plaster. B. Cold Weather Protection: When ambient outdoor temperatures are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), maintain continuous uniform temperature of not less than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) nor more than 80 deg F (26 deg C) for not less than 1 week prior to beginning plaster application, during its application, and until plaster is dry but for not less than one week after application is complete. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat from contacting plaster near heat source. C. Protect contiguous work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration and other harmful effects that might result from plastering. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Upon Certificate of Substantial Completion the installer will guarantee all labor and defective material which they have, provided for the specified project. This has been done in accordance with the specifications and plans. All repairs of work done that may prove to be defective in its workmanship within a period of (1) one year, after substantial completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Expanded Metal Lath: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corp. (AMICO) b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co. d. Western Metal Lath Co. 2. Accessories: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. Keene Corp. d. MM Systems Corp. e. Plastic Components, Inc. f. United States Gypsum Co. g. Western Metal Lath Co. 2.2 LATH A. Expanded Metal Lath: Fabricate expanded metal lath from uncoated or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet to produce lath complying with ASTM C 847 for type, configuration, and other characteristics indicated below, with uncoated steel sheet painted after fabrication into lath. 1. Diamond Mesh Lath: Comply with the following requirements: a. Configuration: Flat. 1) Weight: 3.4 lbs. per'sq. yd. 8. Lath Attachment Devices: Devices of material and type required by referenced standards and -recommended by lath manufacturer for secure attachment of lath to framing members and of lath to lath. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2 1 Aging Well-Center at The Long Cent®r ' sum lath to steel at locations Indicated Provide resilient cli s for attachment of 1 gyp . . p 2.3 PIASTER ACCESSORIES FOR PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063; coordinate depth of accessories with thicknesses and number of coats required. B. Metal Comer Reinforcement: Expanded large-mesh diamond mesh lath fabricated from zinc- alloy specially formed to reinforce external comers of portland -cement plaster on exterior exposures while allowing full plaster encasement. ' C. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges and removable protective tape, of the fallowing material: 1. Material: Zinc alloy. - D. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below: 1. Material: Zinc alloy. 2. One-Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration, with expanded flanges. 2.4 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MATERIALS A. Base Coat Cements: Type as indicated below. 1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or II. B. Finish Coat Cement: Type as indicated below.. 1. Portland cement, ASTM-C 150, Type I, white. C. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S, or special hydrated lime for masonry purposes, ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Aggregate for Finish Coats: ASTM C 897 and as indicated below. 1. Manufactured or natural white sand. F. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant (AR) glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminates, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster Drinkable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Internal Bonding Agent and Bonding Agent for Portland Cement Plaster over masonry and concrete: ASTM C 932: One component, water based, non-yellowing acrylic polymer emulsion; Acryl 60 Thoro System Products. 2 6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER MIXES AND-COMPOSITIONS . A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for portland cement plaster base and finish coat mixes as applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated. S. Portland Cement Plaster Base Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective base coats in parts by volume for cementitious materials and in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below within limits specified to attain workability. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to following mixes after ingredients have mixed at least 2 minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's directions but do not to exceed 2 lbs. per cu. ft. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. Add bonding agent according to manufacturers recommendations. 2. Three-Coat Work Over Metal Lath: Base coats as indicated below (Select ratio appropriate to conditions and practices in the St. Petersburg area). Total thickness 7/8 a. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 3/4 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts sand. b. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 0 to 314 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. c. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-112 parts lime, 2-1/2 to 4 parts.sand. d. Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 314 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 to 5 parts sand. C. Job-Mixed Portland Cement Plaster Finish Coats: Proportion materials for finish coats in parts by volume for cementtious materials and parts by volume per sum of cementitious. materials for aggregates to comply with the following requirements: - 1. 1 part portland cement, 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime, 3 parts sand. 2. 1 part portland cement, 1 part masonry cement, 3 parts sand. 2.7 MIXING A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to comply with applicable referenced application standard and with recommendations of plaster manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF LATHING AND FURRING, GENERAL A. Portland Cement Plaster Lathing and Furring Installation Standard: Install lathing and furring materials indicated for portland cement plaster to comply with ASTM C 1063. B. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building structure horizontally and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, isolate the work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into the work from the building structure. Install slip- or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL STUD WALUPARTITION SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. General: Install components for steel stud wall/partition support systems to comply with directions of steel stud manufacturer for applications indicated and with the following: . 1. For non-load (axial)-bearing stud systems, comply with ASTM C 754. B. Steel Stud Systems to Receive Metal Lath: Comply with requirements of MUSFA "Specifications for Metal. Lathing and Furring" applicable to each installation condition and type of metal stud system indicated. C. Extend and attach partition support systems to structure above suspended ceilings, unless otherwise indicated. D. Extend partition support systems to finish ceilings and attach to ceiling suspension members, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 METAL LATHING PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4 1 Aging We11'Center at The Long Center A. Install expanded metal lath for the following applications where plaster base coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with referenced lathing installation standards. 1. Over portions of masonry and concrete walls where roof flashing occurs under plaster. t 3A INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at comers; install with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases to hold accessories in place and alignment during plastering. B. Accessories for Portland Cement Plaster. Provide the following types to comply with requirements indicated for location: 1: Comer Reinforcement: Install at external comers. .2. Casing Beads: Install at terminations of plaster work unless otherwise indicated. 3. COM61 Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated or, If not. indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and approved by Architect. ' a. When: an expansion or control joint occurs in surface of construction directly behind plaster membrane. b. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of plaster membrane. . ' c. For Portland Cement Plaster. Where, in surfaces of ceilings and walls, distances between and areas within control joints exceed, respectively, the following measurements: 1) 12 feet In either direction and 144 sq. ft. ' 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION, GENERAL s 1 A. Prepare monolithic surfaces for bonded base coats and use bonding compound or agent to comply with requirements of referenced plaster. application standards for conditioning of monolithic surfaces. B. Tolerances: Do not deviate more than 1B inch in 10'-0" from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10'-0" straightedge placed at any location on surface. C. Sequence plaster application with the installation and protection of other work so that neither will be damaged by the installation of the other. D. Plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where plaster is not terminated at metal by casing beads, cut base coat free from metal before plaster sets and groove finish coat at the junctures with metal. E. Apply thicknesses and number of coats of plaster as indicated or as required by referenced standards. 3.6 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATION A. Portland Cement Plaster Application Standard: Apply portland cement plaster materials, compositions, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. B. Number of Coats: Apply portland cement plaster, of composition indicated, to comply with the following requirements: 1. Use three-coat work over the following plaster bases: 2. Exterior Finish Coat: Texture type will be sand finish. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 5 r. Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Moist-cure portland cement plaster base and finish. coats to comply with ASTM C 926, including, recommendations for time between coats and curing in "Annex A2 Design Considerations." 3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, point up, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, excessive crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where ' bond to the substrate has failed. B. Sand smooth-troweled finishes lightly to remove trowel marks and anises. 3:8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove piaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces that are not to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other , surfaces that have been stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during the plastering work. When plastering work.is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipmdnt and clean floors of plaster debris. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer that ensure plaster work's being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09220 r PORTLAND CEMENT PIASTER 09220 - 6 Aging Well Center at The Long- Center r SECTION 09250 -GYPSUM BOARD PART 1.- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 e neral and Supplementary A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including G Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sectlons, apply to this Section. ' 2 SUMMARY 1 . A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard. 4. Tile backing panels. B. Related Sections Include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. ' 3. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 4. Division 9 Section "Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. ' 5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Veneer Plaster" for gypsum base for veneer plaster and for other components of gypsum-veneer-plaster finishes. 6. Division 9 Section "Ceramic Tile" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ' ceramic tile. 7. Division 9 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints Including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies:, Indicated by design designations from FM's "Approval Guide, Building Products.", UL's "Fire Resistance Directory", GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 4 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Clark Steel Framing Systems. b. Consolidated Systems, Inc. C. Dale Industries, Inc. - Dale/Incor. d. Dietrich Industries, Inc. e. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. f. National Gypsum Company. g. Scafco Corporation. h. Unimast, Inc. i. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. American Gypsum Co. b. G-P Gypsum Corp. C. National Gypsum Company. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B., Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.06254nch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch diameter wire. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 2 , 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: As follows: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires and capable of sustaining, Without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor. 2. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Hangers: As follows: 1. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class l zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter. 2. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510, mild carbon steel. a. Diameter: 114-inch b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized. 3. Flat Hangers: Commercial-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized. a. Size:.1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch a minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, with ASTM A 6531A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches. F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): Commercial-steel sheet with ASTM A 6531A 653M, G40 (2120), hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Cold Rolled Channels: 0.05384nch bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide flange, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0178 inch. G. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct=hung system composed of main Reams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems/Drywall. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Fire Front 630 System. C. USG Interiors, Inc.; Drywall Suspension System. 1 2.3 1-1 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Components, General: As follows: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 3 Aging Well Center at.The Long Center 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch at fire rated doors and 0.0179 inch at all other doors. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches. C. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges. D. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.05384nch (1.37-mm) bare:steel thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flange. 1. Depth. 3/4 inch. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire:' ASTM A 641/A 641 M. Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0:0475-inch diameter wire. E. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare metar thickness of 0.0179-inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. F. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and . other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.4 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Regular Type: a. Thickness: 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch as indicated on drawings., b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. C. Gypsum Board for Fire Rated Ceiling Assemblies: ASTM C 36. 1. Type C: a. Thickness: 5/8 inch. b. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Location: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 4 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' D. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels of the same thickness. ' 1. Thickness: 1 /4 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. E. Sag-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular --type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 12 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: Ceiling surfaces. F. Proprietary Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration than standard gypsum panels. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be ' incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: ' a. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi-Abuse Wallboard. b. , United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK. Brand Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels. C. Or approved equal. 3. Core: 5/8 inch, provide Type X where indicated 4. Long Edges: Tapered. 5. Location: Provide Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard at all gypsum wallboard locations ' lower than 8'-0" aff. Areas of wall above 8'-0" aff can be hung with standard wallboard. 2.5 EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS ' A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will -minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M. 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements a product that may be incorporated Into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Dens-Glass Gold" by G-P Gypsum Corp. ' 2. Core: 12 inch, regular type. 2.6 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Location: At all locations where tile is mounted on stud walls. C. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, "Dens-Shield Tile Backer" manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp. 2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens-Shield Tile Backer" manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corp. 3. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type. 2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Comerbead: Use at outside comers. b. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside comers. C. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. f. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated. g. Curved-Edge Comerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings. B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Comerbead: Use at outside corners. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. C. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering slot opening. Use where indicated. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by [one of] the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. C. MM Systems Corporation. d. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specked. 2.8 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 6 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 'B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. ' 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. PreMling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setdng4ype compound for installing paper-faced. metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying4ype, all-purpose compound. ' 5. Skim Coat For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting4ype taping and setting-type, sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by manufacturer. ' E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping and setting-type, ' sandable topping compounds. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by manufacturer. ' 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b U it d S . n e tates Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. ' 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc.; Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. ' c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission ' through perimeter joints and openings in. building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 2.10 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturers written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1 /8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool' 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Location: All walls around program rooms and offices and above the ceiling in the Library and for T-0" on both sides of all walls with insulation. F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." G. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building ' structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 8 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' 4. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive ' material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL. FRAMING, GENERAL. ' A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. ' B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board ' manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by stmctrtal movement. 1. isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install ' sl"pe joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. ' D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING. STEEL. SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING ¦ A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structure as follows: ' 1. install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural. or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, oountersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger i spacings. that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and ' hangers to support ceiling bads within performance limits established by referenced standards. 3. Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Secure hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 - 9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. B. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so members for panel attachment are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. C. For exterior soffits, install cross bracing and framing to resist wind uplift. D. Screw furring to wood framing. E. Wire-tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated. F. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and'spacings indicated, but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing and installation standards. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c. 3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c. G. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit i0to wall track. 3.5 A. INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against.exterior walls, install asphalt-felt or [foam- gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. For fire-resistance-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring at the following spacings: 1. Single-Layer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mukilayer Construction: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. E. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ' 09250-10 1 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturers applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames: install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13- mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with fuming members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior comers, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws 'designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior comers, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short 'flange extending beyond comer, on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior comers, space second member no more than 12 inches from comer and cut insulation to fit. H. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: Install to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section 'Building Insulation." 3.6 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL S A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges.first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 1. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. .GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250 -11 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below.underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 114- to 318-inch- wide joints to install sealant. J. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations; and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. K. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install ' acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. ' L. Space fasteners. in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. ' 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. M. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c. ' 3.7 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply, gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses I of board. .b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. On Z -furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end 1 joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Multilayer Application on Ceilings: 'Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before ' applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing..members.and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire- resistance-rated assembly. ' C. Multilayer Application on PartkionsMlalls: Apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, , unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 1. Z-Furring Members: Apply.base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250-12 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center D. Single-layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. E. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. ' F. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are Indicated as directly adhered to a b d l f oar ), comp y gypsum substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer o with gypsum board manufacturers written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set G. Exterior Soffits and Ceilings: Apply exterior gypsum soffit board panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports. 1. Install with 1144nch open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations. 2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws. H els: ki P T l B . ac ng an i e 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer's written ' installation instructions and install at locations indicated to receive tale and at the interior face of all toilet room and janitor's closet walls. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 2. Areas Not Spbject to Wetting: Install standard gypsum wallboard panels to produce a flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water-resistant panels. 3. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. 3.8 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same it ' ten s wr fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer instructions. ' B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES ' A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D, Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250-13 E. F. Aging Well Center at The Lang Center 1- Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturers written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturers written instructions. END OF SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09250-14 1 Aging-Well Center at'The Long Center SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART 9 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A Section includes: 1. Porcelain ceramic floor tile. 2. Porcelain ceramic wall base. 3. Ceramic wall tile, 4. Tile backing panels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing, of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfs. C. References: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A108 Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. b. A118.3 Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Watertleanable Tile- Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive. c. A118.6 Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile Grouts. d. A118.7 Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement Grouts. 1.3 - SUBMITTALS A. General: , Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data'for each type of product specified. C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in file substrates and finished file surfaces: 1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect. D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of file indicated. include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified. F. Product Data Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC-DATA® sheet. G. Samples: Submit 3 inch (76 mm) long samples of specified grout in selected color(s). CERAMIC TILE. 09310-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center H. Warranty: Manufacturers standard warranty document executed by authorized company official Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of the from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. , B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product: 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Joint sealants. 4. Cementitious backer units. 5. Metal edge strips. ' D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and extent to that: indicated for Project. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings". 1.5 DELIVERY, STORArPE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed the packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other , causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with B referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. V t te c ' i id a . heaters to exter en or to prevent d arbon diox e buildup. mporary mage to the work from C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation ' standard or manufacturer's instructions. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match products installed as described below, packaged with. protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. ' 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size. 1 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 2 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1 Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tile: a. Ceramic Solutions 2 Porcelain Ceramic Base Tile: a. Ceramic Solutions 3. Porcelain Ceramic Wall Tile: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. 3 Latex-Emulsion-Based Latex-Portland Cement Mortars: a. American Olean Tile Co., Inc. b. Boiardi Products Corp. c. Bostik Construction Products Div. d. Custom Building Products e. Cure Chemical Co. f. DAP Inc. Div.; USG Corp. g. L & M Mfg. Inc. h. Laticrete International Inc. i. Mapei Corp. j. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc. k. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 1. Syracuse Adhesives Co. 4. Urethane based grouts a. StarQuartz'Industries. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of file indicated. 1. Fumish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. ' B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting and grouting. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile;. grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials compling with the following requirements: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match finish of adjoining flat tile. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package accordingly so that file units taken from one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. E. Mounting: Where factory-mounted file is required, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless another mounting method is indicated. ' 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Polished Ceramic Wall Tle: Provide flat file complying with the following requirements: CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 3 fl Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Composition: Ceramic. Basis of Design: DalTile "Waterfall 0169" Semi-Gloss 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 6 inches by 6 inches nominal 3. Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Grout: Basis of Design: StarQuartz Industries 340 Solid Gray. ' B. Unglazed Porcelain Floor Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat file complying with the following requirements: 1. Field Tile Composition: Unpolished Porcelain complying with ANSI A137.1. Basis of design: DalTile Colorbody Porcelain °Labradodte C1349", Unpolished. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 12 inches by 12 inches nominal 3. Nominal Thickness: 318 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 5. Grout: Basis of Design: StarQuartz Industries 340 Solid Gray. C. Porcelain Tile Base:: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat the and to comply with following requirements: 1. Composition: Unpolished Porcelain complying with ANSI A137.1. Basis of Design: DalTile Colorbody Porcelain "Labradorite CD49", Unpolished. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 6"x 8" cove base 3. Grout: Basis of Design: StarQuartz Industries 340 Solid Gray. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Den-Shield by Georgia Pacific, 5/8" thick. 2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: , 1. Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex additive manufacturer, a) Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard. 2.7 GROUTING MATERIALS ' A. Urethane Based Grout: 1. Physical Properties: a. Water Cleanability (ASTM Al 18.3): Pass b. Initial Set (ASTM All 8.3): a 2 hours c. Service Strength (ASTM Al 18.3): Pass d. Vertical Joint Sag (ASTM Al 18.3): Pass e. Linear Shrinkage (ASTM A118.3, ASTM Al 18-7): 0.06°x6 f. Stain Resistance (ASTM All 8.3): Pass g. Compressive Strength (ASTM A118.3, Al 18.7): 4200 psi (29 MPa) h. Chemical Resistance (ASTM Al 18.3): Pass i. Water Absorption (ASTM A118.6, Al 18.7): < 1 % 2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing , equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 4 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center needed to produce mortars 'and grouts of unftrm quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where the will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed file. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind file has been completed before installing tile. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION es selected durin le submittals l iati n ithi the r n sam A F il hibiti Bl di g , a g p ng co . ng: or t e ex or var o s w n en verify that file has been blended in factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from ' one package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL ' A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of . Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions. except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of file abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay file in grid pattern. Align 1/16° joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center file fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw out joints after installation of tiles. 1. Locate joints in file surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers." G. Grout file to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: CERAMIC TILE 09810 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center 1. For ceramic the grouts (urethane grouts), comply with ANSI A118.3. 3,4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION ' A. Install Dens-Shield backer panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer s written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. ' 3.6 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturers written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been ' tested to determine that it is watertight. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove urethane grout residue from file as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed the may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by ale and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after Installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective the work. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. When recommended by the manufacturer, apply a protective coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed the walls and floors. Protect installed the work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. END OF SECTION 09310 CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 6 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 - Section 09250 - Gypsum Board 2. Division 15 Sections - Mechanical 3. Division 16 Sections - Electrical C. Products fumished, but not installed under this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. B. L.R: Light Reflectance coefficient. C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. D. Recycled Content: Average percentage based on weight of component materials. Material recovered or diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (pre-consumer) or after consumer use (post-consumer). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Coordinate Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including fighting fixtures, diffirsers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6 inch by 124nch samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 inch long Samples of each type, finish, and color. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling and suspension system. 1. UL Acoustical Compliance: For acoustical performance, each carton of material must cant' Underwriter's Laboratory certification for AC (if applicable), CAC and NRC. 2. UL Suspension System Load Compliance: Manufacturer must certify that the metal suspension system is UL Classified to be load compliant per ASTM C635. For load compliance, each carton of main tees must carry Underwriter's-Laboratory certification for load compliance. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling and components. F. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 3. Acoustical Ceiling System: Obtain each type of ceiling panel and suspension system component from a single manufacturer. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory' or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. b. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface- burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: C. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 2 t i Aging Well Center at Thy Long Center ' will be protected against damage from moisture; humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work.in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Projed when occupied for its intended use. i 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation. C 1.8 OORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other ' construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fxtures,-HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products, installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 . percent of quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the ' manufacturers specified. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 3 Aging Well Center at. The Long Center 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type-E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 2.3 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC-#1 A. Products: 1. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: Radar ClimaPlus, Item Number(s): [2215, 2416]. B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III, Form 2, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted; and pattern as follows: 1. Pattern: CD. C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.84. I-. NRC: Not less than 0.55. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Recycled Content: Not less than 40%. H. Edge Detail: Square (SQ). 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. J. Size: 24 by 24 inches. K. No deviations 2.4 HIGH-DENSITY, CERAMIC- AND MINERAL --BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS WITH SCRUBBABLE FINISH FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC42 A. Products: 1. USG Interiors, Inc., product name: SHEETROCK Brand Lay-In Ceiling Tile ClimaPlus, Item Number(s): [3260, 3270]. B. Classification: Provide fire-resistance-rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type XX, other types, described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral-base panels with scrubbable finish, resistance to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes as follows: 1. Pattem: G. C. Color: White. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 4 1 2.5 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center D. LR: - Not less than 0.77. E. CAC: Not less than 35. F. Recycled Content: Not less than 23%. G. Edge Detail: Square (SQ). H. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 1. Size: 24 by 24 inches. J. No deviations METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacture es standard direct-hung metai suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturers standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. 1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635 requirements for "Coating Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung." unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled expansion anchors. b. Type: Postinstalled'adhesive anchors. C. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition. d. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 for bolts: alloy 304 or 316 for anchor. e. Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying with ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy. 2. Power Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling constructioni as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. ' D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch diameter wire. E. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint. F. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; farmed with 0.04-inch thick, galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with bolted connections and 5/16-inch diameter bolts. G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces. H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place. 2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC41 A. Products: USG Interiors, Inc.., Donn DXL suspension system. B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16=tech wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Four-foot tees shall carry a minimum of 12 lbs., per lineal foot and also be rated intermediate duty. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 6. No deviations 2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING APC-#2 A. Products: USG Interiors, Inc., Donn DXLA suspension system, B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Fire-Rated Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch wide metal caps on flanges. . 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. Four-foot tees shall carry a minimum of 12 Ibs.,.per lineal foot and also be rated Intermediate duty. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Aluminum cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 6. No deviations ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1 09511 - 6 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center 2.8 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: 1. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, ' finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at ' exposed suspension member.. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required-to fit penetration exactly. 3. For narrow-face suspension systems, -provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. 2.9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: - a. United States Gypsum Co.;. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints' ' a. Tremoo, Inc.; Tremoo Acoustical Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for tVosed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturers standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. C. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, ' nonsIdnning, nonstaining, gunnable, .synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B Proceed with installation onl afar unsatisfactor conditions h ve been corrected . y . y a 3.2 PREPARATION ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 7 Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows; 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where ?required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. .11 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and.appropdate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws,. or other.devices that are secure and appropriate for bath structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or.fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through.forrns into concrete. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends ' of each member. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast4n-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet Miter comers accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. ACOUSTICAL PANEL. CEILINGS 09511 - 8 1 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ' F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 4. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel. manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. ' 6. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly. 3 4 CL AN NG . E I A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and ' suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09611 1 t ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1 SECTION 49651- RESILIENT FLOOR TILE r PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contrail, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient floor tile. B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor tiles are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). ' C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturers color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor file indicated. D. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specked in Division 1. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of the from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide resilient floor the with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. ' RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 -1 R Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site to comply with requirements of Division 1, 01310 Project Management and Coordination, Section 1.8 "Project Meetings". 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver tiles, sheet rolls, and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturers unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Store tiles on flat surfaces. Moue tiles and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive tiles for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. -Do not install tiles. until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install tiles and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturers recommended bond and moisture test. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box for each 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each class, wearing surface, color, pattern and size of resilient floor tile installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT TILE A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated). Basis of Design: See plan sheet A2.3. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 2 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer. Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. r B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by file manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended, by the manufacturer to suit resilient floor file products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of tiles will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for file installation and comply with file manufacturers requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer. , 2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving resilient flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General. Comply with manufacturers installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive file and sheet flooring. ' B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per file manufacturers directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. ' Apply according to manufacturers directions. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. General: Comply with tile manufacturers installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of tile. installation included in Project. B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room axis, unless otherwise indicated. C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged; if so numbered. Cut tiles neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in basket weave pattern with grain direction altemating between reversed in adjacent tiles. 2. Lay tiles in pattern with respect to location of colors, patterns, and sizes as indicated on Drawings. D. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installing on top of finished the floor, install the before these items are installed. E. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. F. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers. holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device. H. Adhere tiles and sheet flooring to flooring substrates without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed the installation. 1. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with the manufacturers directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. J. Hand roll tiles where required by tile manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing file installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by tile manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to tile surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes. RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 4 I Aging Well Center at The Long Center a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic product acceptable to tile manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean dies not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer. 1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing installation prior to cleaning. 2. Reapply floor polish after cleaning. END OF SECTION 09651 4 RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 5 Aging Well-Center at The 'Long Center SECTION 09652 - RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient sheet flooring.. B. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with rubber sheet flooring are specified in Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. -General: Submit ttie following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Certification by file manufacturer that products supplied for tile installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's). . ' " C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual flooring or sections of flooring showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of flooring indicated. D. Maintenance data for flooring, to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Singk-. Source Responsibility for Flooring: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of flooring from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide flooring with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. ' RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 69652-1 Aging Weli Center at The Long Center 0 C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site. ' 1. Attendees: Representatives of Owner, Architect, Contractor, the flooring installer and the flooring manufacturer shall be present at this meeting. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. "Deliver flooring materials and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's ' unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store flooring materials in -dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C). C. Store flooring materials on flat surfaces. Move flooring and installation accessories into spaces I where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to receive flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. ' After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C). B. Do not install flooring materials until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ' A. Install flooring and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been ' . completed. B. Do not install flooring over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test. ' 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Provide additional quantity of flooring equal to 5% of flooring required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A Subject to compliance with requirements, Basis of Design products: See plan sheet A2.3. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09652 - 2 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer. Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 13. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by file manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives (Cements): Water-resistant type recommended by the manufacturer to suit resilient floor file products and substrate conditions indicated. I . PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of flooring will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with the ' manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Concrete SubHoors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by tile manufacturer. , ' 2. Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements specked in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving rubber sheet flooring. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits of any kind. ' C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive flooring. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per file manufacturer's directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. ' C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring immediately before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, Planiseal, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. F. Perform a Calcium Chloride Test of slab prior to Installation of flooring. Locate (1) Calcium Chloride testing unit at the center of each room with less than 500 square feet of concrete floor surface area. Provide (1) testing unit per each 500 square feet of concrete floor surface area in rooms with more than SW square feet of concrete floor surface area. RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09652 - 3 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center Locate units so that the distance between each unit and, between units and perimeter walls, are equal in each direction. Provide Test Results to Rubber Sheet Flooring Supplier. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of flooring installation included in Project. C. Rubber Sheet Flooring: 1. - Install flooring in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Flooring to be unrolled and allowed to relax. 3. Cut and adjust flooring prior to adhesion. 4. Mix adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Hold all seams in place with suitable weights for a minimum of 12 hours. 6. Surface to be protected before, during and after installation until'substantial completion. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing flooring installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by flooring manufacturer. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop the to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect. flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from _ construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over flooring. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Clean flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates.scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean flooring using method recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09652 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 09652 - 4 1 Aging WeII Center at The Long Center SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-Specificalion Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. 2. Molding accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturers standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide resilient stair accessories with a critical radiant flux classification of Class 1, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 90 deg F in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. 8. After post-installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 90 deg F. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.. 1. Fumish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one.of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: See plan sheet A2.3_ 2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Walt Base: ASTM F 1861. 1. Basis of Design product: See plan sheet A2.3. B. Type (Material Requirement): TV (vinyl). C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered). D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe). E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. F. Height: 4 inches. G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. H. Outside Comers: Job formed. 1. Inside Comers: Job formed. J. Surface: Smooth. 2.4 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY A. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering. 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products. 2. Johnsonite. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 08653 - 2 77 L Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3. Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. 41 Roppe Corporation. 5. Stoler Industries. ' B. Material: Vinyl_ C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated. ' 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or ' blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION r A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specked ' in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges,: depressions, scale, and fareign:deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient. products. . 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1 rdeners l d h d s . s, sea er , an a 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compoun 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed ' with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. ' C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. ' D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 3 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096537 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Applywall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. - C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Comers: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Comers: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where comer is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Resilient Stair Accessories: 1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint between units. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp=mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 4 . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during reminder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Cover stair accessory products with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 5 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center I SECTION 09671- RESINOUS FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 Work Included A. Work described in this section includes surface preparation and installation of a reactive resin industrial floor system. B. See drawings for locations and quantities. 1.02 Related Work - Specified elsewhere A. Cast-in-place concrete (Section 03300) ' 1. See Paragraph 1.08 - Requirements for New Concrete. B. Painting (Section 09900) ' 1.03 System Description A. The reactive resin floor system is a 4-6mm (3116'-1/4') thick troweled surfacing composite of 100% reactive binder resin and colored quartz aggregate with specified primer and topcoat ' B. The flooring system shall cure completely and be available to normal operations in no more than 90 minutes at temperatures as low as 0 °C. after application of the final coat. C. The finished floor system shall be uniform in color combinations, texture, and appearance. All edges that terminate at walls, floor discontinuities, and other embedded items shall be sharp, uniform, and f cosmetically acceptable with no thick or ragged edges. The Contractor shall work out an acceptable masking technique to ensure the acceptable finish of all edges. 0. See Paragraph 3.04 and/or 3.07 for number and thicknesses of each coat/layer in each system. E. All resins must be manufactured and tested under an ISO 9001 registered quality system and ISO 14001 ecology management system. 1.04 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Acceptable manufacturer. ISO 9001 certification B. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Pre-qualification requirements: Only approved applicators, licensed by the manufacturer shall be considered for qualification. The application of materials by untrained, non-approved Contractor or personnel will not be permitted. 2. Each approved applicator shall have been qualified by the Manufacturer as knowledgeable in all phases of surface preparation. 3. Each approved applicator must have three (3) years experience of installing resinous flooring systems and submit a list of five projects/references as a prequalification requirement At least one of the five projects/ references must be of equal size, quantity, and magnitude to this project as a prequalification requirement. Owner has the option to personally inspect the projects/references to accept or reject any of the Contractors prior to bid time as a prequalification requirement C. Subcontractor Qualifications: ' RESINOUS FLOORING 09671-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. The only approved and specified subcontractors for this resurfacing work shall be for shot- blast cleaning of the concrete substrate. D. Acceptance Sample: 1. Representative sample of the specked flooring system shall be submitted to the Owner prior to the bidding phase of the project. All bidders shall inspect the °acceptance sample before submitting their bids. 2. The installed flooring system shall be similar to the acceptance sample in thicknesses of respective film layers, color, texture, overall appearance and finish. E. Bond Testing: 1. Surface preparation. efforts shall be evaluated by conducting Bond Tests at the site prior to application of the flooring system(s). 2. See paragraph 3.03 - B or consult with Material Manufacturer for speck procedure. F. Pre-Job Meeting , 1. Owner requires a Pre-Job Meeting with representatives of Owner, Contractor/Applicator, and Material Manufacturer in attendance. The agenda shall include a review and clarification of this spec cation, _ application procedures, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria, and production schedules. Applicator is not authorized to proceed until this meeting is held or waived by Owner. 1.05 Reference Standards . A. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete B. AC1302.1 R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction C. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) and (Food and Drug Administration (FDA) authorization) for incidental contact with foodstuffs. 1.06 Submittals A. Acceptance Sample: As required by owner, one foot square (1 ft. by 1 ft.) sample of the specified flooring system applied to hardboard or similar backing for rigidity and ease of handling. B. Manufacturer's Literature: Descriptive data and speck recommendations for surface preparation, mixing, and application of materials. C. Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for each respective product to be used. D. Cleaning and Maintenance 1.07 Delivery, Storage, and Handling A. All material shall be delivered in original Manufacturers sealed containers with all pertinent labels intact and legible. B. Store materials in dry protected area between 25° and 80° Fahrenheit. Keep out of direct sunlight. Protect from open flame; keep all containers grounded. C. Follow all Manufacturers specific label instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and handling. RESINOUS FLOORING . 09671-2 t Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.08 Project/Site Conditions A. Material, air, and surface temperatures shall be in the range of 32° to 85° Fahrenheit during application and cure, unless a special formulation is being used and Manufacturer has been consulted. B. Relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be less than 85 percent and the surface temperature shall be at least 5 degrees above the dew pant. C. Conditions required of new concrete to be coated. 1. Concrete shall be moisture cured for a minimum of 7 days at 70° F. The concrete must be fully cured for a minimum of 28 days prior to application of the coating system pending moisture testing. 2. Surface contaminants such as curing agents, membranes, or other bond breakers should not be used. 3. Concrete shall have a "rubbed" finish; float or darby finish the concrete (a hard steel trowel is neither necessary nor desirable). 4. Drains should be set to the concrete grade rather than raised to the finished grade of the topping. D. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing. Concrete R/H must be 85% or less as measured by protimeter. Readings greater than 5 by the Calcium Chloride method or 85% by protimeter may require a preliminary treatment with a moisture vapor mitigating system supplied by the manufacturer. E. Foodstuffs are the responsibility of the Owner and shall have been removed from the area of application by the Owner or his representatives. F. Vapor barriers and/or suitable means shall have been installed beneath grade slabs to prevent moisture vapor transmission. Consult technical dept. 1.09 Warranty A. Manufacturer warrants that materials shipped to buyers are at the time of shipment substantially free from material defects and will perform substantially according to manufacturer's published literature if used strictly in accordance with prescribed procedures and prior to expiration date. B. Manufacturer's liability with respect to this warranty is strictly limited to the value of the material purchased. ' C. Manufacturer has no responsibility for the application and processing of products and is under no circumstances liable to any third party whatsoever. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Acceptable Manufacturers A. Silikal GmbH, Germany 2.02 Materials A. Decorative Quartz Flooring 1. Moisture Vapor Trealment (if required) Silikal RE40 ' RESINOUS FLOORING 1 09671-3 Aging Well°Center at The Long Center 2. Saturating Primer. . Silikal R41 with Additive 1 3. Patching/Sloping (if required) Silikal R17 Polymer Concrete 4. Coving (if required): Silikal HK20 with Silikal Filler CQ 5. Topping: Silikal R61 Color Quartz, consisting of Silikal R61 Resin and Silikal Filler 6. Topcoat(s): Silikal R71 Colorless Silikal Topcoat Resin. 7. Silikal CQ for broadcasting: Color/s to be chosen by owner. Aluminum Oxide (if required) 2.02.01 Product Performance Criteria A. Moisture Vapor Mitinatina Svstem 1. Percentage Reactive Resin ...........................................................................100% Percentage Solids .................................................................. 100% 2. Water Pressure Resistance (3 days at 72 psi) ...........................................Passed 3. Resistance to Diffusion against H2O1 ................................................. 0.3g/m2 • day 4. Tensile Bond Strength .................................................................................475 psi B. Primer 1. Percentage Reactive Resin .......................................................................:...100% Percentage Solids .............................................................................................100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): ...................................less. than 0.6 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) .........................................................3,550 psi. 4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): .......................................... 2.1 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./tn./deg. F (ASTM 0696): ..............0.000035 6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257): Volume Resistance, ohm-cm: ............................................................................. 1015 Surface Resistance, ohm: .................................................................................... 1012 7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122), g/cm=hr--mm Hg X 10-9: 1.4 C. Polymer Concrete 1. Percentage of reactive resin ...........................................................................100% 2. Water Absorption, Wf. % (ASTM D570): ......................................................... 0-02 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638) .........................................................1,200 psi. 4. Tensile Modulus, psi X 10 to the 5th (ASTM D638): .........................................:.1.2 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696) psi x10-6 :..........18 6. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C39) .................................................7,800 psi. (ASTM C109) ..............................................................................................9,200 psi. D. Toping 1. Percentage of reactive resin: ......................................................................... 100% Percentage of solids :......................................................................................... 100% 2. Water Absorption, Wt. % (ASTM D570): .......................................................... 0.04 3. Compressive Strength, psi (ASTM C109): ................................... 6,000-8,000 psi. (ASTM D695): ............................................................................................ 6,000 psi. RESINOUS FLOORING 09671 - 4 J 1 1 I t 1 1 Aging Well center at The. Long Center 4. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D638): ............................................... ......... 1,050 psi. 5. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): .................................................... 720,000 psi. 6. Flexural Strength, psi (ASTM D790): ..................................................... 3,500 psi. 7. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, in./in./deg. F (ASTM D696): .............. 0.000019 8. Electrical Resistivity, (ASTM D257) Volume Resistance, ohm-cm :.................1014 9. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543: Effect of weak acids: .......................................................................................... none Effect of strong acids: .............................................................................. .......... slight Effect of alkalis: .....................................................................:.............................none Effect of salt solutions: ............................................................................. ........... none Effect of oil, grease: ................................................................................. ........... none Effect of sunlight (UV.radiation) :............................................................. ...........none E. Colorless _T_apcoaft 1. Percentage Reactive Resin: ................................................................ ........... 100% Percentage Solids; .................................................................................. ......100% 2. Water Absorption, WL % (ASTM D570): ............................................ ............... 0.5 3. Tensile Strength, psi (ASTM D6W) :........................................................3,555 psi. 4. Tensile Modulus, psi (ASTM D638): .....................................:.............. 210,000 psi. 5. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696) In./in./deg..F: .......... ...... 0.000035 6. Electrical Resistivity (ASTM D257): Volume Resistance, ohm-an: ............................................................................. 10 15 Surface Resistance, ohm: ....................................................................... ............. 1012 7. Water Vapor Transmission (DIN 53122) g/cm-hr-mm Hg X 10-9: ...... ................ 1.43 8. Chemical Resistance, ASTM D543: Effect of weak adds: ....................................................... i ................................ ... none Effect of strong acids: ...................................................... ...................... .......... s light Effect of alkalis: ....................................................................................... ............ none Effect of salt solutions: ................................................................. . ..........none Effect of oil, grease: ........................................................................................... none Effect of sunlight (UV radiation): .........................•............................................. none 2.02.02 Product Installation & Application Criteria A. All Material Systems Excepting Moisture Vapor Treatment: 1. Pot Life at 68° F.: .............................................................................. I d-'l 5 minutes 2. Cure rime at 68° F.: .............................................. ;; .............................. 60 minutes 3. Recoat Time at 68° F.: ...................................................................... 6(00 minutes 2.03 Mixes A. Follow manufacturer's prescribed procedures and recommendations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Prework Inspection A. Examine all surfaces to be surfaced and report to the Owner and/or Engineer any conditions that will adversely affect the appearance or performance of these systems and that cannot be put into acceptable condition by the preparatory work speed in Paragraph 3.03. B. Do not proceed with application unto the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is RESINOUS FLOORING 09671-5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center given by the Engineer. C. In the event that Applicator has employed all acceptable methods of surface preparation and cannot remedy adverse conditions that would lead to failure of the installation, Applicator shall withdraw from the contract and Owner will be financially responsible only for preparation efforts. 3.02 General A. Material storage area must be selected and approved by Applicator and Owner or his representative. B. Owner will furnish V Phase electricity and water for use by Applicator. C. If existing ventilation is inadequate, Applicator will provide sufficient ventilation to allow complete air exchange every five (5) minutes. D. Owner shall provide means for disposal of construction waste. E. Applicator will protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated with masking and/or. covers. Owner's equipment shall be protected from dust, cleaning solutions, and flooring materials. 3.03 Preparation A. Surface Preparation - General 1. Concrete substrate must be clean and dry. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint overspray, and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air blowdown. 2. New concrete: See 1.08 - C for requirements. 3. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser, detergent, or other appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove the accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning will not remove such deposits, but only drive them deeper. 4. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour period as determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing and no more than 85% R/H as measured by Protimeter B. Bond Testing 1. The applicator shall evaluate all surface preparation by conducting bond tests at strategic locations. 2. Mix six (6) ounces of the primer to be used in the application with 5% by volume Powder Hardener. Add #10412 mesh, dry quartz sand until an easily trowelable mixture is obtained. Apply palmsized patties 1/8" to 1/4" thick. 3. After one (1) hour at (68° F.), patties must be cured tack-free and cooled to ambient temperature of concrete. Remove patties with hammer and chisel and examine fracture/delamination plane. Concrete with fractured aggregate must be attached to the entire underside of the patty. 4. If only laitance or a small amount of concrete is attached or if interface between patty and substrate is RESINOUS FLOORING 09671-6 Aging Well Center at The Long Center tacky, further substrate preparation is required. 5. If further surface preparation is required, bond tests shall be conducted again when this has been completed. 6. If no amount or kind of surface preparation produces satisfactory bond tests, the applicator shall report this to the Owner, Engineer, and Manufacturer. C. Mechanical Surface Preparation and Cleaning 1. All accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically blast cleaned using a mobile steel shot, dust recycling machine such as BLASTRACO, or approved equivalent. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to 40 grit sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate. 2. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarifiers, needle guns, scabblers or other suitably effective equipment. 3. After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other debris shall be removed with brush or vacuum. 4. Conduct Bond rests to check adequacy of surface preparation. See Paragraph 3.03 - B (Bond Testing). 5. Application of the respective specified material system(s) must be completed before any water or other contamination of the surface occurs. 3.04 Installation A. Application of flooring system consists of: 1. applying moisture vapor treatment (if required) 2. applying the primer, 3. applying coving (if required), 4. performing patching and sloping with polymer concrete (if required), 5. re-priming polymer concrete areas 6. applying the topping, broadcasting the quartz 7. applying the topcoat(s), Time for curing (45 - 60 minutes) shall be allowed between each coat. Thicknesses are specified below and/or in Paragraph 3.07. B. Open only the containers of component materials to be use in each specific application as needed. Refer to Manufacturer's data sheets for pot-lifehemperature relationship to determine size of batches to mix and mix ratios for each respective coat of the system. C. Measure, add, and mix the Powder Hardener into the respective resin components in the proportions recommended by the Material Manufacturer. Pot life is short, so mix only as much material at a time as can be easily and efficiently applied. 1 RESINOUS FLOORING 09671-7 11 Aging Well'Center at The Long Center 3.04.01 Moisture Vapor Treatment (if required) A. Mix moisture vapor treatment products as recommended by manufacturer. B. Pour out all resin onto the concrete surface and spread it with a squeegee. After a short operating time (appr. 10 minutes) the excess must be removed with the squeegee. The remaining resin can be rolled out with a lint free resin proof roller. Resin films as well as the building of puddles have to be avofdedl The waiting time between the coats depends on the absorbency of the substrate and is normally between one and three hours. Before applying tlie second coat if required, the impregnation of the first coat into the substrate should be evident. C. If required, repeat the above process. During application of the treatment take care that there is no film building at the surface. The surface texture has to be maintained after every step. 3.04.02 Prime Coat A. Mix primer components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Pour the mixture batches onto the floor surface and use a 9° or 18" wide, 12" - 3/4' thick- ' napped, solvent resistant paint roller to roll out the material at a rate of 100 sq. ft./ gal, to form a uniform, continuous film, ensuring that all crevices, cracks, and other surface discontinuities have been saturated and coated. Use a paint brush to reach areas inaccessible to the roller. Work quickly and: deliberately; the pot life is short - (10-15 minutes). Do not leave any "puddles"; roll out any such accumulations. C. Allow the primer coat to cure. D. If any of the concrete has absorbed all of the primer or if the concrete still has a dry look, repdme these areas before applying the next layer. 3.04.03 Coving (if required) 1. Surface Preparation A. If concrete walls are to be painted prior to installation of cove base, the bottom portion of the walls shall remain uncoated to the height of the cove base to insure a proper bond to the concrete wall. B. If walls are constructed of a non-compatible material or if a coating exists, a backer board of %" cement board cut to the desired height of the cove base needs to be installed. The top of the backer board should be cut at a 45° angle to create a "beveled' edge. C. If a backer board needs to be installed it shall be fastened using a high grade construction adhesive as well as counter sunk screws or concrete masonry anchors. 2. System Description RESINOUS FLOORING 09671-8 Aging.Well Center at The Long Center A. Cove base shall be Installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and shall be: 1. Application area requires prime coat according to 3.04.02 2. Trowel-On Cove Base consisting of a trowel applied radius/base mix with a termination strip installed at the top of the base. B. Cove base will receive a broadcast and top coat consistent with flooring, system. 3.04.04 PatchinglSloping (if Required) A. Mix polymer concrete components as recommended by the Material Manufacturer. B. Use mixture to repair any damaged concrete, or to slope any areas as needed. C. Once cured, material must be re-primed before next layer is applied. 3.04.05 Topping A. Size the batches, and mix according to Manufacturer's instructions. The entire batch should be poured and spread at once, i.e., do not let material set in pail. B. Spread the topping material with a gauge rake set to a depth of 1B". Lightly trowel to a uniform thickness of 1/8" as necessary. C. If necessary, roll with a porcupine roller to release trapped air. D. Broadcast colored quartz into the fresh material before it begins to cure. Broadcast by hand, or use a blower or sand blast pot to achieve an even broadcast. The quartz must `rain' down and not be thrown into the wet ose coat. ' E. Allow the topping to cure. F. Remove excess quartz by sweeping, "blow own", and/or vacuuming. 3.04.06 Top Coat A. Apply uniformly with clean rollers at a rate of 80 - 90 sq. ftJgal. in the same way as the Primer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.04.02. B. (If Required) Broadcast aluminum oxide, or other suitable material into wet topcoat resin; size and rate as determined by owner. 1 C. Allow topcoat to cure. Floors without aluminum oxide broadcast may be lightly sanded if required. Vacuum all dust, paying particular attention to edges and corners. 1 3.04.07 Second Top Coat A. Apply uniformly with clean rollers at a rate of 100 -125 sq. ft./gal. in the same way as the Primer was applied as described in Paragraph 3.04.02.. B. Allow topcoat to cure. 3.05 Field Quality ControlAnspection A. Applicator shall request acceptance of surface preparation from the Engineer before application of the primetseal coat. B. Applicator shall request acceptance of the prime coat from the Engineer before application of subsequent RESINOUS FLOORING 09671-9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center specked materials. 3.06 Cleaning A. Applicator shall remove any material spatters and other material that is not where it should be. Remove masking and covers taking care not to contaminate surrounding area. B. Applicator shall repair any damage that should arise from either the application or clean-up effort. 3.07 Coating Schedule A. Moisture vapor treatment application rate shall be approximately 220 sq. ft. per gallon (approx. 7 mils) B. Primer application rate shall be approx. 100 sq.ft. per gallon (approx. 16 mils). C. Patching/Sloping material shall be reactive resin polymer concrete D: Coving shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. E. Body coat shall be applied with a gauge rake set at 11W for a rate of 40 sq. ft, per batch. Colored quartz to be broadcast into the uncured topping (optional, finish must match approved texture). Broadcast the quartz at the rate of 0.5 - 0.75 pounds per sq. ft. F.. Clear topcoat shall be applied at the rate of 80 - 90 sq. ft. per gallon for the first coat and 90 - 120 sq, ft. per gallon for the second application. Please refer to manufacturer's data sheets for guideline recipes, material consumption, hardener quantities END OF SECTION 09671 RESINOUS FLOORING 09671-10 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet, installation, and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions. ' D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturers standard size,.showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the folio ing: 1. 124neh-square samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 124nch4ong samples of each type expcaed edge stripping and accessory item. 1A QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Test Method: ASTM D 2859 a. Rating: Pass. B. Other requirements: Provide carpet identical to that for the following performance characteristics, per test methods indicated below. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. Submit independent laboratory results for tests required, if requested by Architect 1. Critical radiant flux ; Test Method ASTM E 648 a. Requirement: Class 1 2. Smoke density; Test Method ASTM E 662 a. Requirement: 450 or less. 3. Static Resistance; Test Method AATCC 134 a. Requirement: 3.7 or less kilovolts when tested at 20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F. 4. Tuft bind; Test Method ASTM D 1335 a. Requirement: 20 lb. average ' CARPET 09680-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 5. ADA conformance a. Minimum static coefficient of friction of.60 C. Certificates 1. Manufacturer shall submit a letter certifying compliance with this specification. 2. Manufacturer shall submit a letter certifying that the flooring contractor is certified by the manufacturer to install their carpet. D. Submit manufacturer's recommended maintenance procedures. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg' C) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where materials are stored. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate Conditions: Moisture content shall not exceed 65 percent B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 10 or less when substrate wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper applied. C. Install carpet when 'the temperature is between 65 degrees F. and 95 degrees F. and the ' humidity is between 10 and 65 percent. D. Install carpet when temperature of concrete slab is above 65 degrees F. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage . and , identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Basis of Design is indicated on Carpet Data Sheet at the end of this section. Subject to compliance with requirements, products by other manufacturers will be considered. To be considered, product data and sample book must be submitted to the Architect no later than 10 days prior to bid date. Architect will evaluate and issue results of evaluation by addenda. Only approved products are acceptable. 1 Carpet: See Data Sheets at the end of this Section. 2.2 ACCESSORIES CARPET 09680 - 2 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center A. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty rubber of sine and profile indicated; ' minimum 24nch-wide anchorage flange; manufacturer's standard colors. B. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product reoammended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at banking to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. C. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet; low volatile organic adhesive. PART 3, EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION . A. Patch holes and level high spots to a smooth surface. Seel .powdery or porous surfaces with seater recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Patch holes and cracks. In some locations existing floor slabs are uneven across control joints. Provide leveling material recommended by manufacturer. Provide enough material in a broad application to make change in level indiscernible. C. Vacuum clean substrate prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity bf carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in ' closed position; do not place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves and closets of each space. C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. E. Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders. F. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming cement, and taping and%r sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching and continued stresses during life of carpet.. G. Stretch carpet to provide smooth, ripple free, taut, trim edges. Use power stretcher where carpet length is greater than 20 feet. H. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butt.cuts with seaming cement. 1. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturers recommended cleaning agent. I CARPET 09680 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yam. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 CARPET DATA SHEET A. Provide the following product, unless noted otherwise: 1. Manufacturer: Interface Flor 2. Pattern: 146470200A Pop Waves 3. Color: 100483 Wood Stock END OF SECTION 09680 T CARPET 09680 - 4 r In L? SECTION 09910 -PAINTING PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENT'S Aging.Well Center at The Long Center A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1 1.2 SUMMARY A This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: ' 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces ' whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and ironwork, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electril:al equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefnished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork and casework. b. Acoustical ceiling panels. c. Aluminum Storefront Frames d. Aluminum Curtain Wall Frames. e. Door Hardware. f. Appliances. g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. h. Light fixtures. I. Distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper. d b B rass. ronze an e. ' 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. PAINTING 09910-1 Aging WellCenter at The Long Center b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 8"egree meter. 2.. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen-finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65' when measured at a 60-degree meter. 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers'. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference speck coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturers Information: Provide manufacturers technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturers color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1. After color selection, the Architect will fumish color chips for surfaces to be coated. C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample for location and application. 3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch- square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. c. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch-square samples of each color and material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-84nch samples of natural- or stained-wood finish on actual wood surfaces. e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 44nch square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. PAINTING 09910 - 2 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information ' specified 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample of each type of P - DCA P5. coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. The Architect will select. one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be-painted. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of wall surface.. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. After permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated, apply coatings in this room or to each surface aooording to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture. on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval df colors will be from job-applied samples. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturers original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or. binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use In tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing; and application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. ' B. Apply solvent-thinned paints: only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. PAINTING 09910 - 3 1 ' Aging!Well Center at The Long Center C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point: or to damp or wet surfaces: 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. At the conclusion of the project and as a part of Project Closeout, submit a summary list of all paint products used on the project.- List manufacturer, paint name, paint color, specific paint mix and location where additional quantities may be purchased. B. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied in the quantities described below. Package paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish -the Owner with extra paint materials in the quantities indicated below: a. Exterior, Flat Acrylic Paint: One case of each color applied. b. Exterior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: One case of each color applied. c. Exterior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: '2 gal. of each color applied. - d. Exterior, Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. e. Interior, Flat Acrylic Paint: One case of each color applied. f. Interior, Low-Luster Acrylic Finish: One case of each color applied. g. Interior, Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: 2 gal. of each color applied. h. Interior, Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 1 gal. of each color required. 2. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal: or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into-the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. C. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. ICI Paints 2. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 3. Fuller-O'Brien Paints (Fuller). 4. Glidden Co. (The) (Glidden). 5. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 6. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 7. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & L). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. PAINTING ogg10 - 4 Aging Well Center at The Long Center B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturers product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturers proprietary product names to designate colors or ' materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Fumish manufacturers material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. VOC Content of Field Applied Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. ' 2. Nonfat Paints, Coatings, and Pruners: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 9/1- 4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 5. Shellacs, Clear VOC not more than 730 g/L. 6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L 7. Flat Topcoat Paints. VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 9. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 ' g/L• 10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 11. Shellacs, Clear. VOC not more than 730 g/L. 12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 14. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L. 15. Zino-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. 16. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L. B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: ' 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. C. Antimony. d. Benzene. 1 e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f_ Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. ' L Di-n-octyl phthalate. J. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. 1. Dimethyl phthalate. M. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. 1 PAINTING 09910 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone_ q. Lead. r. Mercury. S. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. U. Methylene-chloride. V. Naphthalene. w,. Toluene (methylbenzene). X. 1,1,14richloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. D. Colors: Match colors indicated by reference to manufacturer's color designations.. E. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance .of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on I'' I characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specked over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. PAINTING 09910 - 6 ' Aging Well Center at The Lang Center ' b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturers written instructions. ' c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvaniized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged., Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove. pretreatment from galvanized ' sheet metal fabricated.from coitstock by mechanical. methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturers written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials. and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce-a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film, into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. ' 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of underooats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturers written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors; surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. ' 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed ' surfaces.. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. PAINTING 09910 - 7 Aging Well Center r at The Long Center 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and'side edges the same as exterior faces. ' 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. , B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is. of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators ' according to manufacturer's written instructions. I.- Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. ' s-wool as recommended by 2. Rollers: Use rdllers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep the manufacturer for the material and texture required: 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as, recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Motors and mechanical equipment. 7. ' Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. PAINTING 09910 - 8 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' I. Prime Coats: Before, applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material; as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. L... Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 1 1 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will' engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and-certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance.. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be. required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the -end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. PAINTING 09910 - 9 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being,painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Stucco and concrete: Provide the following finish systems over exterior stucco and concrete: 1. Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. ' a. Primer. Alkali-resistant, exterior, acrylic-latex primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 1) ICI: Bond Prep 3030-1200 Interior/Exterior WB Pigmented Bonding Primer. b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss, exterior, acrylic-latex enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.4 mils. 1) Icl: Dulux Professional 2406-XXXX Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi gloss Finish. B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 1) ICI: DevGuard 4160 XXXX Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 1) ICI: DevGuard 4308-XXXX Alkyd Gloss Enamel C. Exposed structural steel: Full-Gloss, Urethane finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. 1. Primer: Epoxy primer 4-6 mils D.F.T. a. ICI: . Devran 201 HXXXX Universal Epoxy Primer 2. First and second coats: Hi-Solids Polyurethane: a. ICI: Devthane 379WA Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel 3.8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board and Gypsum Plaster. Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semi -Gloss Finish 1St Coat: ICI Lifemaster 9300 Interior Zero VOC Eggshell (4 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry per coat) PAINTING 09910 -10 Aging Well Center at The Long Center e Coat;- ICI Tru-Glaze 4418 WB Acrylic Epoxy Coating 3'd Coat: ICI Tru-Glaze 4418 WB Acrylic Epoxy Coating (2.6- 3 mils dry per coat) B. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Full-Gloss, Acrylio•Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Quick-drying, rust-inhibitive, alkyd-based or epoxy-metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 1) ICI: DevGuard 4160--XXXX Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, acrylio-latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 1) ICI: DevGuard 4308-XXXX Alkyd Gloss Enamel. END OF SECTION 09910 PAINTING 09910.-11 F 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 10155 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contrail, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specfication Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes solid-polymer units as folleows: 1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced, Floor anchored. 2. Urinal Screens: Wall anchored. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments'to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 3-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. IA QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID,A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID-POLYMER UNITS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 -1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center B C D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Ampco. 3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 4. Capitol Partitions, Inc. 5. Comtec Industries. 6. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 7. Global Steel Products Corp. 8. Metpar Corp. 9. Santana Products, Inc. 10. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company. 11. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) panel material, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick, seamless, with eased edges, and with homogenous color and pattern throughout thickness of material. 1. Color and Pattern Basis of Design: Scranton Products color `Charcoal Gray'. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Manufacturers standard design; stainless steel. E. Brackets (Fittings): ' 1. Full-Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturers standard design; polymer or extruded aluminum. a. Polymer Color and Pattern: Matching pilaster. F. Heat-Sink Strip: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum strip fastened to exposed bottom edges of solid-polymer components to prevent burning. G. Overhead Cross Bracing for Ceiling-Hung Units: As recommended by manufacturer and fabricated from solid polymer. In no case shall the cross bracing extend below 80" above finish floor. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturers standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized aluminum. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturers standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturers standard finish. C. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturers standard aluminum post with floor shoe for anchoring to floor construction. D. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturers standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155.-2 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.3 FABRICATION A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling ' mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with leveling 'adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves (caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage. ' C. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 324nch wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Manufacturers standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturers standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that, comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturers standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Note that on any accessible stall doors, the hook shall be mounted at 48' above finish floor. 4. Door Bumper. Manufacturers standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturers standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with ' accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments Indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 2.4 EXTRA QUANTITIES A Turn over to Owner at Project Closeout enough hardware to completely install two compartments, including pilaster shoes, wall to panel brackets, panel to panel brackets, latches, hinges, etc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturers recommended anchoring devices. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 3/4 inch. 2. Continuous Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with continuous brackets. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or the joints. B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when. ' doors are in closed position. C. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, , and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. D. Wall-Hung and Post-Supported Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring- devices to suit ' supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from .closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces. of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by ' manufacturer and provide protection ad necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10155 ' TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4 Aging Well Center U:, at The Long Center SECTION 10431- SIGNAGE PART 1-GENERAL ' RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Plaque signs for room signage 2. Plaque signs for directional signage ' 3. Pin Mounted Dimensional Characters B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project identification signs. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for mechanical equipment. 3. Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines, for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." ' 1 A. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large- scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details. 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and ' lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as 1 a unit of Work in other Sections. D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture: SIGNAGE 10431 -1 Aging WeN Center at The Long Center a) Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacture's color charts consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required. b) Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch-long sections of extrusions and squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Manufacturers of Plaque Signs: a. Best Mandfacturing Company. b Mohawk Sign Systems. c. Southwell Company 2.2 MATERIALS A. For Directional Signs: Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg F (80 deg C), and of the following general types: 1. Transparent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "clear," provide colorless sheet in matte finish, with light transmittance of 92 percent, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM D 1003. 2. White Translucent Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as "white," provide white translucent sheet of density required to produce uniform brightness and minimum halation effects. 3. Opaque Sheet: Where sheet material is indicated as 'opaque,' provide colored opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's standards. B. For Permanent Room Signage: Melamine or hard phenolic ES plastic laminate. C. Fasteners: Combination sheet metal-wood screws, full threaded, pan head for mechanical mounting. D. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. SIGNAGE 10431 - 2 1 1 ' Aging Weli Center at The Long Center ' E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and background colors, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the application intended. ' 2.3 PLAQUE SIGNS A. Plaque Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. See Schedule on drawings for location and copy. - 1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to remain flat under-installed conditions within a tolerance of pi us or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. B. Unframed Plaque Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements: 1 Edge Condition: Square. 2 Comer Condition: Square comers. C. Laminated Sign Plaques: Permanently,leminate face panels to backing sheets of material and thickness indicated using the manufacturers standard process. D. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for ' size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices. All signs, permanent room and directional, are to comply with American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. Lettering to be Helvetica Medium Caps. ' E. For Directional Signs: Subsurface Copy; Apply copy to the back face of clear acrylic sheet forming the panel face by process indicated to produce precisely formed opaque images free from rough edges. 1. Use reverse silk-screen process to print copy; overspray the copy with an opaque background color coating. F. For Permanent Room Signs: Sand blast laminate, removing background material to reveal copy ' and Braille as raised characters, 1/32.high. 2A DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS 1 1 1 A. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the following requirements. 1. Character Material: Aluminum. 2. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 3. Finish: High-performance organic finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a) Finsh Color. Match aluminum storefront frame finish. See Division 8 -Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts. 4. Mounting: Pin mounted concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered. B. Dimensional Character Sign Schedule: SIGNAGE 10431 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Sign Type: Exterior Building Name, (2) locations. a. Sign Size: As indicated on drawings. b. Character Size: 6°. C. Text/Message: See Signage Schedule this section. d. Locations: Building exterior as indicated on drawings. 2.5 FINISHES A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance-with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level,. plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects irr appearance. : B. Wall-Mounted Plaque Signs: Attach plaque signs to.wall surfaces by mechanical means using exposed fasteners into-wall or into inserts as required by construction of wall. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions., Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner 3.3 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE INTERIOR ROOM IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE DOOR/ RM NO. SIGNAGE COPY REMARKS 101 Vest ADA Type 102 Program Room `A" ADA Type 103 Program Room V ADA Type 104 Program Room "C° ADA Type 105 Program ROOM 'D" ADA Type 106 Unisex Toilet ADA Type 107 Supply ADA Type 108 Supply ADA Type 108 Lounge ADA Type 110 Office ADA Type 111 Break Room ADA Type 113 Unisex Toilet ADA Type SIGNAGE 10431 - 4 1 Aging WeN Center at The Long Center 114 115 Supply Office ADA Type ADA Type 116 Office ADA Type 119 Women ADA Type 120 Men ADA Type EXTERIOR SIGNS ROOM SIGNAGE COPY LOCATIOWREMARKS NO. NA AGING WELL CENTER (2) locations (see drawings for locations) / Pin mounted 6' letters, Clear Anodized finish. END OF SECTION 10431 SIGNAGE 10431 - 5 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS -A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specilication Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire protection cabinets for the following: a. Portable fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section. "Fire Extinguishers." 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets. 1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style. 2: Show location of knockouts for hose valves. B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared. on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square. E. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function. F. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Rated,. Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated. B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated. ' C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths. 1.6 SEQUENCING ' A. Apply decals on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is complete. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear). ' 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire End & Croker Corporation; <Insert product name or designation. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group; Insert product name or designation. C. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc; Insert product name or designation. d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company; Insert product name or designation. e. Modem Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.; <Insert product name or designation. f. Moon-American; <Insert product name or designation. g. Potter Roemer LLC; <Insert product name or designation. h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.; Insert product name or designation. FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 2 I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER _ MATRIX PROJ. N09-0260 15890 .............. DUCTWORK 15895 ..............CLEANING OF AIR CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS 15910 ..............DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15936 ..............AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15990 ..............TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING gbhol i Engineering Matrixi. inc. Stanley P. Newton, P.E. Florida P.E. No.•35071 Certificate of Authorisation No. 4288 . 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. T ?.. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 MECHANICAL INDEX 15010 ..............BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15140 ..............SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15170 .............. MOTORS 15190 ..............MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15242 ..............VIBRATION ISOLATION 15260 ..............PIPING INSULATION 15280 ..............EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15290 ..............DUCTWORK INSULATION 15310 ..............FIRE PROTECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 15400 ..............TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS 15410 ..............PLUMBING PIPING 15415 ..............GAS PIPING 15430 ..............PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15440 ..............PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 ..............PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15853 ..............PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT (AAON) Irk 6_19git-VENTILATORS ?. iIC+ .. 1516?et' tTo F5815......n ...TOWER ROOF VENTILATORS EaH?.'a .n? fiGi{SS4 , +f.r+. io sfeai{ hs0 0 _, Engfneerg l tliit:: sFt?agi'ii?id :-EpeVE o3n0 , ? • 0 Certificate 6f K(,t &tigal°IV& 4288 Y i (b ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. Aging Well Center at The Long Center b. Size of Viewing Surface: 128 inches wide x 72 inches high, 120 Inches diagonal. d. Provide extra drop length of dimension indicated to comply with the following requirements for fabric color and location of drop length: 1) Color. Black. 2) Location: At top of screen. 1 11 11, 1.1 1 IJ C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following'.. 1. End-Mounted-Motor-Operated Screens Without Ceiling Closure: a, Basis of Design: "Cosmopolitan Electrol," Da-Cite Screen Co., Inc. b. Equal screens by Bretford Manufacturing, Inc. or Draper Shade & Screen Co., Inc. acceptable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install projection screens at locations indicated in compliance with screen manufacturers instructions. B. Install front projection screens with screen cases in position and relationship to adjoining construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate, and in manner that produces a smoothly. operating screen.with plumb and straight. vertical edges and plumb and flat viewing surfaces when screen is lowered. 1. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen, controls,, .limit switches, closure and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition. 3.2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during construction. If despite such protection damage occurs, remove and replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units in their original, undamaged condition. END OF SECTION 11132 PROJECTION SCREENS 11132-3 1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center D. Protect surfaces of rear projection screens from damage due to abrasion, dust, and other conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PROJECTION SCREEN SURFACES, GENERAL A. Measurement of Gain of Screen Viewing Surface: Measure gain of screen viewing surface against that of a magnesium carbonate surface by means of a photogoniometer using test methods and test apparatus per FS GG-S-001721)(1) for determining effect of reflected light at various viewing angles on screen surfaces.. Ratings of 1.0 refer to those viewing surfaces having a reflectivity equal to the magnesium carbonate surface. B. Material and Viewing Surface of Front Projection Screens: Obtain screens manufactured from mildew- and flame-resistant fabric of type indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the following requirements: 1. Matte white viewing surface with minimum gain characteristics complying with FS GG-S- 00172D(1) for Type A screen surface. a. Application: Provide matte white surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Seams: Where length of screen indicated exceeds maximum length produced without seams in fabric specked, provide screen with horizontal seam placed as follows: a. At top of screen at juncture between extra drop and viewing surface: 3. Mildew Resistance: Provide mildew-resistant screen fabrics. as determined by Federal Standard 191A/5760. 4. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide projection screen fabrics identical to those materials that have undergone testing and passed requirements for .flame :resistance as indicated below: a. NFPA 701 per small-scale test. ELECTRIC MOTOR OPERATED FRONT PROJECTION SCREENS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard UL-listed and UL-marked units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting accessories, and other components required for a complete installation and to comply with requirements indicated for screen surface and controls and for case, motor, and screen under description of operation and type. Remotely control operation of each screen to comply with the following: 1. Single Station Control: Three-position, UL-listed control switch for each screen with metal device box and cover plate for flush wall mounting and for connection to 120 V a.c. power supply. 2.2 B. End-Mounted-Motor-Operated Screens With Ceiling Closure: Units designed and fabricated for recessed installation with bottom of case partially open under screen compartment, to allow lowering and raising of screen but closed under motor compartment, and as follows: 1. Screen Case: 22 gauge embossed steel, factory black enamel paint finish and constructed as follows: a. Provide single or double top as standard with manufacturer. 2. Motor. Instant reversing, gear drive motor of size and capacity recommended by screen manufacturer with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal overload protection, preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in "up" and "down" positions, and positive stop action to prevent coasting. Locate motor in its own compartment as follows: a. Inside roller with noise silencer. 3. Screen: As indicated below, with top edge mounted on, and securely anchored to, rigid metal roller supported by self-aligning bearings in brackets. a. Material: Vinyl-coated glass fiber fabric. PROJECTION SCREENS 11132-2 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division' l Specification Sections, apply to this Section.' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Remote Control, Electric Motor Operated, Trap Door, Drop-Down, Ceiling Recessed, Front Projection Screens. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of 'Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of screen specked. C. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units. D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of projection screens. Show the following: 1. Location of scretsn centerline. 2. Location of wiring connections. 3. Seams in viewing surfaces. 4. Connections to suspension systems for pendant-mounted and recess-mounted screens. 5. Anchorage details. 6. Accessories. 7. Frame details for front projection screens. 1.4 ' QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of projection screen required from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary mounting hardware and accessories. 1 S. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other construction within spaces where screens will be installed is substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to take place. S. Protect screens from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. C. Store rear projection screens in manufacturer's protective packages in a position that complies with screen manufacturer's directions. Keep units in manufacturers protective packages until time of installation. PROJECTION SCREENS 11132.-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A- Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward bad of at least 250 Ibf when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3,2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufac tureras written recommendations. END OF SECTION 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 4 Aging Well Center at The Long Center C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc. D. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white. 2.4 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products "scheduled in the Toilet Accessories Legend located the drawings. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). B. Utility Shelf: 1. Provide one in. Room 105 Janitors. 2. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside. 3. Size: 16 inches long by 6 inches deep. 4. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). C. Mop and Broom Holder. 1. Provide one in Room 105 Janitors. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 36 inches. 4. Hooks: Three 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1144nch diameter stainless steel. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. S. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owners representative. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 3 Aging Well Center ' at The Long Center PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359- inch minimum nominal thickness. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (2180) hot-dip zinc coating. D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper- and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). G. Mirrors: Bright polished stainless steel. H. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitdle-butadiene-styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products scheduled in the Toilet Accessories Legend located on the drawings. Subject to compliance. With requirements, provide the named product or a comparable.product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. ' 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). B. See Schedule on Drawings for Toilet Accessories not specified here. C. Mirror Unit: 1. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.3 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 2 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Aging Well Center at The Lang Center SECTION 10801-- TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 2. Underlavatory guards. 3. Custodial accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring apd mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. S. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1 A QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together. in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 -1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2. Train Owners representative on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. 3. Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual." END OF SECTION 102226 k OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 4 ' Aging Well Center at The Long Center 2.4 FINISH SURFACE A. Materials: Manufacturers standard mildew-resistant reinforced vinyl., complying with CFFA-W 101-A for Type II material. 1. Colors and patterns as selected by Architect from manufacturers standards. 2.5 SEALS A. Horizontal Top Seals: Clearance between retracted seal and floor finish shall be not less than 1 inch. Seal shall provide constant pressure when extended. B. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Clearance between retracted seal and floor finish shall be not less than 1 W inch. Seal shall provide constant. pressure when extended. C. Final Closure: Positive lever activated mechanical closure expanding from panel edge to create a positive acoustical seal with a minimum of 250 Ibs constant force against wall. 1. Lever closure panel PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and. other conditions affecting performance of operable panel partitions. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories complying with ASTM E 557 after other finishing operations including painting have been completed. B. Install operable panel partitions conforming with Drawings and approved shop drawings and in 1 strict compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. C. Match operable panel partitions for color and pattern by installing partitions from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed panels are not acceptable. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust to ensure smooth, easy operation. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owners representative. 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is certified in writing by the operable panel partition manufacturer as qualified to install the manufacturers partition systems. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide panel finish face with the following surface-burning characteristics as-determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: Fumishect from same production run as materials installed. Package materials with protective covering and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Finish Face Material: Furnish quantity of full-width, equal to 5 percent of linear yards installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS, 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hufcor. 2. Modemfold. .3. Panelfold, Inc. B. Basis of Design: Model 931 by Modemfold with STC rating of 50. 2.2 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS A Panel Configuration: Single panels. B. Panel Construction: Top reinforcing as required to support suspension components. Steed frame with steel face sheets. 1. Face Sheets: Tension-leveled steel welded to frame. 2. Steel Channel Frame: Not less than 16 gage. C. Panel Weight: 10.0 psf maximum.' 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Carriers: Steel trolley system as required for type, size, and weight of partition for ease of operation. Two, 2 wheeled (polymer-tired) carrier assemblies. - B. Suspension Tracks: Clear anodized aluminum track with overhead supports of adjustable steel hanger rods designed for size and type of operable panel partition assembly indicated. Track deflection shall be no more than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 2 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract} Including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Manually operated panel partitions. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified independent testing agency for the following acoustic properties according to following test method: 1. Sound Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested in a full-scale opening (14 feet by 9 feet) for laboratory sound transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413 and rated for an STC plus or minus.1 as follows: a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 50. 1A SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data on physical characteristics, durability, and surf ace-buming characteristics for each type of operable panel partition and accessory specified. C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of operable panel partitions. Include plans, elevations, large-scale details of anchorages, and accessory items. Indicate unit conditions at openings, location and installation requirements for hardware, and direction of travel. D. Template drawings prepared by manufacturer showing location of items supported or anchored by permanent construction. E. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type panel finish face, indicated. 1. Include similar samples of material for panel edges and accessories involving color selection. F. Maintenance data for panel finish face to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specked in Division 1. 1. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Instructions for restretching sagging or distorted finish face. G. Acoustical test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified independent testing agency certifying that the product and materials fumished comply with specified requirements. 10651-1 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1 ` Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. C. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Larson's Manufacturing Company. h. Potter Roemer LLC. B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. ' 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. ?J PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 3 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturers standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers. 2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS . 2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS R A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. C. Badger Fire Protection; e Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company, e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Corhmercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc., h. Larson's Manufacturing Company. I. Moon American. J. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. k_ Potter Roemer IlC. 1. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 2. Valves: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container. UL-rated 4-A: 60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. C. Clean-Agent Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 1A: 10-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, with HFC blend agent and inert material in enameled-steel container, with pressure-indicating gage. 2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or black baked-enamel finish. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 2 Aging Well Center at The Long Center SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. ' Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets". 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets. B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals. D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers". B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523-1 Aging Well Center at The Long Center 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as, required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated. B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets, 2. Provide Inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. 3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb. C. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly. C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior, surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory- finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers. E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 5 Aging'Well Center at The Long Center a. Exterior of cabinet, door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive ' another finish. b.. Interior of cabinet and door. 2. Stainless Steel: No. 28. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturers standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and ' hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 4. Install door locks at factory. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturers standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with comers mitered, welded, and ground 1 smooth. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS , A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ' B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation; Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets , will be installed. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. r 1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 4 Aging Well Center at The Long Center ' B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated and 2-hour fire rated. Provide rated cabinets where required according to fire separation rating of wall or partition in which cabinet is located. See drawings. 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.04284nch4hick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/84nch-thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet. 1 1. Shelf. Same metal and finish as cabinet. D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated. I., Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead. 2. Trimless with Hidden Flange: Flange of same metal and finish as box overlaps surrounding wall finish and is concealed from view by an overlapping door. 3. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. F. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet. ' G. Door Style: Center glass panel with frame. H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear). ' I. Door Hardware: Manufacturers standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. 1. Provide manufacturers standard. J. Accessories: 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturers standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and-capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish. 2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturers standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet. 3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face. 4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle. 5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. ' 6. Alarm: Manufacturers-standard alarm that actuates when fire protection cabinet door is opened and that is powered by batteries. K. Finishes: 1. Manufacturers standard baked-enamel paint for the following: ' FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 3 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS r PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Basic mechanical requirements specifically applicable to Division 15 Sections, in addition to Division I-General Requirements, General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. B. This Division of the specifications includes mechanical; 1. Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning (HVAC). 2. Plumbing, and that mechanical which applies to heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and plumbing. r 1.42 INTENT A. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to call for finished work, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall- mean tested , "furnish and install complete and ready for use." B. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown. r " " used throughout this document shall be understood to Basis of Design C. The term mean a particular manufacturer's equipment (as scheduled specifically on the drawings or specifications) has been used as the basis by the Design Engineer to establish physical dimensions, quality, and performance required, in addition to providing a basis for interaction with other ancillary components and/or other trades. Therefore, it shall be understood that use of a piece of equipment other than that identified as the Basis of Design may impact performance of an overall engineered system or may require revisions to ancillary interfacing equipment, and thus any ' manufacturer's equipment other than that listed as Basis of Design shall require written approval via Addendum prior to bid except where the manufacturer's name is specifically listed in these specifications as a pre-approved substitute or an accepted manufacturer. All substitutes, pre-approved substitutes, accepted manufacturers, and/or Basis of Design are subject to all requirements of quality, physical characteristics (i.e., dimension, sound, etc), and performance, etc., as set forth in these specifications and contract documents. r ' BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMEtv'l'S 15010-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC r AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 1.03 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS A. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. All material take-offs for the site shall be field measured prior to bids. 1. 04 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the contract. Drawings are not to be scaled. The architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact location of fixtures and equipment. Where they are not definitely located, this information shall be obtained from the Architect. B. If directed by the Architect or Engineer, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. C. At the time of each shop drawing submission, the Contractor shall call the Engineer's attention (in writing) to, and plainly mark on shop drawings, any deviations from the Contract Documents. (See Paragraph 1.06, B.) D. Samples, drawings, specifications, and catalogs submitted for approval shall be properly labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, location, section and article number of specifications governing, Contractor's name, and name of jab. All equipment shall be labeled to match labeling on contract documents. E. Control Systems: Submit description of operation and schematic drawings of the entire control system. Include bulletins describing each item of control equipment or component. F. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc. of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted. 0. Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the contract drawings and specifications. H. All shop drawings shall be submitted to the A/E by Contractor no later than 30 days from the day of contract award. 1. Failure of the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle him to an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. F_j 1 1 1 1-1 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. #09-0160 1. Submit all Division 15 submittals at one time in one integral group. Piece-by-piece submission of individual items will not be acceptable. Engineer may check contents of each submittal set upon initial delivery; if not complete as set forth herein, submittal sets may be returned to Contractor without review and approval and will not be accepted until made complete. K. Routing and methods of support of piping shall be shown on shop drawings and shall have the review of the Engineer prior to fabrication and installation. Spacing of supports shall be as specified in Section 15140, or if not specified, shall not exceed the suggested maximum spacing recommended in ANSI B31.1 for each type of line. Supports shall be fabricated as detailed on reviewed shop drawings. Provide supports so located that temporary supports are not required during removal of valves or equipment. Insofar as possible, support lines directly from Building structure. L. At the close of the job, prior to final review, five (5) bound copies of the following shall be submitted by transmittal letter to the Engineer for review and acceptance: 1. Equipment warranties; 2. Contractor's warranty; 1 Cl 1 1 1 ?l J 3. Parts list and manuals for all equipment; 4. Balance and test readings; 5. Operating instructions (in writing); 6. Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system. 1.05 SUBMlTT w A. Submit Manufacturer's published technical data, catalog cuts, wiring diagrams, shop drawings, samples and testing and balancing logs for all elements of the -VAC work. Submit under provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. B. No equipment, piping, ductwork or components shall be fabricated, delivered, erected, or connected other than from shop drawings reviewed and approved by the Engineer. C. It shall be understood that review of shop drawings by the Engineer does not supersede the requirement to provide a complete and functioning system in compliance with the Contract Documents. D. Equipment Supports: Submit detailed shop drawings indicating equipment weight and dimensions, support material, connections, anchoring, and vibration isolation. ]BASIC MECHANICAL REounkEMENTS 15010-3 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 E. Submittals shall include, but not be limited to the following: All equipment; cooling, heating, plumbing, electrical motors, starters, controls, etc. Voltage, phase, and amps of each electrical item, such as motors, etc. All auxiliary equipment. 4. Pipe, ductwork, valves, insulation, etc. 1.06 SuRsnT nom A. Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple Manufacturers to indicate quality and performance required. The drawings are based upon equipment scheduled on drawings and specified. If another Manufacturer is considered for substitution during the bidding process, the Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all electrical, mechanical, structural, or architectural changes. Comparable equipment Manufacturers which are listed below equipment indicated as "Basis of Design" shall be considered as substitutes. Manufacturers other than the Basis of Design shall submit catalog information and 1/4" scale plan and section drawings showing proper fit and all clearances for maintenance items. B. Substitutions of other Manufacturer's will be considered for use if, in the Engineers opinion, the item requested for substitution is equal to that specified. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a typed comparative list of the basis of design and the proposed substitute. The comparative shall list capacities, pressure drops, horse power, electrical requirements, etc., (refer to Paragraphs 1.04.C and 1.06.C). Request for approval of substitutions shall be made in writing no less than ten (10) days (unless otherwise directed in Division 1) prior to bid. Substitutions shall not be considered approved unless the approval appears in an Addendum or unless so named in the specifications as a pre-approved substitute. The approval of any substitutions or equals prior to bid shall not be construed as a shop drawing approval. The substitute or equal must be submitted as described in the specifications and meet all the requirements of the specifications and drawings. C. All requests for substitutions shall be submitted as described in paragraph 1.06, B., and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product specified as basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Differences shall include, but shall not be limited to, data as follows for both the specified and substituted products. 1* Principle of operation; Materials of construction or finishes; Thickness or gauge of materials; Weight of item; BASIC MECHANICAL, REQUIREMINTS 15010-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 u I? U I I? I 1 1 1 1 F1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT KONG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. #09-0260 Q Deleted features or items; Added features or items; Changes in other Contractor's work caused by the substitution; Physical dimensions; Electrical requirements. D. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the drawing, which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or any other part of the mechanical or electrical, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared by the Subcontractor at his own expense and submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. E. Where such approved deviation requires quantity and arrangement of ductwork, piping, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish and install any such ductwork, piping, structural supports, insulation, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 CDOPERATIUN WITH OTXER TRADES A. Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish in writing to the General Contractor, with copies to the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. B. When work installed under this Division will be in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Engineer/Architect, prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than 1/4" = 1'0", clearly showing how work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, make all the necessary changes in work to correct the condition without extra charge. C. Furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work. 1.08 PROTECTION A. Protect all work and material provided under this Division from damage. All damaged equipment work or material provided under this Division shall be replaced with new. Re-builts are not acceptable. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-5 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROr. #09-0260 B. Protect all work and equipment until inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. 1.09 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, AND HOISTING A. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required. 1.10 REMOVAL OFRUBBISH A. This Contractor shall at all times keep premises free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees or work. At completion of work he shall remove all his tools, scaffolding, materials, and rubbish from the building and site. He shall leave the premises and his work in a clean, orderly, and acceptable condition. B. All plaster, concrete, cement, etc. shall be removed from all pipe, hangers, and equipment prior to painting and/or concealment. 1.11 SAFETY A. This Contractor shall comply with Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.333), Title 29---Labor, Chapter XIII, Bureau of Standards, Department of Labor, Part 151$-Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; and that his housekeeping and equipment be maintained in such a manner that they comply with the Florida Industrial Commission Safety Code and Regulations of the Federal Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), wherein it states that the Contractor shall not require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety. 1.12 SUPERVISION A. This Contractor shall provide a competent, experienced, full time superintendent who is acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner, and who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor. L13 LUBRICATION A. Where necessary, provide means for lubricating all bearings and other machine parts. If a part requiring lubrication is concealed or inaccessible, extend a lubrication tube with suitable fitting to an accessible location and suitably identify it. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-6 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AuGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 B. After installation, properly lubricate all parts requiring lubrication and keep them ' adequately lubricated until final acceptance by the Owner. 1.14 VAL vE CHARTS, TAGS, AND NAMEPLATES A. Provide at a location designated by the Engineer and the Owner, a valve chart enclosed in an aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Chart shall show the designated number of each valve, its location and service. Valve numbers shall be ' same as those shown on the "As-Built" drawings. B. Each valve shown on the chart shall have a 1-1/2" diameter, 18 gauge brass tag with clearly visible stamped numbers, securely fastened to the valve stem or handle with a heavy brass hook or chain. C. Each panel mounted switch, thermometer, gauge, or controller for fans, pumps, or other electrically operated equipment shall be clearly designated by a black plastic nameplate of size approved by the Engineer securely fastened with metal pins or screws to the panel directly under the item designated. D. Refer to Section 15190 for additional information. 1.15 WIRING DIAGRAMS A. Furnish for use under Division 16 all wiring diagrams as may be required for the installation of the wiring to insure proper operation and control of the equipment provided under this Division. Provide the diagrams in time to avoid delays. ' 1.16 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as specifically specified otherwise, shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article as approved by the Engineer shall be furnished. Refer to substitutions in this Section. B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications, all equipment ' and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect and Engineer in accordance with the recommendations of the Manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the Manufacturer recommends. 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15010-7 AGING WELL CENTER AuausT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 1.17 QUIET OPERA TIONAND VIBRATION A. All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration ' which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer and the Owner. In case of moving machinery, sound, or vibration noticeable outside of room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer and the Owner shall be corrected in an approved manner at no additional expense to the Owner. Vibration control shall be by means of approved vibration eliminators in a manner as specified in Section 15242. 1.18 ACCESSIBauy I A. This Contractor shall be responsible for the sufficiency of the size of shafts and chases, the adequate clearance in double partitions and hung ceilings for the proper installation of his work. He shall cooperate with all other Contractors whose work is in the same space, and shall advise them of his requirements. Such spaces and clearances shall, however, be kept to the minimum size required. B. This Contractor shall locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated, or maintained in fully accessible positions. Equipment shall include but not be limited to, valves, traps, clean-outs, motors, controllers, switchgear, and drain points. If ' required for better accessibility, furnish access doors for this purpose. Minor deviations from drawings may be made to allow for better accessibility. C. This Contractor shall provide the access panels for concealed mechanical equipment, valves, controls, dampers, or other device requiring service. (Refer to Paragraph 1.20 of this section.) 1.19 FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, PIERS, AND ATTACHMENTS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary foundations, supports, pads, ' bases and piers required for all air conditioning equipment, piping, pumps, tanks, compressors, and for all other equipment furnished under this Division, and shall submit drawings to the Architect and Engineer for approval before purchase, fabrication or construction of same. B. For pumps, compressors, and other rotating machinery, and for all equipment where foundations are indicated, provide concrete pads as shown. All pads shall be extended six inches (6") beyond machine base in all directions with top edge chamfered. Inset six inch (6") steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads. All pads ' shall have a minimum of 6 x 6 W2.9/W2.9 WWF unless otherwise noted. Shop drawings of all foundations and pads shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer for approval before same are constructed. , C. Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers where mounted on the floor, shall be the same materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent and surrounding flooring material. BASIC MECHANICAL REQuut,EMENTS 15010-5 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 D. All equipment, unless shown otherwise, shall be securely attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature and any attachments that are, in the opinion of the Architect and the Engineer, not strong enough shall be replaced as directed. 1.20 ACCESS DDORS FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Provide flush panel access doors with a 16 gauge steel frame and a 14 gauge steel door panel. B. Finish is to be primed painted steel. C. Provide concealed hinges which allow the door to open 175 degrees and have a removable pin. D. Provide access doors with a locked flush mounted vandal proof spanner head operated steel cams. E. Provide 1-1/2 hour "B" label door for rated chase walls. F. Furnish masonry anchors for installation in masonry walls and metal lath wings with casing bead for plaster installation. G. Provide a minimum 2'-0" by 2'-0" access doors unless shown or noted otherwise on the drawings. H. Access doors for chase walls shall be mounted 16" off the finish floor. I. Access doors for mechanical equipment shall be a minimum of 12" larger than equipment all around. 1.21 VAL vE BOXES A. All exterior underground valves shall be provided with exterior valve boxes equipped with removable covers appropriately labeled. B. Valve boxes shall be manufactured of reinforced fiberglass plastic or heavy duty PVC as approved by the Architect/Engineer, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 1.22 WELDING A. Welded pipe joints shall be made by the oxyacetylene or electric process in accordance with the Code of Pressure Piping ASA B31.1. B. Welding shall be done with good quality modern welding equipment, by competent operators, and in thorough, first class manner, conforming to AWS Standards. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUMMMNTS 15010-9 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 C. The Contractor shall be required to furnish proof of the competency of each welding operator for both field and shop welds and shall at the request of the Architect(Engineer have all or any of such welding operators pass a standard qualification test such as ASME, AWS, or Hartford Insurance Company procedure and tests. D. Filler-metal for the welding process shall conform to ASTM A233 "Specification for Mild Steel Arc-Welding Electrodes". Classification of electrodes shall be one of the following: E6010,E6015,E7016,E7018. E. When welding is to be performed, precautionary measures must be taken to prevent fire. Remove flammable materials and debris from the area. Provide an appropriate extinguisher nearby. F. Pipes shall be cut short and cold sprung into place before welding or fabricating to compensate for expansion of lines when hot. G. Welds shall be of the single vee butt type. Pipe end shall be shop beveled to 45 degrees to within 1/16 inch of the inside wall surface. H. The abutting ends of the joints shall be separated before welding to permit complete fusion, tacked in two or more points to maintain alignment, and welded. Welding shall be continuous around the pipe. 1. Welds shall be of sound weld metal, thoroughly fused into the ends of the pipe and to the bottom of the vee, and shall be built up in excess of the pipe wall to give a reinforcement of one-quarter (1/4) the pipe wall thickness and in such a manner that one weld metal will present a gradual increase in thickness from the surface of the pipe to the center of the weld. The minimum width of the weld shall be 2-1/2 times the pipe wall thickness. J. The fillet welds from the flanges of fittings shall be fused into the pipe and plate for minimum distance of 1-1/2 times the pipe wall thickness and shall be built up to present a minimum throat thickness of depth of weld of 1-1/4 times the pipe wall thickness. K. Branch connections shall be fabricated by welding. Openings cut into pipe for welded connections shall be accurately made to give carefully matched intersections and welding fittings shall be carefully welded into the pipe system. L. Welding ells shall be used at all turns in welded pipe lines; no mitered ells will be approved. I MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-10 ' BASIC 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX, PROD. #09-0260 M. Where branch piping is three times smaller than the main, branch connections shall be made up with the appropriate manufactured weld-on fitting. Welded tees shall be ' used for all other branch connections, unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer for a specific case. 1. Approved Manufacturers a. Allied Piping Products. b Bonne For e . y g . c. Branch Connections. d. Branchlets. ' e. Tube Turn. f. Thread-O-Lets. ' N. Welds in piping shall be annealed after welding to remove the welding strains. The temperature need not exceed that causing a dull red, and shall be uniform around the pipe. Welds made in place shall be annealed, but the pipe shall be free to expand and shall be properly supported so as to avoid stresses. Annealing shall always be followed by slow cooling. 1.23 REGmAroRYREgumEMENTS A. Conform to applicable Codes and Standards as follows: 1. Standard a. Certain standard materials and installation requirements are described by reference to standard specifications. These standards are as follows: ASA .............. American Standards Association. ASTM........... American Society for Testing Materials. ASME........... American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code of Unfired Pressure Vessels. NEMA .......... National Electrical Manufacturers Association. UL ................. Underwriters Laboratories. ANSI ............. American National Standards Institute. ASHRAE ...... American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers. BASIC MECHAMCAL REQUIREMENTS _„_? .. 15010-1I ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12,2M AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SMACNA..... Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association. AMCA .......... Air Moving and Conditioning Association. ARI ............... Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. AMA ............. Acoustical Materials Association. f h ' t e For additional standards and requirements see other sections o specifications. Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation and materials , shall comply with the latest published edition at the time project is bid unless otherwise specified herein. ' 2. Codes And Rules a. All material furnished and all work installed shall comply with the I following codes as they apply to this project: O National Electric Code. O Regulations of the Florida Industrial Commission Concerning Safety. O Applicable County, State and Local Building Codes. O Local and State Fire Marshal Rules and Regulations. O Occupational Safety and Health Agency Standards (OSHA). O Florida State Board of Health Rules and Regulations. O Florida Building Code-Mechanical. O Chapter 4A-47, Florida Administrative Code - Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators. Applicable codes shall be those adopted by the authority having jurisdiction at the time project is bid. 3. Permits, Fees And Inspections a. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees, sales taxes and other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with this work; file all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIIIEMENTs 15010-12 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT KONG CENTER MATRIX PROs. 009-0260 b. Obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver to the Owner/Engineer the same certificates before request for acceptance and final payment for the work . C. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the ' Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. 1 F- L 1 1 d. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid. 1.24 SCOPE OF WORK A. The scope of the work included under this Division of the Specifications shall include complete mechanical systems as shown on the plans and as specified herein. The General Conditions and Special Conditions of these specifications shall form a part and be included under this Section of the Specifications. Provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, plant, and any and all other items necessary to complete the mechanical systems. All items of equipment are specified in the singular; however, provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings, and as required for complete systems. B. Systems shall include all appurtenances as required to achieve the operating conditions as shown and specified and shall result in a superior installation. C. Scope of work shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Demolition a. Remove kitchen exhaust canopy, ductwork, and exhaust fans in the renovated areas and their respective controls, supports, pads, ductwork, etc. b. Remove all existing supply, return and exhaust ductwork within renovated areas. (Refer to drawing for extent of renovated areas.) 2. New Work a. Provide rooftop DX unit, complete with cooling coils, filters, hot gas reheat coils, heating coils, ductwork, controls, etc. b. Provide standalone automatic temperature control system for new rooftop A/C unit. Modify existing control system where thermostat locations are affected by demolition scope of work. C. Insulate all new domestic hot water piping. Replace all insulation on existing piping system where it has been removed or damaged. Insulate all new and existing equipment with exposed hot and cold surfaces. BASIC MECHANICAL REQuntEilKNrs 15010-13 ® FdVGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 d. Provide testing and balancing of air systems. e. Modify the existing sanitary systems as shown on drawings. f. Modify existing gas, domestic hot and cold water system as shown on drawings. g. Provide new plumbing fixtures where indicated on drawings. D. All electrical work required to support mechanical equipment or is otherwise necessary to operate mechanical equipment, shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor (including, but not limited to) electrical motors for all motor- operated equipment required under this Division, motor controllers, all starters not provided by the Electrical Contractor (coordinate with Electrical Contractor), pilot lights and relays, line and low voltage control wiring, raceways, connections to switches, and other electrical devices furnished with temperature control systems except as otherwise provided for in other Divisions of this Specification. t Cl 1 11 E. All starters furnished by the Mechanical Contractor shall meet all requirements I specified. F. Any equipment submitted for prior approval shall be submitted with the following written information specifically for the submitted project application: specific model numbers, dimensional data, performance data and other data as requested by the Engineer. General or ambiguous submittals will not be considered for prior approval. 1.25 REMOVALS, RELOCATIONS, RECONNECTIONS, AND RESTORATIONS A. Demolition of existing piping, equipment, etc., shall be done as indicated on the Drawings. Existing piping and/or equipment to be removed shall be offered to the Owner. If the Owner wishes to utilize the existing equipment elsewhere, this Contractor shall move the equipment to a site designated by the Owner. All material to be removed shall be discarded by the Contractor and they shall not be used again. B. All demolition work shall be completely coordinated with the Owner. Demolition and reconnections requiring shut-down of existing systems shall be scheduled with the Owner/Engineer. If shut-down can only be accommodated on the weekend, or after normal working hours, such work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. If it is not possible to schedule sufficient Owner coordinated and approved downtime to complete the entire demolition and reconnection scope such that all or a part of the facility's service(s) will be disrupted, affecting the normal business operation of the facility (i.e., loss of HVAC or plumbing), the Contractor shall provide temporary accommodations (i.e., temporary HVAC or portable toilets, etc), for the duration of the shutdown at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Location, capacity, size, etc. of existing equipment, piping, etc., was obtained from field survey and as built drawings. Verify all conditions at site prior to commencing with work. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies prior to starting work or ordering material. 13ASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-14 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER D. Survey existing facilities and utilities as necessary to determine location of shut-off or disconnect devices, drains, vents, etc. Drain, refill, and purge existing water piping circuits to make new piping connections. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the existing piping and identify which is supply and return, chilled water, and hot water, prior to starting demolition for new piping connections. E. Temporarily store all items to be relocated, if required. Contractor shall be responsible for safe storage of all such items and shall replace any items lost or damaged during storage removal or reinstallation. A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of Owner/Engineer before proceeding. A. For requirements for trenching and backfilling, refer to Division 2. A. This Contractor shall furnish Operating and Maintenance (O&M) manuals and As- built drawings before final payment will be issued. 1. 0&M manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, and shall consist of the following (at a minimum): a. All Contractor and Manufacturer warranties. 1.26 PwjECT/SITE CUNwnm 1.27 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 1.28 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTS AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 b. List of Contractors and Parts and Equipment Suppliers---complete with contact person, proper company name, address, and telephone numbers. C. Parts list for supplied equipment including a checklist of recommended components to be stocked on-site, d. Maintenance and replacement parts manuals. e. Start-up and shutdown operating instructions. f. Manufacturer's literature describing the equipment, which shall include wiring diagrams and operating specifications. g. Control system sequence of operation, system diagram, and backup disks of the system configuration. h. Copies of final test and balance reports. BASIC MEcHANicAL REQuntEMEws 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15010-15 f.? .J AGING WELL CENTER AuGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROs. #09-0260 2. As-built drawings shall consist of AutoCAD drawings (plotted vellums) and copies of each AutoCAD file on floppy disk. If the original construction document is not an AutoCAD produced document, mylar sepias will be acceptable in lieu of plotted vellums and disks. 1.29 EXISTING CONDI TIONS-EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. For purposes of this Contract, the assumption during bidding is that any and all existing fire alarm, intercom, security, lighting, electrical systems, etc., are complete and operating properly. B. Before commencing any work on fire alarm, security alarm, energy management, intercom, lighting, or electrical systems, or any work which affects them, the Specialty Contractor shall examine such systems thoroughly. If this Contractor finds any portion of any system not functioning fully and properly, he shall notify the Project Architect/Engineer (PA/E) and the Owner in writing exactly and precisely which item(s) are not working. (This paragraph does not require diagnosis as to why such item(s) are not working nor the repair of such.) C. Upon notification to the Owner, the PANE and Owner shall verify whether such report is accurate. If found not accurate, the PA/E and the Owner shall demonstrate such to this Contractor. If the report is found. accurate, the Owner may either: Correct such deficiencies with his own Maintenance forces or by employing another Specialty Contractor. Require of the Contractor for this construction project a proposal sum to thoroughly diagnose the cause of such deficiencies and the specifying of precise corrective action needed. Upon receipt of such proposal sum, the Owner may elect to employ the Contractor, by Change Order, to effect such corrections; or, with the Contractor's approval, employ the Contractor's appropriate Specialty Contractor directly by Purchase Order, to effect such corrections; or the Owner may achieve corrections to the system by other means. D. However, upon commencing any work under this Contract on fire alarm, security alarm, energy management, lighting, intercom, or electrical systems under is Construction Contract, this Contractor has accepted the systems as complete and functioning properly. From the time of commencing work.on such systems, they become the responsibility of this Contractor to maintain and keep functional through the Date of Final Substantial Completion. If, at the time of Final Substantial Completion, such a system or portion of such system is found not to be functioning properly, such item shall be listed on the "punchlist" and shall be corrected by this Contractor. Once corrected, inspected by the PANE and Owner, and found to be functioning properly, the item shall be removed from the "punchlist" as satisfied. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-16 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 ?I 1 1 1 LD AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROs. #09-0260 E. The guarantees, warranties, and obligations of this Contractor for this work under this Contract shall not be extended to include the existing fire alarm, security alarm, other alarm systems, intercom, lighting, energy management and electrical systems beyond the date of final acceptance of the work under this Contract. 1.30 PAINTING A. Provide painting and touch-up painting of all exposed piping, ductwork, support structures, etc., and all unfinished equipment (concealed or exposed). Refer to Section 15190 for color scheme requirements of pipes and identification markers. B. Deliver materials to job site in new, original, and unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, trade name, and label analysis. Store where indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist or when relative humidity exceeds 85%. Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces. D. Protect work of other trades. Correct any painting related damages by cleaning, repairing, or replacing, and refinishing, as directed by Engineer. E. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers where required. Notify Engineer in writing of anticipated problems using specified coatings with substrate primed by others. F. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in strict accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions for each substrate condition. G. Remove hardware and accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied protection. Re-install removed items and remove protective coverings at completion of work. H. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, and similar materials to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease and oils, and by roughing to remove glaze. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted before beginning painting. Do not paint over surfaces where alkalinity or moisture content exceeds manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Clean ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized or shop-coated. Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged. Clean galvanized surfaces free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent. Completely paint all welds prior to application of insulation or other protective covering. Non-insulated piping shall be painted entirely. J. Mix, prepare, and store painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to which applied. BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-17 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT Lo^;G CENTER MATRIX PROB. 409-0260 K. Application 1. Apply painting and finishing materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators, and techniques best suited for materials and surfaces to which applied. 2. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final paint coat, until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. 3. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, flat, non-specular black. 4. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinges covers to match exposed surfaces. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Sand lightly between succeeding enamel or varnish coats. 6. Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. 7. Apply each material at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to provide a total dry film to thickness of not :less than 4.0 mils for an entire coating system of prime and finish coats for 3-coat work. 8. Provide a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils for entire coating system of prime and finish coat for 2-coat work. 9. Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements. L. Exterior Paint Schedule 1. Concrete, Stucco, and Masonry: (other than concrete masonry units.) Lusterless 6qat2 Acrylic Finish: 2 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 1.5 mils. aR:°• r• NONE ?°?a drF'??',15I 'g'•'? „a ?'iiW, w {?rnw..,. ?..,.,ft rSst ccYscylan?r15 1 ?-! ' u Q Scott._ ..........420 100% Acrylic Supercoat. Q Devoe ............ 15XX Wonder-Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint 0 Glidden..._...... Y3525 Spread Glide-on Q Moore ............ Moorglo House and Trim Paint Q Pittsburgh ...... 6-610 Speedhide Acrylic Latex House Paint Q P&L .............Pro-Hide Plus Latex House Paint Q S-W ...............Weather Perfect Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish I' BASIC 1!'1ECHA NICAL REQuipmm NTs 15010-15 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. r? f 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MA'rrlx PRoa. #09-0260 2. Concrete Mason Units: Lusterless (flat) Acrylic Finish: 2 coats over filler coat wifrl total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 Tails, excluding filler coat. Frller.Corrt,,. olveut<Thinn4d Block Filler for Yorous Surfaces (FS 1 LT R1 Scott ..............130 Scot-Kole Acri-Vinyl Latex Block-fl * Devoe............ 52901 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Acrylic Latex Block Filler Z Glidden .......... Y-5317 Ultra-Hide Acrylic Latex Block Filler Q Moore ............ Moore's Waterproofing Masonry Paint Q S-W ............... Pro-Mar Block Filler .Fir.sr urtct Sec.oriil;Finrsh. C<lats cr?;l?c Enralsion (FS TT-1`'-19)- 21 Scott ..............420 100% Acrylic Supercoat Z Devoe ....... .,.,.15XX Wonder Shield Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint Q Glidden .......... Y3515 Spread Glide-on Q Moore ............ Moorgard Latex House Paint Z S-W ...............Weather Perfect Acrylic Latex Flat Exterior Finish 3. Zinc-Coated Metal: High Gloss Alk;d Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer rPri n Coattk n't a A,pik l l_: i P, 6 1)Z Scott ..............914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Z Devoe ............ 14100 Zinc Dust Primer and Finish Z Glidden .......... Y-5229 Glid-Guard AIL-Purpose Metal Primer Z Pittsburgh....-6-125 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer Z S-W ...............S-W Galvanized Iron Primer 4. Aluminum: Hi L Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer 64,; 72'Co t: Lti . m tVr In ItiTTP i . ? t Q Scott ............. .914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Z Devoe ........... . 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer Z Glidden ......... . Y-5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer Z Moore ........... . Iron-Clad Zinc Chromate Primer Z Pittsburgh ..... . 6-204 PPG Zinc Chromate Primer Z P&L ............ .. Noxide Zinc Chromate Primer Z S-W .............. .5-W Zinc Chromate Primer i BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-19 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT TONG CENTER MATRIX PROL 809-0260 ;First arir/ Secand: Frcr{r C"outs - IINgh Cluss A, l1 q0 Enamel (FS TT-E-45q, C'Iass A) 1 Q Scott ........... . 550 Pol have Alkyd Poly-urethan Gloss Enanle% Q Devoe ............ 70XX Mirrolac InteriorlExterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel Q Glidden.......... Y-4500-)nine - Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamels © Moore___....... Moore's Impervo High-Gloss Enamel Interior/Exterior Q Pittsburgh.. ... . 6-252 PPG Alkyd Gloss Enamel Q P&L............. Effecto Enamel Q S-W ............... S-W Metalistic II Enamel M. Interior Paint Schedule I. Concrete and Masonrv: (other than concrete masonry units) Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 Coats with total dry filth thickness not less than 3.5 mils. rFlzl 6altw 1'u i ry or lat Latex Buse Ya of (1? -TT P ?yl 27 Scott .............. 120 Scot-Kote Acri-Vinyl Latex Primer Ll Devoe ............ 33XX Wonder-Tones Latex Plat Wall Paint Q Glidden .......... Y-5019 Ultra-Hide PV.k Primer Seal Q Moore_ ......... Moore's Latex Quick-dry Prime Seal Q Pittsburgh ...... 6-70 Speedhide Latex Flat Wall Paint Q P&L ............. Pro-Hide Plus Latex Flat Q S-W............... S-W Wall and Wood Primer ? ,U-6,li ? s5i'i;', .d Trig l' 1" + ? LT t)9, C1as5 ij Q Scott ..............500 Scot-Kote Alkyd Enamel Undercoater Q Devoe ...... ...... 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Q Moore...... ...... Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody Z Pittsburgh ...... 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater E P&L_ ..... ......Pro-Hide Plus Latex Flat Q S-W ......... ......S-W Wall and Wood Primer 111.1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQuiRENIENTS 15010-20 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I '¦I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoa. #09-0260 Third Coat (dorliess I?aterio' senni irlp5s ? k. d Fn ?nael (1 ',? TT-E-S f14) d Scott ............. .540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel d Devoe .......... . .26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Q Glidden ......... . Y-4600 Line Spread Luster Semi-Gloss Enamel © Moore ........... . Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Q Pittsburgh ..... . 17-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel Q P&L ............ .Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Semi-Gloss Q S-W .... ........... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Glass Enamel 2. Concrete lllasonLT Units: Semi-Gloss Alkvd Enamel Finish: 2 Coats over filled surfac. with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat. Cr?r7t ?Sol?'eut:Thiittp'?d Bl,uet?'{''F?zll?Y {t;5`'1"`I-P-11)5). .1p1i1}• filler- ta<<Iate..to,ensur?e.eorunlelo,Ct1l1a Nr?thpores fiIled... Q Scott ..............130 Scot-Kote Acri-Vinyl Latex Primer Q Devoe ............ 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Flat Latex Block Filler Z Glidden .......... Y-5317 Line Ultra-Hide Acrylic Block Filler Q Moore ............ Moore's Waterproofing Masonry Paint Q S-W ...............S-W Pro-Mar Block Filler i w, ta:{°:+, rh, IL anleltL,ult rcoat?fi .fAb .?lTal",FSa.l. wa Q Scott ..............500 Scot-Kate Alkyd Enamel Undercoater Q Devoe ............ 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Q Glidden .......... Y-5019 - PVA Primer Q Moore ............ Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody Q 5-W ...............5-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Q Scott ..............540 Scot-Kate Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Q Devoe ............ 26YA Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Q Moore ............ Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Q S-,w ....... ........ S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-21 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC_ AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROJ.,409-0260 3. Gvnsum Drywall Svstems: Odorless Semi-Gloss 41k-yd Enamel Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 nails. Ftwst_'Coat X11 te[Cnr'Lat4 BASe?l?ttn 4t oat IFS T.T71' fiS?1} Q Scott ........ 120 Scot-note Acri-Vinyl Latex Printer Q Devoe ...... ......50901 Wonder-tones Latex Primer and Sealer © Glidden ........ ..Y-3416 - Spread Primer Sealer Z Moore. ........... Moore's Latex Quick-Drying Interior Latex Prirner Sealer © S-W ...............S-W Pro-Mar Latex Wall Primer S`EC?i?fit? and T/rrrif irna s?4dorTes Tnter?b Semr (*toss Alky >L, Q Scott .......... ....540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Q Devoe ........ ..... 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel 0 Glidden ...... .... Y-4600-Line - Sped Luster Semi-Gloss E Moore ........ .... Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Q Pittsburgh .. .... 27-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel Q P&L ......... ....Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Semi-Gloss Q S-W .......... . .... S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel 4. Plaster: Lusterless [Flat _Acrylic Finish: 2 Coats 0 Scott ..............410 100% Acrylic Supercoat Flat © Devoe ...... ...... 15XX Wonder-Shield Acrylic Latex Flat House Paint 11 Glidden.... ...... Y-3525 - Line Spread Glide-on © Pittsburgh ... ... 6-6 10 Speedhide Acrylic Latex House Paint Q P&L ....... ......Pro-Hide Plus Latex House Paint Q S-W ......... ......S-W Wall and Wood Primer BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-22 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 5. Ferrous Metal: Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 nails. i iP trrla ?lat? Red, Lead $ s'e Phrnt Frilxrr. coatis uat- ?¦ - reW'Yi gd 'item delA"'V'q4 -, Q Scott ..............914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Q Devoe ......... ...41821 Bar-ox Red Metal Primer © Glidden ...... ....Y-5532 - Glid-Guard Red Lead Metal Primer 0 Moore............ Iron-Clad Retardo Rust Inhibitive Paint J Q Pittsburgh ...... 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater 0 P&L .............Interior Trim Primer First, coat„ I xter><or;Et?t?ze?l ??lndel ?? }t, (F- T'X -k ?4 Q Scott ..............540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel. Q Devoe ...... ..... .8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Q Glidden .... ...... Y-4600 Series Spread Luster Semi-Gloss Enamel Z Moore ...... ...... Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody R1 Pittsburgh .. ....6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater © P&L ....... ......Interior Trim Primer 21 S-W ......... ......S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-gloss 5?i{jaICor?t'Qtos"u'0000 i;??4??A?ixtlxel(??S TT-k-SOy) Q Scott ..............540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Q Devoe ............ 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Q Glidden_ ........ Y-4600-Line - Sped Luster Semi-Gloss © Moore ............ Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Q Pittsburgh...... 7-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel Q P&L ..... ........ Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Semi-Gloss 0 S-W ...............S-1V Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel BASIC W CHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1501023 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST I2, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoj. #09-0260 6. Zinc-Coated Metal: Semi-Gloss Finish: 2 Coats over primer, with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. ..l? 1 T-P 6 i1-? `Prarrl? 'Crit? w/Ii?ua.,???wQ?tz Primer GutlIi, Z Scott ..............914 Industrial Finish Zinc Chromate Primer Z Devoe............ 14100 Zinc Dust Primer and Finish Q Glidden .......... Y-5229 Glid-Guard All-Purpose Metal Primer Z Moore ............ Iron-Clad Galvanized Metal Primer Z Pittsburgh ...... 6-215/6-216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Paint Zinc Dust Q S-W ...............S-W Galvanized Iron Primer Sear?rid Coal nt !? z a ?e1 Un urq! # (P,S T'xi i? 543): Q Scott ..............500 Scot-Kote Alkyd Enamel Undercoater Q Devoe ............ 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat 0 Glidden.......... Y-4600 Line Spread Luster Semi-Gloss Enamel Z Moore ............ Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody Q Pittsburgh ...... 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoat:er Q S-W ...............S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel Th rt r o[i p 646 e A?ii ??I1?y 1?Se?ipit?[rl???,Ln?ik?i?l ?S 1;1 -0 Z Scott .............. 540 Scot-Glo Alkyd Polyurethane Semi-Gloss Enamel Z Devoe ............ 26XX Velour Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel 0 Glidden .......... Y-4600 Line Spread Luster Serai-Gloss Enamel Rl Moore ............ Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel Z Pittsburgh ..... . 17-109 Wall-Hide Semi-Gloss Enamel Q S-W .............. .S-W Pro-Mar Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel ** END OF SECTION *** BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREWNTS 15010-24 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 1. SECTION 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Pipe, Duct, and Equipment Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors. B. Equipment Bases and Supports. C. Sleeves and Seals. D. Flashing and Sealing Equipment and Pipe Stacks. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15260 ....... Piping Insulation. C. Section 15410 ....... Plumbing Piping. D. Section 15415 ....... Gas Piping. E. Section 15450 ....... Plumbing Equipment. F. Section 15870 ....... Power Ventilators. G. Section 15875 ....... Power Roof Ventilators. H. Section 15890 ....... Ductwork. 1.03 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings on products and methods of pipe supports. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. B-Line Systems. B. Grinnell. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER _ MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 ' C. F and S. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 2 Inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring (copper plated for copper pipe, hot dipped galvanized coating on non-copper pipe). B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches and Cold Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: ' Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis (copper plated for copper pipe, hot dipped galvanized coating on non-copper pipe). C. Hangers.for Hot Pipe Sizes 6Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger (hot dipped galvanized coating.) D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought ' steel clamp; adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. Refer to drawings for special support details. ' G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp (at each floor). H. Floor Support for Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron ' adjustable pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. ' 1. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 7. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. K. Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel shield over insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support. L. Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping): , Pipe covering protective saddles. M. Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Hard block non- conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block thickness same as insulation thickness. N. Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead. , 0. Offset Pipe Clamp: Carbon steel, hot dipped galvanized finish (copper plated for copper pipe) for supporting vertical pipe away from wall. P. Refer to drawings for additional supports. SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 2.03 MANGER RODS A. Hanger Rods: Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded. Hanger rods shall be zinc plated steel. 2.04 INSERTS A. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods. 2.05 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 22 gage galvanized steel. ' B. Lead Flashing: 5 lb/sq.ft. sheet lead for waterproofing; one lb/sq.ft. sheet lead for soundproofing. C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. 2.06 SLEEvEs The following are the minimum acceptable requirements for this project. Refer to the plans for more stringent methods and requirements. 1 A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized steel, unless otherwise directed on the drawings with a more stringent requirement. B. Sleeves for Pipes through Non-fire Walls or Footings. Form with steel pipe or 18 gage galvanized steel, unless otherwise directed on the drawings with a more stringent requirement. C. Sleeves through outside walls shall be made with 18 gauge galvanized steel and fitted with chrome escutcheon covers at all finished surfaces. d Walls and Fl d Fi R i ti d , ve oors an es re s an D. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rate Fireproofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL Listed. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's UL approved methods for firesafing all types required for the project as coordinated with the methods of floor and wall construction. Refer to the plans for further requirements. i E. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. F. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel. G. Caulk: Silicone sealant of top quality. SUPPORTS AND ANcnoRS 15140-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRO.1. 909-0260 2.07 FABRICATION A. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. B. Design hangers without disengagement of supported pipe. C. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. Z.08 MATERIALIFwiw A. General Locations: Steel pipe hangers, miscellaneous steel supports, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., not specified to be plated or coated shall be hot dipped galvanized with a minimum of 1.50 oz/ft. on all sides and all field cuts shall be zinc coated. B. Located In or Around Chemical Storage Rooms: Pipe hangers, equipment supports, miscellaneous structure components, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., shall be non-metallic polyester resin, vinyl ester resin, fiberglass, glass reinforced polyurethane or 316 stainless steel. II PART 3 EXECUTION II 3. DI INSERTS A. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. B. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. C. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. SUPPORTS ANA ANCHORS 15140-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, x009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A_ Support horizontal piping as follows: Slzr (,Irrcl?rs) any?rN1HAISPACmr, , aa?GIiRon;DrjvitTFu 1/2 to 1-1/4 61-6" 3/8" 1-1/2 to 2 91-0" 3/8" 2-1/2 to 3 101-0" 1/211 4 to 6 101-0" 3/4" 8 to 12 14'-0" 7/8" 14 to 18 201-0" 1 PVC (All Sizes) 4'-0" 3/8" B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. C. Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum spacing between hangers. F. Support vertical piping at every floor and support from wall midway between ceiling and floor or at 12 feet maximum spacing, whichever is less. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor and at each hub. G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation., provide multiple or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. All auxiliary steel required for pipe supports shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. Where building structure is not usable for pipe supports, provide steel members, channels, angles, or "UNISTRUT" components for piping support. All auxiliary steel exposed to weather shall be galvanized. J. Provide all steel required for support of pipes other than steel shown on structural Engineer's drawings. K. Interior Pipe Guides, Expansion Loops, and Anchors: Provide pipe guides, expansion loops, and anchors on hot water heating pipes installed above the ceiling. Expansion loops shall be installed every 50 feet and supported from building structure with pipe guides on 10 feet spacing. Piping shall be anchored to the ansion control for directional ex cessar t as n t . p y ure e s ruc SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. 909-0260 3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide equipment bases and supports of concrete type under all mechanical equipment and as shown on drawings. B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct support of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. E. Refer to Section 15010, Paragraph 1.19, Foundations, Supports, Piers, Attachments, for additional requirements. 3.04 FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3. inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked one inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counterflash and seal. C. Provide acoustical lead flashing around ducts and pipes penetrating equipment rooms, installed in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions for sound control. 3.05 SLEEVES A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. B. Extend sleeves through floors one inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate. C. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk seal. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. D. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. E. Sleeves installed in exterior walls with exposed ends shall be non-corrosive type sleeves (i.e., stainless steel). * * * END OF SECTION * * * SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 15140-6 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 15170 MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Single Phase Electric Motors. B. Three Phase Electric Motors. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15870....... Power Ventilators. C. Section 15875 ....... Power Roof Ventilators. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AFBMA 9 -Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. B. AFBMA 11-Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings. C. ANSI/IEEE 112----Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. D. ANSUNEMA MG 1-Motors and Generators. E. ANSINNFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 OPERA TIONAND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide manufacturers standard as supplied with respective equipment. MOTORS 15170-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRO.I. 009-0260 2.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONA" REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 16480 for required electrical characteristics. B. Motors: Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment, and for temperature rise in accordance with ANSUNEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, Service Factor, and motor enclosure type. C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps, locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, Service Factor, Power Factor, efficiency. D. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame. 2.03 SINGLE PHASE POWER-SPLIT PHASE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current. C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque. D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service.Factor, prefabricated sleeve or ball bearings. E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.04 SINGLE PHASE POWER PERMANENT SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque. B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current. C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings. D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload protector. 2.05 SINGLE PHASE POWER-CAPACITOR STARTER MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current. C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. MOTORS 15170-2 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROs. #09-0260 D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors shall have two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve ball bearings. G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.06 THREE PHASE POWER-SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A. Starting Torque: Between one and one and one-half times full load torque. B. Starting Current: Six times full load current. C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pullout Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to ANSUNEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112, Test Method B. Load test motors to determine freedom from electrical or mechanical defects and compliance with performance data. G. Motor Frames: NEMA standard T-frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. H. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. 1. Sound Power Levels: To ANSI/NEMA MG 1. 1. Nominal Efficiency: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112. K. Motors for variable speed (PWM) application shall conform to NEMA Standard MGI-1993, Part 31.40.4.2 insulation integrity capable of withstanding 1600 maximum peak voltages with 0.1 microsecond rise from 10% to 90% of steady state voltage. MOTORS 15170-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATR[x PROD. #09-0260 L. Nominal Power Factor: Meet or exceed values in Schedules at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112. M. Motors with frame sizes 184T (5 HP) and larger shall be energy efficient type. N. All motors shall be energy efficient type according to the following schedule: 4"n 1?F yDIOf?, 4 R T f 7 r T' ' r?ETiAT?I?TCYa . 1-2 84.0 3-5 87.5 7.5 89.5 10 90.2 15 91.0 20-25 92.4 30 92.4 40-50 93.0 60 93.6 75-100 94.5 125-150 95.0 200 95.0 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 11 3.01 APP.CICAmN A. Motors drawing less than 250 Watts and intended for intermittent service may be germaine to equipment manufacturer and need not conform to these specifications. B. Motors shall be open drip-proof type, except where specifically noted otherwise. C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans shall be split phase type. ***END OF SECTION' MpTozts 15170-4 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AT LANG CENTER SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROs. 409-0260 PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Identification of Mechanical Products Installed Under Division 15. 1.02 REL<LTED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15260 ....... Piping Insulation. C. Section 15280 ....... Equipment Insulation. D. Section 15290 ....... Ductwork Insulation. E. Section 15410 ....... Plumbing Piping. F. Section 15415 ....... Gas Piping. G. Section 15450....... Plumbing Equipment. H. Section 15870....... Power Ventilators. I. Section 15875 ....... Power Roof Ventilators. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME A13.1-Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.04 SuBwTTALs A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1. B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. Refer to Section 15010, Paragraph 1.14. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1. MECHANICAL-IDENTIFICATION 15190-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX EROJ. #09-0260 11 PART 2 PRODUCTS 11 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Brady. B. Seton. C. MSI. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Color: Unless specified otherwise, conform with ANSFASME A13.1. B. Metal Tags: 18 gauge brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. Colors shall comply with ANSI A13.1. Size markers and letters as follows: 3/4" - 2n 1 x gi 3/411 21/211-611 2/4" x 13" 13/4" 8" - 10" 4" x 24" 2%11 Over 10" 4" x 32" 3%" Ductwork and Equipment All 11/1" D. Plastic Flagging Tape: 1-3/16" wide, bright orange. E. Plastic Equipment Markers: 2" x 4", minimum 1/8" thick, corrosive and chemical resistant, black with white letters. Minimum size letter shall be 1/4". Air handler shall include quantity and sizes of filters required for a complete filter change. Fasten with stainless steel hardware. F. Equipment Locator Tacks: 7/8" diameter color coded with push tack and writable surface. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATioN A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 ?J rI L iL AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROs. #09-0260 3,02 INSTALLATION A. Metal Tags: Install with heavy brass hook or chain. B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Install complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Equipment: Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic equipment markers. Small devices, such as in- line pumps, may be identified with metal tags. D. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic equipment tags. E. Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. F. Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Tags may be used on small diameter piping. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and "T", at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. G. Ductwork: Identify ductwork with plastic equipment markers. Identify as to air handling unit number and service (supply air, return air, exhaust, outside air, etc.). Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction. H. Equipment Located Above Ceiling (i.e., VAV boxes, fans, air handlers, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc.): Provide equipment locator tack, located on the ceiling directly below the equipment, to be spot marked and so mark is easily visible from the floor. Use a permanent marker and label each tag with the name of the equipment. Color code equipment by type as follows: Air Handlers/Fan Coil Units Light Blue Exhaust Fans Green VAV Boxes Yellow Duct Heaters Orange Fire Dampers Red Smoke Dampers Red 1. Ductwork Volume Dampers Above the Ceiling: Tie an orange tape flag, minimum 18" long, from each volume damper_ Let tape hang down vertically. MECHANICAL IAENTIFICATION 15190-3 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 3.03 VALVE CHART AND SCHEDULE A. Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield. Install at location as directed. ***END OF SECTION*** MECHANICAL IDENTIk ICATION 15190-4 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROr. #09-0260 SECTION 15242 VIBRATION ISOLATION PART I GENERAL 1 W I NCCUDED ORK 1.01 ' A. Vibration. Isolation. 1.02 RELATED WoRK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15450 ....... Plumbing Equipment. ' C. Section 15870....... Power Ventilators. ' 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE-Guide to Average Noise Criteria Curves. 1 1.04 QUALrTYAssURANCE ' A. Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at full load condition. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Indicate vibration isolator locations, with static and dynamic load on each, on shop drawings and described on product data. ' s installation instructions under provisions of Section 15010, C. Submit manufacturer General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. 1.061 CERTIFICATES A. Submit manufacturees certificate under provisions of General Conditions, and ' Supplementary General Conditions that isolators are properly installed and properly adjusted to meet or exceed specified requirements. 1 VIBRATION ]ISOLATION 15242-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AVGVST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Amber Booth. B. Mason Industries. ' C. Vibration Eliminator Co. D. AVNEC Incorporated. ' E. Kevflex. 2.02 VIBRATIONISOLATORS A. Amber Booth-Model numbers listed are included for identification. Refer to Paragraph 2.01 for additional manufacturers. B. Type BSR--A combination spring and rubber hanger consisting of a rectangular steel box, coil spring, spring retainers, and elastomeric mounting designed for ' approximately 1/2" deflection. C. Flanged. Type 2800-A flanged spherical rubber expansion joint constructed of molded neoprene, nylon cord reinforced, with integral steel floating flanges, suitable for pressure up to 225# (4 to 1 safety factor) and temperatures up to 2251F. Connectors shall have minimum movement capability of 1/2" compression, 3/8" extension 1/2" lateral and 15° angular. Where allowable movements will be exceeded or where operating pressures exceed the following, control rods shall be installed at each connector to limit elongation to 3/8". through 4" .................................200 psi 5" to 10" ....................................150 psi 12" to 14" ..................................100 psi 16" to 24" ....................................50 psi Control units shall be of the spring isolated design through 8" and neoprene isolated for 10" and larger to limit noise and vibration transmission through the control rods. D. Type SP-NRE-A pad-type mounting consisting of two layers of 3/8" thick ribbed or waffled Neoprene pads bonded to a 16 gage galvanized steel separator plate. Pads shall be sized for approximately 20 to 40 psi load and a deflection of 0.12" to 0.16". VIBRATION ISOLATION 15242-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AuGuST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 IL PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install vibration isolators and flexible connectors for the following motor driven equipment. 1. Power Ventilators---Type BSR. B. Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Adjust equipment level. C. Provide Spring Isolators on Piping Connected to Isolated Equipment as follows: Up to 4 inch diameter, first three points of support; 5 to 8 inch diameter, first four points of support; 10 inch diameter and over, first six points of support. Static deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment. ***END OF SECTION*** VIBRATION ISOLATION - 15242-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER ?. MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 ' THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 15242-4 VIBRATION ISOLATION 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUsT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 15260 PIPING INSULATION PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Piping Insulation. B. Jackets and Accessories. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15140 ....... Supports and Anchors. C. Section 15190 ....... Mechanical Identification. D. Section 15400 ....... Testing of Piping Systems. E. Section 15410 ....... Plumbing Piping. F. Section 15450 ....... Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C552-79-Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. B. ANSI/ASTM C195-Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement. C. ANSI/ASTM C547-Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. D. ASTM B209-Aluminum and Aluminum-alloy Sheet and Plate. E. ASTM C449--Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. F. ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723---Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. ASTM C1136-Vapor Retarders for thermal insulation. PIPING INSULATION 15260-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AT LoNc CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1.04 QUALITYAssURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three (3) years minimum experience. B. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, UL 723, and NFPA 255. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. Type A: 1. Impermeable, noncombustible, closed cellular glass insulation, conforming to ASTM C 552-79, "Specification for Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation." 2. Conductivity (k) equals approximately 0.29 (BTU-1N/HR, SF, degrees F) at 75 degrees F. 3. Joint sealants and coatings shall be as approved by the insulation manufacturer for the intended application and service temperature range. 4. Jacketing shall be approximately 125 mils thick, consisting of a bituminous resin reinforced with a woven, glass fabric, an integral aluminum foil layer, and a protective plastic film coating. 5. Approved Manufacturers and trade names: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corp. "Foamglass Super K" with Pittseal, Pittcote, and Pittwrap. b. Approved Equal. PIPING INSULATION 15260-2 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AucusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 409-0260 B. Type B: 1. Closed cell, flexible foamed plastic conforming to ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, "Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form." 2. Conductivity (k) equals approximately 0.27 (BTU-IN/HR, SF, Degree F) at 75 degrees F. 3. Approved Manufacturers and trade names: a. Armstrong "AP Armaflex" b. Rubetex Corp. "Rubetex" C. Type C: 1. Glass fiber, rigid molded sectional pipe covering conforming to ASTM C547, Class II, Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. 2. Conductivity (k) equals approximately 0.23 (BTU-IN/HR, SF, Degree F) at 75 degrees F. 3. Approved Manufacturers and Trade Names: a. Manville Corp. "Micro-Lok 650-AP-T." b. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. "One Piece 25 ASJISSL-II" C. Certain-Teed "500 Degree Snap-On." d. Knauf Fiberglass "KnaufPipe Insulation, 850°F." 2.02 JACKET A. Interior Applications: 1. Vapor Barrier (ASn Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with double self-sealing adhesive joints. 2. Vapor Barrier (ASn Jackets: Metalized polyester film, reinforcing scrim, flame-retardant adhesive, and bleached paper with SSL. Butt strip tape coated with high performance, pressure sensitive, flame retardant adhesive. B. Exterior Applications: (Exterior and other exposed areas such as equipment/ mechanical rooms) 1. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.016 inch thick; smooth finish with factory applied integral moisture barrier. PIPING INSULATION 15260-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 2. Aluminum Fitting Covers: Childers 2 or 4 piece ELL-JAGS elbow covers, .Gore ELL-JAGS elbow covers and 2-piece TEE-JAGS tee covers; ASTM B209; 0,024 inch thick; smooth finish. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.020 inch thick aluminum. B. Metal Jacket Bands: 1/2 inch wide; 0.020 inch thick aluminum. C. Insulation Bonding Adhesive (to metal) 1. Benjamin Foster 85-15. 2. Childers Chil-Stix CP-85. D. Insulating and Finishing Cement 1. Armco Corp., 2. Rockwool Corp. 3. Manville Corp. E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive 1. Benjamin Foster 82-07. 2. Childers Chil-Stix CP-85. F. Vapor Barrier Mastic 1. Benjamin Foster 30-35. 2. Childers CP-30 Low Odor (for indoor use). 3. Childers Chil-Pruf CP-22/23/24 (for outdoor use). G. Lagging Adhesive 1. Benjamin Foster 30-36. 2. Childers Chil-Rene CP-96. H. Glass Cloth Jacket 1. Benjamin Foster. 2. Childers Chit-Glas #10. PIPING INSULATION 15260-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER' MATRIX PROJ. 009-0260 I. PVC Fittings Covers 1. Certain-Teed "Snap Form." 2. Manville Corp. "Zeston." 3. Approved Equal. I PART 3 EXECUTION II 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after piping has been tested, cleaned, and approved, as required by Section 15400. B. All surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free of loose scale, rust, dirt, oil or water. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Insulation shall be installed in a smooth, clean, workmanlike manner. Joints shall be tight and finished smooth without fishmouths. B. Insulation shall fit tightly against the surface to which it is applied to prevent air circulation between the insulation and the pipe or equipment to which it is applied. C. Insulation applied to cold piping or equipment shall be completely vapor sealed, free of pin holes or other openings. D. Do not use wet insulation materials. E. All longitudinal joints on vertical pipe runs shall be staggered. F. Apply insulation so as to permit expansion or contraction of pipe lines without causing damage to insulation or surface finish. G. Do not apply mastic or adhesive until all previous application of mastic and adhesives have thoroughly dried. H. The adhesive used in connection with all covering work shall contain an approved vermin and rodent-proof ingredient. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PIPING INSULATION 15260-5 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, ING. AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AucusT 12, 2009 MATRIX PROs. #09-0260 3.04 TYPEA INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Interior 1. Butter joints of Foamglass insulation with Pittseal 444 or Childers CP-76. Apply insulation to pipe and fittings with all joints tightly fitted. Secure with stainless steel wire so that each length of insulation shall be secured with two wires. Insulation shall be applied with all joints fitted to eliminate voids. Voids shall be eliminated by refitting or replacing insulation. Do not fill voids with joint sealer. 2. Finish with metalized polyester/scrim/bleached white Kraft or approved foil/scrim/bleached white Kraft, all service jacket (ASI). Finish elbows and fittings with Pittcote 404 or Childers CP-30 Low Odor reinforced with white open weave membrane with maximum mesh opening of 10 x 10 per inch. B. Exterior and Mechanical Equipment(Storage Rooms 1. Apply insulation as noted above (paragraph 3.04 A.1) and apply vapor barrier with Pittcote 404 or Childers CP-30 Low Odor reinforced with white open weave membrane with maximum mesh opening of 10 x 10 per inch. Then apply a second coat of Pittcote 404 or Childers CP-30 Low Odor and finish with .016 inch thick aluminum jacket. Elbows and tees shall be finished with preformed 0.024 inch thick aluminum fitting covers. 3.05 TYPE B INSULATIONINSTALLATION A. Interior 1. Type B insulation shall be slipped on the pipe prior to connection, and the butt joints shall be sealed. Where the slip-on techniques is not possible, the insulation shall be carefully slit and applied to the pipe. 2. All joints shall be sealed with the Manufacturer's recommended adhesives. 3. Do not apply Type B insulation in multiple layers. 4. Type B insulation shall not be used in plenums nor fire wall penetrations. 5. This Contractor shall paint Type B insulation exterior to the building with two (2) coats of a vinyl lacquer paint recommended by the Insulation Manufacturer. B. Exterior and Mechanical Equipment/Storage Rooms 1. Type B insulation shall be installed as described for interior except the pipe ' and fitting shall be covered with .016 inch thick aluminum jacket. 2. Elbows and tees shall be finished with preformed 0.024 inch thick aluminum ' fitting covers. PIPING INSULATION ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15260-6 AGING W ELI. CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 3.06 TYPE C INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Interior 1. Tightly butt together sections of insulation on pipe runs sealing longitudinal seams of jacket with vapor barrier adhesive. Seal end joints with four inch (4") wide straps of vapor barrier tape. Seal off ends of insulation with vapor seal mastic at valves, fittings, and flanges. No further finish required. B. Exterior and Mechanical Equipment/Storage Rooms ' 1. PVC fitting jackets shall be used when they are available for the particular application. 3.07 HANGERS A. Continue insulation through pipe hangers. Provide either rigid insulation inserts or sheet metal inserts at all outside pipe hangers. Provide rigid insulation inserts for piping operating below 60 degrees F and sheet metal inserts for piping above 60 degrees F. B. Rigid insulation or wood inserts between the pipe and pipe hanger shall be of a thickness equal to the adjoining insulation and shall be provided with vapor barrier where required. Insulation insert shall not be less than the following lengths: 1 1/2" to 2-1/2" pipe size .................................. 10" Long 3" to 6" pipe size ...........................................12" Long 8" to 10 pipe size ........................................... 16" Long 12" and Over ................................................. 22" Long ' C. Inserts for cold piping shall have a vapor barrier facing of the same material as the adjacent pipe insulation. Seal inserts into insulation with vapor seal mastic. D. Where insulation is a load bearing material of sufficient strength to support the ' weight of the piping, pipe shields one-third the circumference of the insulation and of a length not less than three times the diameter of the insulation (maximum length ! 24") shall be provided. An all service jacket shall be applied between shields and insulation. Follow' insulation manufacturer's recommendations for use of pipe insulation in conjunction with outside installed hangers. E. Where insulation is not of sufficient strength to support the weight of the piping, a saddle, or section of calcium silicate insulation such as "Kaylo" shall be provided. Vapor barrier and finish shall be applied as required to match adjoining insulation. In addition, shields shall be furnished as specified above. ' IP1PING INSULATION 15260-7 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 3.08 PIPE SLEEVES A. Pipe insulation and vapor barrier shall be continuous through sleeves in walls and floors. B. Type B insulation shall not be used in sleeves through fire walls or fire rated (2 hour) floor systems. Use Type A or Type C through the sleeve instead and vapor seal the joint between the two (2) insulations. C. Provide 26 gauge galvanized steel or 0.020 inch aluminum jacket over insulation on pipe passing through sleeves where sealant is required. D. Where penetrating interior walls, extend the metal jacket 2 inches out either side of the wall and secure each end with a metal band compressing the insulation slightly. E. Where penetrating floors, extend the metal jacket 2 inches below the floor and 5 inches above the floor. Secure with metal bands. 3.09 INSULATION SCHEDULE ABOVEGPADEPIPING) A. ***END OF SECTION' PIPING INSULATION 15260-5 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 15280 EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Equipment Insulation. B. Covering. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15190....... Mechanical Identification. C. Section 15260....... Piping Insulation. D. Section 15400 ....... Testing of Piping Systems. E. Section 15440 ....... Plumbing Fixtures. F. Section 15450 ....... Plumbing Equipment. G. Section 15936 ....... Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM C552--Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation. B. Elastomeric Foam Insulation. C. ASTM E84-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. NFPA 255-Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. UL 723---Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 QUALLTYAssuRANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in insulation application with three years minimum experience. i B. Insulation and Covering: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84. UL 723. ' EQu>PMEN I INSU[aT10N 15280-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AuGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for equipment scheduled. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of these specifications. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required. by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Pittsburg Corning (Type A). B. Rubatex (Type B). C. Armstrong Armaflex (Type B). 2.02 INSULATION A. Type A: Cellular glass; ANSI/ASTM C552; 'k' value of 0.29 at 75. degrees 1~; 8.5 lb/cu ft density. ASTM 84 flamespread. B. Type B: Elastomeric foam insulation; 'k' value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F. ASTM 84 flamespread: less than 25; smoke developed: less than 50. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bedding Compounds: Non-shrinking, permanently flexible, compatible with insulation. B. Vapor Barrier Coating: Non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin, compatible with insulation. C. Insulating Cement: ANSI/ASTM C195, hydraulic setting mineral wool. D. Wire Mesh: Corrosive-resistant metal; hexagonal pattern. EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRix PRod. 009-0260 A PART 3 EXECUTION u 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 15260, Paragraph 3.04, for additional instructions. B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment. D. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with stainless steel wires or bands. E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement. F. Cover insulation with metal mesh and finish with heavy coat of insulating cement. G. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such. H. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage. Refer to detail on drawings for pump insulation requirements. I. Flat or irregular equipment insulation shall be cut to fit the shape and contour of the equipment. All voids between equipment surface and insulation shall be packed with light density fiberglass. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. All Equipment Operating Below Ambient Dew Point-Type'A'-2" thick. B. Air Inlets and Outlets-Refer to Section 15290. C. Handicap Accessible Lavatory and Sink Traps, Cold and Hot Water Supply Piping-Type'B'-3/4" thick, unless otherwise noted on plumbing drawings. ***END OF SECTION*** EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK f EQUIPMENT INSULATION 15280-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 909-0260 SECTION 15290 DUCTWORK INSULATION PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Ductwork Insulation. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15190....... Mechanical Identification. C. Section 15890....... Ductwork. D. Section 15910 ....... Ductwork Accessories. E. Section 15936....... Air Outlets and Inlets. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSUASTM C553--Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. B. ANSUASTM C612--Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 1.04 QUAuTI'ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with two years minimum experience. B. Materials: UL listed; flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with NFPA 90A. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Include product description, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. DucrwORK INSULATION 15290-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 909-0260 D. Submit product description and manufacturer's instructions for all adhesives, mechanical fasteners, joint tape, etc., prior to starting work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Knauf Fiberglass. B. Owens Corning Fiberglass. C. Mansville. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C553; commercial grade; 6.0 installed `R' value (minimum) at 75 degrees F, 0.002 foil scrim facing for air conditioning ducts (nominally 2" thick). B. Type B: Glass fiber; UL Class 1; `k' value of 0.24 at 75 degrees F 3 lb/cu ft minimum density; black pigmented, fire resistant coated air side for maximum 6,000 ft/min air velocity. Insulation shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglas Aeroflex Duct Liner. C. Adhesives: Waterproof fire-retardant type and conform to adhesive and sealant council standards; ASC-A7001A-1971. D. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E$4, NFPA 255, UL 723. E. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, self- adhesive pad. Fasteners shall conform to mechanical fastener standard MF-1-1971 (available from SMACNA). F. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh. 0. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install materials after ductwork has been tested and approved. B. Clean surfaces for adhesives. DUCTWORK INSULATION ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15290-2 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12,2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 C. Extend shafts for handles on equipment/devices which are insulated so that insulation is applied at the intended thickness (not compressed). Insulation shall be installed in a manner to eliminate sweating on handles and shafts. Handles shall remain accessible, visible, and operable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Type A 1. Apply insulation tightly and smoothly to duct. 2. Secure insulation on the bottom of ducts and plenums and on the sides of plenums and other places where the insulation will sag. 3. Install all materials in accordance with Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Butt all insulation joints firmly. 5. Install duct wrap to obtain specified `R' value using a maximum of 25% compression. 6. All penetrations and damage to the facing shall be repaired with tape and mastic prior to system start-up. 7. Provide 3" wide (minimum) pressure sensitive tape applied with moving pressure using an appropriate sealing tool at all seams and joints. Apply vapor seal mastic over all taped seams and joints. 8. Longitudinal seam of the vapor retarder shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 inches. A 2 inch tab shall be provided for the circumferential seam. 9. Closure systems shall have a 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating per UL 723. 10. For rectangular ducts over 18 inches wide, the duct wrap shall be secured to the bottom side of the duct with mechanical fasteners spaced on 18 inch centers to reduce sag. Fasteners shall be installed in a manner to avoid over compressing the insulation with the retaining washer. It. Impale insulation on the bottom of ducts and plenums and on the sides of plenums and other places where the insulation will sag. 12. Cut off protruding pin after clips are secured and seal with aluminum backed pressure sensitive tape. 13. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. 14. Seal all ductwork joints, punctures, and fittings with a mastic type sealant containing a vapor barrier. DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 15. Cover all breaks, joints, punctures, and voids with a vapor seal mastic and cover with a vapor barrier material identical to vapor barrier on the insulation. 16. Bevel insulation around nameplates, access plates, and doors. 17. Insulation shall be continuous through walls and floors except at fire dampers. B. Type B 1. All portions of duct designated to receive duct liner shall be completely covered with Duct Liner. Transverse joints shall be neatly butted and there shall be no interruptions or gaps. Board shall be cut to assure tight, overlapped corner joints. Top pieces shall be supported by the side pieces. 2. The black coated surface of Duct Liner shall face the air stream. 3. Duct Liner shall be adhered to the sheet metal duct with 100% coverage of adhesive, all exposed leading edges and transverse joints shall also be coated with adhesive. In addition to the above, mechanical fasteners shall be used to secure the Duct Liner to the duct. All edges of duct liner shall be coated with adhesive during the fabrication of ductwork and all exposed edges shall be coated with adhesive prior to field installation of sections. 4. For horizontal runs when the duct width exceeds 12" or the duct height exceeds 16", the Duct Liner Board shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners starting within 3" of upstream transverse edges of the Liner and spaced at a maximum of 15" o.c. and 15" from longitudinal joints. On vertical runs, the fasteners shall be used when either dimension exceeds 12". C. Install all materials in accordance with Manufacturer's installation. D. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Supply and Return Ductwork-Type A (nominally 2" thick). B. Flex Connections at Air Handling Units and Other Transitions-Type A (nominally 2" thick). C. All Equipment and Ductwork Operating Below Ambient Dew Point---Type A (nominally 2" thick). D. Supply and Return Ductwork-First forty (40) feet, unless noted otherwise on the drawings, before and after air handler-Type B (1" thick) sandwiched inside double wall duct. Refer to Section 15890, Ductwork, for more information. E. Relief, Exhaust, and Air Transfer Ductwork Type B (1" thick). DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST I2, 2009 I AT LANG CENTER _ MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 F. Tops of All Supply Diffusers---Type A (nominally 2" thick). ***END OF SECTION*** DucmoRK INWRATIpN 15290-5 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 11 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROM. #09-0260 ' 1 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I F1 1 1 DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290-6 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 15310 1 5 1 1 1 1 U fl FIRE PROTECTION PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Pipe, Fittings, Valves, and Connections for Fire Protection Systems. B. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall review the information contained herein and shall prepare complete fire system installation shop drawings coinciding with hydraulic calculations sealed by a Florida Registered Professional Engineer experienced in the field. The design and details shall conform to NFPA 13 and NFPA 14, and all local codes and regulations. Pursuant to FS 471.033(2) and Rules 61G15-30 and 32, the Fire Protection Contractor shall be required to provide detailed fire protection construction drawings to be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered Fire Protection System Design Engineer acting as the Delegated Engineer to the Prime Engineer as a part of this scope. These documents shall be considered the Fire Protection System Engineering Documents. Copies of signed and sealed construction drawings shall be submitted to this office for review and comment. When approval is achieved, the Contractor shall submit the necessary number of copies of signed and sealed drawings to authorities having jurisdiction for review and approval. C. The intent for the design and installation for the automatic fire sprinkler is to be fully sprinklered within the spaces noted on the drawings. Any exceptions to this (i.e., elevator equipment room, etc.) shall be approved in writing (prior to submission of permit drawings) by the authority having jurisdiction. D. This Contractor's shop drawings shall be coordinated with ceilings, air devices, lighting, structural members, etc. The Contractor shall align the sprinkler heads within the center of ceiling tiles. 1.02 RELATED WoRx A. Section 15140 ....... Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15190 ....... Mechanical Identification. C. Division 16 ........... Electrical. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME B16.1-Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and $00. FIRE PROTF.CT[ON PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROS. 009-0260 B. ANSI/ASME B16.5----Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. C. ANSI/ASME B16.25-Buttwelding Ends. D. ANSI/ASME Section 9--Welding and Brazing Qualifications. E. ANSI/ASTM A135-Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. F. ANSI/AWWA C110-Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings. G. ANSI/AWWA C151-Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. H. ASTM A120-Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, for Ordinary Uses. I. NFPA 13-Installation of Sprinkler Systems. J. NFPA 14-Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. K. Chapter 4A-47, Florida Administrative Code Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code. C. Employ certified welders in accordance with ANSI/ASME Section 9, AWS D10.9. D. Valves: Bear UL label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor and wall penetration seals. C. Indicate valve data and ratings. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place, under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. FIRE PROTECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 1 1 1 D 11 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX 1PROJ. #09-0260 2. 01 PIPE PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Steel Pipe: (Above grade) 2 inch and smaller schedule 40, ASTM A-53 or ASTM A135 black steel pipe or; ASTM A795 galvanized steel pipe. B. Steel Pipe: (Above grade) 2-1/2 inch and larger schedule 10, ASTM A-53 or ASTM A135 black steel pipe or; ASTM A795 galvanized steel pipe --- rolled grooves, dimensionally compatible with listed grooved fittings. Cut groove and threaded thin wall pipes are not accepted. C. Butt Welded Steel Pipe: (Above grade) ASTM A53; ASTM A120; ANSI/ASTM A135; black; weight; schedule 40. D. Ductile Iron Pipe: (Below grade) ANSI/AWWA C151, ductile iron. Cement lined and Bituminous seal coated. E. PVC AWWA C900 Class 200 ASTM D 1784, FM and UL Listed: (Below grade). Install in accordance with AWWA C605 and manufacturers instructions. Provide EBAA Iron Inc. Series 2500 PVC pipe restraints with Mega-Bond coating at each Tee, Bend, Dead End, and other fittings. 2.02 PIPE FIT77NGS A. Grooved Joint Fittings: Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65- 45-12, with bolts/nuts, meeting the physical and chemical requirements of ASTM A449 and physical requirements of ASTM A-183. Provide with listed combination of physical dimensions compatible with rolled grooves, factory painted finish and listed gaskets, etc. B. Threaded Fittings: (Above grade) 1-1/2" and smaller, Cast Iron Class 125 or Class 250, ANSUASME 1316.4 or Malleable Iron Class 150 or Class 300 ANSUASME B16.4. Provide galvanized finished fittings where required or as necessary for the application. C. Steel Fittings: (Above grade) 2" and larger, ANSI/ASME B16.25, butt weld ends. ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel. ANSI/ASME B16.5, steel flanges and fittings. ANSUASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded. D. Ductile Iron Fittings: (Below grade) 4" and Larger, ANSI/AWWA C110. E. PVC C900 Class 200 ASTM D 1784, FM and UL Listed: Integral bell gasketed joint tested to ASTM D 3139, Gasket shall meet requirements of ASTM F 477. Provide thrust restraints and concrete thrust blocks at each fitting in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide EBAA Iron Inc. Series 2500 PVC pipe restraints with Mega- Bond coating at each Tee, Bend, Dead End, and other fittings. Provide Series 2100 Megaflange at transition to ductile iron fitting. FIRE PROTECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER - - MATRIX PROD. 009-0260 2.03 JOINT MATERIALS A. Threaded Joint Compound. , 2.04 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping. B. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip-on, Weldneck flanges. C. Grooved Joint Couplings: Cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive synthetic rubber, grade to suit the ' intended service, conforming to ASTM D-2000. Mechanical coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon steel track head conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength 110,000 psi. Provide with listed combination of physical dimensions compatible with rolled grooves, factory painted finish and listed components. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS--VALVES A. Stockham. B. Crane. C. Jenkins. ' D. Victaulic. 2.06 GAT E VALVES A. 2-1/2" and larger, U.L. listed, flanged faced, O.S.&Y., cast iron body and bonnet, bronze fitted 175 WWP class ASTM a 126 with tamper switch, Stockham G634, Jenkins 825A, Crane 467. B. 2" and smaller, U.L. listed, threaded bronze, rising stem 175 WWP class, ASTM B62 with tamper switch, Stockham B133 or equal by Crane, Jenkins, or Walworth. 2.07 CHECK VALVES A. 2-1/2" and larger, U.L. listed, cast iron body, bronze disc and seat, ASTM A126 Class B, 175 WWP class, Stockham No. G939. , B. 2" and smaller, U.L. listed, threaded bronze, swing type, 175 WWP class, Jenkins No. 92A automatic ball drip where required. FIRE PR OTEC'rION PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 1 iJ 1 L' AGING WELL CFdMR AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 2.48 NoN-,SLAM CHEcK VALVES A. 3" and larger, U.L. listed, shall be non-slam type for any position installation. Bodies shall be cast iron flanged with bronze trim including surface of both seat and disc and guide bushing. 250 pound service. ASTM A126 B. Combination pump valve IOD or equal by Clow. B. 2" and smaller shall be non-slam type with pipe thread connections. Bronze body stainless steel trim. 300 pound service. Combination pump valve no. 36 or equal by Clow. 2.09 HOSE VALVES A. U.L. Listed, FM approved 300 pound, straight pattern, female to male connection, 2- 1/2" cast brass with cap and chain. Threads to match local fire department. 2.10 GLOBE VALVES A. U.L. Listed, FM approved bronze body and disc, screwed bonnet, 200 psi, WOG, threaded ends. 2.11 1NDIcA7iNG BUTTERFLY VALVES A. U.L. Listed, FM approved where applicable, 175 pound, cast iron body, duct iron nickel plated disc, EPDM seat, wafer or lug body, tamper switch, remote indicator. 2.12 HANGERS AND SUPPORT'S A. Piping shall be supported from the building structure in accordance with NFPA 13. Hangers shall allow for expansion and contraction of pipe lines. Hangers shall be in accordance with NFPA 13. B. Support hangers from approved concrete inserts where poured concrete slabs are available. Power actuated fasteners and devices are not permitted. "Redhead" self- drilling concrete expansion anchors are acceptable. C. Where piping is required to be hung from other than poured concrete slabs, such as ' pre-cast or metal decking, submit proposed method of support to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. D. Piping may be hung from structural steel by means of beam attachments. All auxiliary steel required for support shall be provided by this trade. E. Vertical Piping: Provide riser clamps at each level. Use short end riser where space is limited. Install riser clamp below the floor, suspend from two hanger rods and inserts where escutcheons plates are installed as required by these specifications. FIRE PROTECTION PmnvG SYSTEMS 15310-5 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX kROJ. 409-0260 2.13 ESCUTCIIEONS A. Provide escutcheons on all exposed piping passing through walls, floors, partitions, and ceilings, except provide close fitting metal escutcheons on both sides of piping (whether exposed or not) through required fire rated walls, floors, partitions, and ceilings. B. Escutcheons shall be held in place by internal spring tension or set screws. C. Application: finished spaces - anodized aluminum, chrome plated brass unfinished spaces (excluding mechanical equipment rooms) - Plain brass, cast iron or aluminum. 2.14 SLEEvEs k Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors, and roofs. '? :.-_ 3}? ? •, all .j i ? _ ?1V ?p1Ne0T ' 7 v. , 1 918 Gauge, galvanized steel. 2 Standard weight galvanized steel pipe 3 Standard weight galvanized steel pipe with a continuously welded stop of 1/4 inch steel plate extending from outside of sleeve a minimum of 2 inches all around - similar to F&S Manufacturing Corp. Figure 204. 4 Cast iron pipe sleeve with center flange similar to James B. Clow and Sons No. F-1430 and F-1435. 5 Standard weight galvanized steel pipe with flashing clamp device welded to pipe sleeve or watertight sleeves- Similar to Josam 1870-A2, 1870, 1840-C with Oakum and lead caulking as required. 6 Metal deck and wall sleeves. 2.15 SLEEVE SIZES A. Floors and required fire rated partitions - 1/2" maximum clearance between outside of pipe and inside of sleeve. B. Partitions not fire rated - 1-1/2" maximum clearance between outside of pipe and inside of sleeve. FIRE PROTECTION PrenNC SYSTEMS 15310-6 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. #09-0260 2.16 SLEEVE LENGTHS L.UC ?3t R r ?£ EVF rJ I G :3 [ Floors Equal to depth of floor construction including finish. In waterproof floor construction, sleeves to extend minimum of 2" above finished floor level. Roofs Equal to depth of roof construction including insulation. Walls and Partitions Equal to depth of construction and terminated flush with finished surfaces. 1 2.17 SLEEVE CAULKING AND PACKING ? -1 11 11-1 ?J t I_ ?11?1`I ll???? a 44 ; ?? ' tr T lT F1 ? . y N y? t = I tu.. A Space between pipe and sleeve packed with Oakum or Hemp and caulked watertight with lead. B Space between pipe or pipe covering and sleeve shall be caulked with an incombustible, permanently plastic, waterproof non--staining compound leaving a finished smooth appearance or pack with incombustible asbestos cotton or fibrous glass to within 1/2" or both wall faces and provide caulking compound as per above. C Exception - Caulking or packing may be omitted when sleeve is located within walled-in pipe shafts, unless required by local building code or other authority having jurisdiction. 2.18 SLEEVEAPPLICATIoN Fin PROTECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-7 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. ACING W ELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 2.19 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Flush wall type: 6" by 2-1/2" by 2-1/2" brass chrome plated with individual drop clamper valves, plugs, and chains. Marked "standpipe, AUTO-SPKR". Threads to match local fire department Potter-Roemer No. 5752 or equal by Elkhart. B. Free standing Siamese type: 6" by 2-1/2" by 2-1/2" brass chrome plated with individual drop clamper valves, plugs, and chains. Marked "Standpipe, AUTO- SPKR". Threads to match local fire department Potter-Roemer No. 5763 or equal by Elkhart. C. Free standing Strom type: 5" storz by 6" NPT as manufactured by potter-roemer model 5795-05 fire department inlet connection (FDC) mounted to 6" schedule 40 steel pipe extending 24" above grade and buried a minimum of 30" below grade. Transition to civil pipe at bottom of elbow. Provide connections with joint restraints. Paint all metal pipe fire engine red. Provide a polished brass round identification plate at the back of the stroz connection displaying the words "Fire Department Connection" on the face. Coordinate exact location of FDC with civil drawings. 2.20 TAMPER SWITCHES A. Standpipe risers, sprinkler branch lines and all control valves shall be provided with Tamper indicators monitored at the central control station. Grinnell fire department protection systems model F640 or equivalent. 2.21 FiowSwircros A. Provide liquid flow switch at base of each standpipe riser and at each control valve station. Signal from switch shall be wired to fire alarm panel. Wiring and panel shall be provided by electrical contractor. Flow switch shall be of paddle type, single pole double throw with adjustment for sensitivity to flow. Wetted parts shall be of brass and monel. Switch mounting fittings shall be of the same size of pipe where it is installed. Switch shall have vapor proof construction and shall be rated for a maximum pressure of 175 psi and a maximum temperature of 225 F. Grinnell Model F620, Viking Model BH-1001, or approved equal. 2.22 SPRINKLER HEADS A. All heads shall be of the proper temperature rating for the location in which they are installed. Refer to plans for sprinkler head schedule. B. Provide stock of extra sprinkler heads and sprinkler wrenches in cabinet in accordance with NFPA 13. C. Provide approved sprinkler head wire guards for all sprinkler heads located T-0" or less above floor. FIRE PItOTECCION PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-8 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 #09-0260 MATRIX PROD . AT LONG CENTER D. Finish of sprinkler heads shall be as selected and approved by the Architect. Submit samples. NFPA A ' s per apart. E. Baffles shall be installed whenever sprinklers are less than 6 13. F. Sprinklers shall be upright, pendent or sidewall as indicated and conform to NFPA 13. ' G. Sprinkler heads installed in unfinished area shall be bronze (or, special type - specify). H. Sprinkler heads installed in finished areas shall be chrome plated with a satin finish. I. All types and variations shall have the following features: 1. Approved heat responsive automatic type listed by UL or other nationally recognized testing laboratory. ' 2. 160 degrees fusible element, style as specified for the particular type. Provide higher temperature for heads located in danger zone as defined in NFPA Number 13 and FM 2-8. 160 th l ess an 3. Capable of remaining closed and leak-proof at temperatures degrees Fahrenheit against 100 psig pressure. ' c4Ti0N 2.23 IDENTl A. Valves - attach 3" square anodized aluminum or brass tag stamped with designated ' number 1 inch high filled with red enamel to each valve. Securely fasten tag to valve spindle or handle with a brass chain. B. Schedules and charts - Furnish to Owner's representative three (3) complete framed plastic laminated valve tag schedules. Schedule shall indicate tag number, valve location by floor and nearest column number, valve size and fire are controlled. i ll h C. emat ca y Finish three framed plastic laminated diagrammatic charts showing sc the complete sprinkler system with major control valves and numbers. D. Apply color coded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe bands identifying pipe service and direction of flow. E. On exposed piping apply bands on 40' centers of straight runs, at valve locations, at points where piping enters and leaves a partition wall, floor, or ceiling. F. On concealed piping installed above removable ceiling construction, apply bands in manner described for exposed piping. F ME P[rOTEC ON P[PIDVG SYSTEMS 15310-9 0 1LNGIN'EE,RING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 409-0260 G. On concealed piping installed above non-removable ceiling construction, or in pipe shafts, apply bands at valve or other devices that are made accessible by means of access doors or panels. Provide access panels as required. H. Apply bands at exit and entrance points to each piece of equipment. 1. Band widths shall be eight (8) inches for pipes up to ten (10) inches in diameter and sixteen (16) inches wide for larger diameter piping. Letter heights stating service shall be preprinted on bank, three-quarter (3/4) inches high for eight (8) inch bands and one and one-quarter (1-1/4) inches high for sixteen (16) inch bands. J. Nameplate Data - The installer shall properly identify the hydraulically designed automatic sprinkler systems by a permanently attached sign indicating the location, number of sprinklers in the hydraulically designed section and the basis of design (discharge density over designed are of discharge, including gallons per minute and residual pressure demand at base of riser). Such signs shall be placed at the controlling alarm valve for the system containing the hydraulically designed layout. 2.24 INSPECTOR'S TEST CONNECTION A. Test connections shall be provided for each sprinkler system equipped with an alarm device and shall be located at the hydraulically most remote part of each system. B. Test connection shall be piped to a location where the discharge will be readily visible and where water may be discharged without damage. 2.25 MAINDRAINS A. Drains shall be piped to discharge at safe points outside the building. Auxiliary drains shall be provided as required by NFPA 13. B. Provide a 10" riser alarm bell, water motor type or electric gong, U.L. listed, FM approved, surface mounted. Contractor shall provide electric circuit and wiring etc. for complete operation of electric gong if chosen. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide a complete, approved fire sprinkler protection system as specified. B. Submit 1/8 scale shop drawings of fire sprinkler system layout for coordination. C. Contractor shall coordinate with other drawings and sections of the specifications for additional information and coordinate his work with all other trades and notify Architect of any conflicts prior to installation. , FIRE PROTECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-10 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 1 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 D. Contractor shall furnish a new flow test at any time during the construction project if requested in writing by the Engineer of record. 3.02 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals on all equipment. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. All materials and equipment utilized in the system shall be U.L. listed and bear the U.L. label. B. All threaded connections shall be in accordance with local fire department requirements. C. The automatic fire sprinkler information on the plans and included in this specification are diagrammatic in nature. Therefore, they do not relieve this Contractor from providing all work and equipment necessary to complete the installation according to the requirements. The Contractor shall provide all sprinkler heads, piping, valves, method of draining lines, alarm valves, and all other details and work as required by the Owner's underwriters, NFPA, and the local authority having jurisdiction. D. The sprinkler heads in all areas are to be installed in the center of ceiling tiles and on a true axis line in both directions with a maximum deviation from the axis line of 1/2 inch plus or minus. At the completion of the installation, if any heads are found to exceed the above mentioned tolerance, same shall be removed and reinstalled by this Contractor. E. All screwed pipe throughout the job shall be reamed smooth before being installed. Pipe shall not be split, bent, flattened, nor otherwise injured, either before or during installation. F. Provide all sprinkler heads and work in strict accordance with approved shop drawings. The Architect reserves the right to reject any and all work not in accordance with the approved shop drawings. 1 Q. Contractor shall be responsible for his own cutting and patching. No hole shall be cut in structural members without the written consent from the Architect. 3.04 TEsTs A. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of installation, the fire sprinkler systems, including underground supply connection, shall be flushed and tested in accordance with NFPA. B. Concealed work shall remain uncovered until required tests have been completed in presence of the Architect/Engineer. FIRE PROTEmoN PIPWG SYSTEMS 15310-11 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT YANG CENTER MATRIX PR07. #09-0260 C. Install underground piping in accordance with NFPA 13. Provide thrust blocks, pipe clamps and tie rods, locked mechanical or push-on mechanical joints utilizing set screw retainer glands as required at all changes in direction, tees, plugs, caps, and bends. ***END OF SECTION*** FIRE PROTECTION PIPING SYSTEMS 15310-12 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRod- 0109-0260 SECTION 15400 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Domestic Water Piping. B. Sanitary Piping. C. Gas Piping. D. Sprinkler Pipe. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15260 ....... Piping Insulation. C. Section 15410....... Plumbing Piping. D. Section 15415 ....... Gas Piping. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment required for testing procedures. B. Insulation shall not be applied until pressure testing has been completed. Joints of any type shall not be painted or varnished prior to testing. C. Lines containing check valves shall have the test pressure source located upstream of the valves, or the valve discs shall be removed until after the testing. Control valves shall be set in the open position, unless directed otherwise. D. Pipe testing shall be performed after flushing, except for buried lines. TESTING OF PIPING SY3TEM3 15400-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER - - MATRIX PRO.I. #09-0260 E. Any equipment that has a pressure rating not as high as the testing pressure shall be valved off during the test. ' F. The tabulated results of all tests shall be submitted to the A/E. G. Potable hot and cold water lines shall be hydrostatically tested at 125 psig for a period of twenty-four (24) hours. H. Soil waste, vent, and roof drain water lines shall be filled with water to the top of the system. Testing period shall be for a period of twenty-four (24) hours. Pipes or joints which leak shall be taken apart, remade, and re-tested. 1. Piping Systems: Test all pipe lines installed with a water pressure test of 1-1/2 times ' its operating pressure, but not less than 100 psi for a period of 4 hours, during which time the pressure shall remain constant without pumping. If leaks or defects develop, new tests shall be made and repeated until all defects are remedied. Pipes or joints which leak shall be taken apart and remade. Caulking will not be permitted. Pipes which will be concealed may be tested separately before the distribution system is installed in order that these lines may be covered and furred in ' and thus, not delay the work of other trades. 7. Gas piping and gas piping conduit shall be tested in accordance with the current requirements of the standard gas code and/or applicable or local codes for the pressures involved. ***END OF SECTION' 1 1 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS 15400-2 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 32, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PRO]. 409-0260 SECTION 15410 PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings. B. Valves. C. Sanitary Sewer Piping System. D. Domestic Water Piping System. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15140 ....... Supports and Anchors. C. Section 15190....... Mechanical Identification. D. Section 15260 ....... Piping Insulation. E. Section 15400 ....... Testing of Piping Systems. F. Section 15430....... Plumbing Specialties. G. Section 15440 ....... Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME 1316.29-Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings-DWV. B. ANSI/ASTM B32---Solder Metal. C. ASTM A74----Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. D. ASTM A-518---Acid Resistant Close Grained Cast Iron. E. ASTM B88-Seamless Copper Water Tube. F. ASTM C564--Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. PLUMBING PIPING 15410-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 CA. AWWA C601-Standard Methods for the Examination of Water. and Waste Water. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect at products site under provisions of General Conditions and supplementary General Conditions. B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. IF- PART 2 PRODUCTS 201 SANITARYSEWER AND RAINWATER PIPING, BURIED A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.02 SANITARYSEWER AND RAINWATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A888. 1. Fittings: Cast Iron. 2. Joints: No hub pipe and fittings with ASTM C1540, heavy-duty, double banded couplings. B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B306, DWV. 1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3, cast bronze, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 2. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 50B. PLUMBING PIPING 15410-2 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 ' AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 2.03 COLD WATER PIPING, BELOW GRADE (OUTSIDE BUILDING ' A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B52, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.04 COLD WATER PIPING, BELOW FLOOR (INSIDE BUILDING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, continuous tubing. B. Fittings 5 feet outside of building shall be ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints ANSI/ASTM B32 solder, Grade 95TA. C. Fittings are not permitted below floor. Fittings at equipment shall be compression type. 2.05 COLD WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.23, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA. 2.06 INSULATION A. Refer to Section 15260. 2.07 VALVES-GENERAL A. Materials for all valves shall be bronze. 208 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-VALVES A. Crane. B. Grinnell. C. Nibco. D. Milwaukee. 2.09 GATE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, non-rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. Valves 2-1/2" through 4" shall be iron body bronze mounted with ends to suit pipe and shall be of non-rising stem type. Valves larger than 4" shall be iron body bronze mounted flanged ends with outside screw and yoke with rising stem. Working pressure for bronze valves shall be 150 pounds and for iron valves shall be 125 pounds per square inch. PLUMBING PIPING - 15410-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 09-0260 2.10 GLOBE VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder ends, with backseating capacity. Valves 2.1/2" and larger shall be iron body bronze mounted with ends to suit pipe, yoke bonnet, and disc guide. Working pressure for bronze valves shall be 150 psi and iron valves 125 psi. 2.11 BALL VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. 2.12 SWING CHECK VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze 45 degree swing disc, solder ends. Valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body brass mounted and with ends to suit pipe. Working pressure for check valves shall be 125 pounds. 2.13 WATER PRESSUREREDUCING VALVES A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric reinforced diaphragm, strainer, and single union. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space. D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. PLUMBING PEPING 15410-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of access doors with General Contractor. H. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points. 1. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 3 ft of cover, or as existing piping connections require. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09900. L. Copper piping installed below grade shall be wrapped with '/a" Armaflex pipe insulation. Seal all edges and seams to prevent moisture intrusion. M. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. N. Excavate in accordance with sections on Excavation and Backfill. 0. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. P. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Q. Pipe cold water to both hand mixing valves of sinks and lavatories when only cold water is designated for connection unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters to pipe. D. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. 3.04 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali or acid. PLUMBING PIPING 15410-5 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT YANG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 909-0260 C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601. ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING PIPING 15410-6 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRix PRoa. 009-0260 SECTION 15415 GAS PIPING 11 PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCL UDED A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings. B. Valves. C. Retrofit Existing Gas Distribution Piping to remain. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15140....... Supports and Anchors. C. Section 15190 ....... Mechanical Identification. D. Section 15400 ....... Testing of Piping Systems. E. Section 15450....... Plumbing Equipment. 1.03 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valves. 1.04 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. ' B. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. ' 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and protect at products site under provisions of General Conditions ' and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. ' GAS PIPING 15415-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRO.I. N09-0260 C. The piping shall be protected at all times from dirt and moisture. During storage on the job site or construction, the Subcontractor shall keep pipe ends plugged or capped to prevent dirt or moisture entering the pipe. 11 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Above ground-1/2" through 4": Schedule 40 black seamless steel ASTM A120 or A53. B. Underground-1/2" through 4": Standard weight welded ASTM A53. C. Fittings--1-1/2" and Smaller: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed. 2" and Larger: Standard weight steel welded. D. Unions--1-1/2" and Smaller: 150 pound, malleable iron, screwed, composition seat. 11 E. Flanges--2" and larger: 150 pound, flat face, weld neck, option 125, cast iron, screwed flat face. 1 F. Shut-off Valves---3/4" and Smaller: Screwed, UL listed, AGA approved, Milwaukee No. BB-1-100. V through 6": Lubricated plug valve, flanged, 150 pound SWP, 200 pound WOG, all iron (semi-steel), wrench operated, homestead figure 602. ' G. Automatic Gas Shut-off Valves: Provide normally closed, manual reset solenoid valves with open-shut indicator, auxiliary switches and terminal block, suitable for gas service and exterior weatherproof applications. Coordinate location of valves with other trades. Provide power circuiting and control circuiting to fire alarm system and/or kitchen hood (whichever applies). Valves shall be as manufactured by Maxon Series SMM, ASCO Redhat Series 8015/8025 or approved equal. Coordinate power source and required voltage with Electrical Contractor and Fire Alarm System Contractor prior to ordering valves. 2.02 GAs PRESSURE REGULATons A. Provide gas pressure regulators as required and shown on the plans to maintain the required food service equipment pressure and flow, despite inlet pressure fluctuation. B. Regulator size shall provide maximum flow required at the highest outlet pressure needed (take into consideration incoming line losses). 1 C. Regulator spring shall be chosen so desired outlet pressure is centered within its range. Regulator inlet pressure cannot be exceeded at outlet. Provide a spare spring in the next higher pressure range to avoid start-up inconvenience if system pressure drops exceed those anticipated. GAS PIPING 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15415-2 AGING WELL CENTER AUGusr 12, 2009 ' AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 D. Orifice size shall be the smallest compatible with required capacity. E. Mounting position may affect regulator performance. See manufacturer's specific regulator data for any limitations. F. Install gas pressure regulators per the manufacturer's installation recommendations and guidelines. G. Gas pressure regulators shall be as manufactured by Maxon or approved equal. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Piping Joints: All pipe shall be reamed to full pipe diameter before joining. Screwed joints shall be made with standard pipe thread and an approved compound applied to the male thread only. Valves and specialties shall have screwed joints. 3.02 INSTALLATrON ' A. Installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 54 and Florida Building Code-Fuel Gas. ' B. Exposed or readily accessible piping shall be graded at not less than 1/4" in 15 feet to secure drainage. C. Install accessible 6" long drip pockets at the bottoms of all vertical risers and such other points as required. Pockets shall be made of a full size pipe tee with one leg capped. ' D. Install branch shut-off cocks ahead of all appliances, burners, etc., see plans for size of lines and cocks. ' E. Provide shut-off valves where noted on plans, and as required for complete regulation or control of all systems and at each piece of equipment. ' F. Underground piping shall be coated with coal tar enamel and wrapped with pressure sensitive tape equal to tapecoat CT. ' G. Gas pipe shall be tested for tightness. Refer to Section 15400, Pressure Testing of Piping Systems. GAS PIPING 15415-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRo.I. M-0260 H. All pipe shall be supported from the building structure in a neat and workmanlike manner and wherever possible, parallel runs of horizontal piping shall be grouped together on trapeze type hangers. Vertical risers shall be supported at each floor line with steel pipe clamps. The use of wire or perforated metal to support pipes will not be permitted. Hanging pipes from other pipes will not be permitted. Spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed 8 feet for pipes up to 1-1/4" and 10 feet on all other piping. I. All gas piping below floor shall be welded steel and shall be sleeved and vented as ' required by the Florida Building Code--Fuel Gas unless otherwise noted on the drawings. J. Assemble all fixtures and equipment shipped loose which this Contractor is required to make final connections to, whether furnished by this Contractor or by others (i.e., science cabinet gas fixtures, etc.). K. Provide regulators on each gas service branch pipe termination at appliance or equipment as necessary for proper operation of appliance or equipment. Coordinate requirements with shop drawings and gas service. Refer to equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Provide independent gas piping from each pressure regulator relief vent to exterior of building. 1 ***END OF SECTION*** 1 1 Gas PIPING ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15415-4 I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 15430 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART I. GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Floor Drains. B. Cleanouts. C. Backflow Preventers. D. Dielectric Fittings. E. Hose Bibbs/Wall Hydrants. F. Thermometers. G. _ Shock Absorbers. H. Vent Flashing. 1. Trap Primers. J. Mixing Valves. K. Escutcheons. L. Water Pressure Reducing Valves. M. T&P Relief Valves. N. Washing Machine Drain Fittings. 0. Area Drains. P. Hub Drains. Q. Roof Drains. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15140 ....... Supports and Anchors. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 C. Section 15400 ....... Testing of Piping Systems. D. Section 15410 ....... Plumbing Piping. E. Section 15440 ....... Plumbing Fixtures. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASSE 1011--Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. B. ANSI/ASSE 1019-Wall Hydrants. C. ANSI A 112.21.1-Floor Drains. D. ANSI A112.26.1-Water Hammer Arresters. E. PDI WH-201--Water Hammer Arresters. 1.04 QUALITYAssC/RANCE A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer throughout, or as noted. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under Section 15010 General Conditions and supplementary General Conditions. B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 THERMOMETERS A. Provide thermometers with needle type shut-off valves. They shall be installed so that they can be clearly read from the floor. B. Industrial stem thermometers shall have a scale not less than 9" long and shall be red-reading mercury type with white background and black etched graduations and numerals. C. Thermometers shall be suitable for the service intended and the range shall be selected to span from approximately 10 degrees below through 10 degrees above the operating range of the fluid. D. Thermometers shall have a guaranteed accuracy of within 1% of the range scale and shall be provided with 1 degree graduations. Thermometers shall be provided with brass separable socket wells. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-2 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 E. Provide thermometer wells and necessary fittings where specified or indicated. Wells installed in insulated piping shall be provided with lagging extensions of appropriate length to accommodate insulation. Where wells are provided without thermometers or thermostats, a plug and chain shall be provided. The insertion length of wells shall be compatible with the pipe diameter in which they are installed. Wells shall be provided with graphite mixture. F. Thermometers shall be as manufactured by Weksler, Marsh Instruments, or Ametek. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-BACKFLOW PREVENTERS (BFPR) A. Hersey Products, Inc. B. Watts Regulator Co. 1 C. Zurn Industries, Inc. 2.03 BACKFLGW PREVENTERS (BFPR) A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze and plastic internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve which opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks. 2.04 ESCUTCHEONS A. Chrome plated or stainless steel with set screws for holding securely in place. 2.05 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Metal parts of union or flange shall be installed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. EPCO Dielectric pipe fittings or equivalent. 2.06 VENT FLASHING A. 16 ounce copper or 4 pound lead flashing and counter flashing. 2.07 T&P RELIEF VALVES A. Valve shall have bronze body, non-mechanical seat-to-disc alignment and shall have a stainless steel thermostat. B. Valve shall contain an emergency back-up fusible plug. C. The valves shall be sized on the AGA temperature steam rating. PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Valves shall have bronze body, stainless steel integral strainer, renewable stainless i steel seat, high temperature diaphragm and 160# gauge and tapping. B. Valves shall be provided with built-in thermal expansion by-pass. , 2.09 OTHER A. Refer to the Plumbing Fixture Schedule on the drawings for further information. 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate forming of roof and floor construction to receive drains to required invert elevations. 3.02 INSTALLATIONAND APPLICATION . I A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended performance. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. D. Install water hammer arresters complete with isolation valve. The water hammer arresters and isolation valve shall be installed in a location accessible through the ceiling. Provide access doors as necessary. Coordinate location of access doors with Architect/Engineer and other trades. Access door shall be sized to allow removal and replacement of concealed device or equipment. E. Locate trap primer under lavatory on CW supply and/or flush valve as per manufacturer's recommendations. F. Use escutcheons on pipes passing through walls, floors, and ceilings of finished areas. G. Seal all openings in sleeves for piping penetrations with UL listed caulk. Refer to I detail on drawings. ***END OF SECTION*** 15430-4 ' PLUMBING SPECIALTIES ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT KONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Floor Sinks. B. Water Closets. C. Lavatories. D. Service Sink. E. Sinks. F. Fixture Trim. G. Urinals. H. Toilet Seats. I. Shower Units. X.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15140 ....... Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15410....... Plumbing Piping. C. Section 15430....... Plumbing Specialties. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI At 12.18.1--Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings. B. ANSI A112.19.2 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. C. ANSI A112.19.5-Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals. 1.04 QUA,LITYASSURANCE A. Fixtures: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout, except as indicated otherwise. PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440-1 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 909-0260 B. Trim: By same manufacturer for each product specified throughout, or as stated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Include fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. 1.06 OPERA TIONANDMAINTENANCEDATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data. B. Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERA. A. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings for further information. IF- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and installation. B. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Provide a cast brass trap at each fixture with removable cleanout for servicing and cleaning. B. Provide chrome plated stops with rigid supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. All stops shall have renewable seats and disks. C. Install components level and plumb. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts. PLUMBING FIXTURE$ 15440-2 © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST I2, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PR0.1. #09-0260 E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with Silicone sealant as to match fixture. F. Install all handicapped fixtures per ANSI A117.1-1986. G. Assemble all fixtures and equipment shipped loose which this Contractor is required to make final connections to, whether furnished by him or by others (i.e., science cabinet water faucets, trim, or tailpiece, etc.). H. Provide a premanufactured drain insulating cover on all sinks and lavatories designated as a handicap fixture. Refer to plumbing drawings and the Architect's drawings for designation. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. B. At completion clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. C. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. 3.04 FIXTUREROUGH-INSCHEDULE A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with table of minimum sizes for particular fixtures shown with fixture schedule. (Refer to drawings.) ***END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 15454 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Electric Water Coolers. B. Water Heaters. C. Backflow Preventers (required on water heaters). D. Circulating Pumps. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15140 ....... Supports and Anchors. B. Section 15170 ....... Motors. C. Section 15242....... Vibration Isolation. D. Section 15260 ....... Piping Insulation. E. Section 15400 ....... Testing of Piping Systems. F. Section 15410 ....... Plumbing Piping. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70--National Electrical Code. B. ARI 1010-Drinking Fountains and Remote Chilling Package. C. UL 174-Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters. 1.04 QUALITyASSURANCE A. Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number, and rating/capacity identified. B. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance with recommendations and requirements of the following organizations: 1. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). PLUMBING EQUD'MENT 15450.1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 3. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA). 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). 1.05 REGULATORYREQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 70 and UL 174 requirements for water heaters. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1. B. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. C. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction. 1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1. B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. C. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's limited warranty under provisions of Division 1. B. Warranty: Include coverage of domestic water heaters. C. Warranty: Include coverage of electric water cooler compressor for five (5) years. PLUMBrNG EQUIPMENT 15450-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Schedule on drawings for further information. I PART 3 EXECUTION 11 3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION A. Install water heater and chiller in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to NFPA and UL requirements. S. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system. * * * END OF SECTION*** PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15450-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 1 1 [7 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 I I PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 15450-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 ' AT KONG CENTER MATRIX PRoa. #09-0260 SECTION 15853 PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT (AAON) PART1 GENERAL t 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes rooftop heating and cooling units. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for type and style of roof curbs and equipment supports. 1 1.03 Susmums A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each model indicated, including rated capacities of selected model clearly indicated; dimensions; required clearances; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; accessories; and installation and startup instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. C. Commissioning Reports: Indicate results of startup and testing commissioning requirements. Submit copies of checklists. D. Maintenance Data: Maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. PACKAGED DX ROOFTOr UNrr 15853-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRo,I. #09-0260 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90. 1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The rooftop unit(s) shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995 and ANSI Standard 221.47 2. The rooftop unit(s) shall be safety certified by an accredited testing laboratory and the nameplate shall carry the label of the certification agency. 3. Unit and components shall be designed, manufactured, and independently analyzed, rated, and certified to meet with the seismic compliance standards of the International Building Code, 2003 edition, Section 1621. If requested unit shall be provided with Certificate of Compliance from an independent certifying Professional Engineer clearly indicating that the unit and components meet seismic design requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building. C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and moving to final location. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with roof construction. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7 Sections. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: A written one (1) year parts and labor warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed. --15853-2 PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. M-0260 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents. 1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. MANUFACTURERS: Subject to strict compliance with the requirements of this specification, provide products by one of the following: 1. Rooftop Units: a. AAON, Inc. B. OTHER SUBSTITUTES-Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum. 2.02 Roomp UNns (RTUS) A. Description: 1. Self-Contained - Factory assembled and tested; designed for roof or slab installation; and consisting of compressors, condenser, evaporator coil, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, electric heater, filters, and dampers. B. Construction: 1. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired and shipped in one section. 2. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application with a fully weatherproof cabinet. 3. Cabinet shall be constructed entirely of G90 galvanized steel with the exterior constructed of 20 gauge or heavier material. 4. Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. Unit exterior shall be "Gray" in color. PACKAGED DX ROoFmp UNIT 15853-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 5. The unit roof shall be sloped or cross-broken to assure drainage. 6. Unit specific color coded wiring diagrams shall match the unit color coded wiring and will be provided in both point-to-point and ladder form. 7. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently affixed inside the control compartment. 8. Access to filters, blower, heating section, and other items needing periodic checking or maintenance shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn handles. Door fastening screws are not acceptable. 9. Access doors shall have full-length stainless steel hinges and full perimeter gasketing. 10. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2" in height around the opening through the base pan. 11. Air side service access doors shall have rain break overhangs. 12. The interior air side of the cabinet on 2-15 ton models shall be entirely insulated on all exterior panels with 1" thick, 1 1/2 lb. density fiberglass insulation. 13. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting and rigging, service areas and caution areas. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. Options to be included: a. Unit shall be furnished with double wall insulation liners b. Unit shall be furnished with 304 stainless steel drain pans. C. Supply Fan: 1. Blower shall be entirely self-contained on a slide deck for service and removal from the cabinet. 2. All belt drive blowers shall have backward inclined blades. 3. All direct drive blowers shall have forward curved blades. 4. Adjustable V-belt drive shall be provided with a minimum rating of 140% of the motor nameplate brake horsepower when the adjustable pulley is at the minimum RPM. 5. Blowers, drives and motors shall be dynamically balanced. 6. Motors shall be standard (premium) efficiency. Motors shall have ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service and external lubrication connections. PACKAGED DX Roomp UNrr 15853-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER - - - MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 D. Outside Air Options: 1. Unit shall be 0-50% outside air with an adjustable, motor operated outside air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2" w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of outdoor air damper during periods of unit shut down or power failure. Includes a return air connection. a. Damper shall be furnished with a 2-position actuator. E. Condenser Options: 1. Air-Cooled Condenser Section: a. The condensing section shall be equipped with vertical discharge axial flow direct drive fans. Direct drive fans shall be directly connected to and supported by the motor shaft. b. The condenser coils shall be sloped at least 30° to protect the coils from damage. C. Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. d. Condenser coil fin design shall be sine wave rippled. r e. Condenser coils to be sized for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub- cooling. Option to be included: (1) Coil shall have a flexible epoxy polymer a-coat uniformly applied to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation and a uniform dry film thickness from 0.8 to 1.2 rail on all surface areas including fin edges. Superior hardness characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363-92A and a cross-hatch adhesion of 413-513 per ASTM B3359-93. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in/lb per ASTM D2794-93. Humidity and water immersion resistance shall be up to a minimum 1000 and 250 hours respectively (ASTM D2247-92 and ASTM D870-92). Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing to no less than 5000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90.Coated coils shall receive a spray-applied, UV-resistant polyurethane topcoat to prevent UV degradation of a-coat. PACKAGED DX RowroP UNIT 15853-5 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 F. Filters: G 1. 2 to 5, 8, and 10 ton model sizes shall have 2" thick fiberglass throwaway filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 25% and a MERV rating of 4. 2. All other model sizes shall have 2" thick fiberglass pleated filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and a MERV rating of 7. Evaporator Coils: 1. Evaporator coil shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. 2. Evaporator coil fin design shall be sine wave rippled. 3. Evaporator coil shall have galvanized steel end casings. 4. Evaporator coil shall have equalizing type vertical tube headers. 5. Evaporator coil shall be furnished with a thermostatic expansion valve. 6. Evaporator coil shall be furnished with a double sloped drain pan for the positive drainage of condensate. Options to be'included: a. Evaporator coil shall have 304 stainless steel end casings. b. Coil shall have a flexible epoxy polymer a-coat uniformly applied to all coil surface areas without material bridging between fins. Coating process shall ensure complete coil encapsulation and a uniform dry film thickness from 0.8 to 1.2 mil on all surface areas including fin edges. Superior hardness characteristics of 2H per ASTM D3363-92A and a cross-hatch adhesion of 4B-5B per ASTM B3359-93. Impact resistance shall be up to 160 in/lb per ASTM D2794-93. Humidity and water immersion resistance shall be up to a minimum 1000 and 250 hours respectively (ASTM D2247-92 and ASTM D870-92). Corrosion durability shall be confirmed through testing to no less than 5000 hours salt spray per ASTM B117-90.Coated coils shall receive a spray- applied, UV-resistant polyurethane topcoat to prevent UV degradation of a-coat. H. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressors shall be scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and mounted on the compressor manufacturer's recommended rubber vibration isolators. 2. Compressors shall carry a 5 year non pro-rated warranty. PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT 15853-6 @ ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 3. Each compressor shall be individually stage for capacity control. All units over 7 tons shall be multiple stage and shall have a minimum of 2 stages of capacity control. 4. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of the unit without affecting air flow when the door to the compartment is open. 5. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to avoid any transmission of noise from the compressor into the building area. 6. Each refrigerant circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. 7. Each refrigerant circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant controls. 8. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides. 9. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers. 10. Unit shall be fully factory charged with R-22 (R-410A) refrigerant. Options to be included: a. Unit shall dehumidify using a hot gas reheat coil, modulating hot gas reheat control valves piped to the lead refrigerant system, and an electronic controller. A factory-wired, field installed, supply air temperature sensor and a field-installed space humidity sensor shall be provided to control the amount of reheat. The supply air temperature setpoint shall be adjusted on the electronic controller within the controls compartment. b. Unit shall be equipped with a 5 minute anti-short cycle delay timer for each stage. C. Unit shall be equipped with 20 second between stage delay timers for each stage. d. Unit shall be equipped with low ambient control to allow operation down to 0°F. e. Each compressor shall be equipped with suction and discharge service/isolation valves. f. Unit shall contain a Digital Scroll CompressorTM. Compressor shall be capable of capacity modulation from 10-100%. PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT 15853-7 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGus-r 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 1. Electric Heat Section: 1. Unit shall include an electric heating section complete with fuses, a high temperature limit switch, and capacities as shown on the plans. a. Unit shall include stages of electric heat capacity as shown on the drawings. J. Controls: 1. Constant Volume Unit Controller a. The unit shall include a factory installed microprocessor based unit controller which controls the operation of the unit including the compressor(s), condenser fan motor(s), supply fan motor, heater, economizer, return air bypass, and modulating hot gas reheat. b. Factory mounted and wired is an outside air temperature sensor, Factory wired for field installation is a supply air temperature sensor. Furnished with the unit for field installation is a space air temperature sensor with temperature setpoint reset and unoccupied override. 2. Remote Programmable Thermostat Honeywell T7350M-1008 a. Overview: The Contractor shall furnish, install, and place in operating condition an HVAC control system described herein. All units shall be located in accordance with the plans. b. Type of System: System Requirements: (1) Control up to three heating and three cooling stages for gas heat, electric heat, heat pump or compressor cooling. (2) Permit 365-day programming with schedule copy. (3) Provide 365-day clock with automatic daylight savings changeover and up to 10 holidays. (4) Provide 48-hour clock backup. (5) Provide two occupied and two unoccupied periods per day. _ (6) Offer automatic heat/cool changeover with 2°F (1 °C) minimum deadband. (7) Provide override capability for a 1 to 8 hour configurable period, with 3-hour default. PACKAGED DX RooFrop UNrr 15853-8 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 1 AT LONG CENTER _ MATRIX PROD. 009-0260 (8) Include a comfort adjust feature to modify setpoints for the override duration. (9) Provide configurable Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (P + I + D) temperature control. °C O (10) Display room temperature in F or . (11) Provide three levels of keypad lockout - none, overrides only, and complete. (12) Provide occupancy input for Standby setpoint (optional). (13) Provide Temporary Not Occupied Override, 1-99 days. (14) Provide discharge high and low limits. (15) Provide outdoor ambient lockout. (16) Provide keypad method for saving and restoring both user and factory default settings. (17) Provide five methods for dehumidification (minimum ON time, reheat, reset temp setpoint, hot gas bypass and simple dehumidification. (18) Provide 2 modulating 4-20 Ma (direct or reverse action) outputs for modulating heat and/or cooling. (19) Provide separate configurable recovery ramps for heating and cooling. ' (20) Provide sequential start after power failure. (21) Provide separate configurable cycle rates for heating and cooling response. (22) Provide ability to calibrate temperature sensor. System Components: (1) Seven day programmable thermostat with subbase. (2) Discharge air sensor. (3) Wall mount temperature and integral humidity sensors. (4) Outdoor air sensor. C. Codes and Standards: The system shall comply with applicable provisions of ASHRAE 90-75. PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT 15853-9 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRO7. 909-0260 d. Wiring: All wiring shall meet National Electrical Codes and local electrical codes. e. Testing Guarantee Service: (1) Prior to installation, the contractor shall provide copies of submittals. (2) The Contractor is responsible for assuring that conduit and wire quantity, size, and type are suitable for the equipment supplied. (3) Upon completion, the Contractor shall conduct a total system test for the Owner and Engineer. (4) All components, parts, and assemblies supplied by the manufacturer shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for 12 months. (5) Warranty service shall be performed by the contractor. 3. Sequence of Operations The heating and cooling setpoints shall be individually adjustable for both the occupied, unoccupied, and standby periods. The thermostat shall have a minimum deadband of 2°F (1°C) (no mechanical heating or cooling shall operate within this deadband). Space temperature deviation above the cooling setpoint or below the heating setpoint shall generate a demand signal to control the system as follows: a. Heating: The thermostat shall control the heating output based on the demand signal communicated from the thermostat program, taking into account both space temperature deviation (proportional gain), the duration of that temperature deviation (integral gain), and the rate of change of the deviation (derivative gain). The thermostat shall energize heating equipment when space temperature falls below heating setpoint. b. Cooling: The thermostat shall control the cooling output based on the demand signal communicated from the thermostat program, taking into account both space temperature deviation (proportional gain), the duration of that temperature deviation (integral gain), and the rate of change of the deviation (derivative gain). The thermostat shall energize cooling equipment when space temperature exceeds cooling setpoint. C. Dehumidification: The thermostat shall provide five methods for dehumidification: (1) Minimum On - Increasing the compressor minimum on time. PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT 15853-10 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 ' AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 (2) Reset - lower the cooling setpoint. ' (3) Reheat - cooling and simultaneous reheat. (4) Auxiliary output - to external dehumidifier. (5) Hot gas bypass - auxiliary output operates depending on humidity level and number of active cooling stages. d. Heating Setback and Cooling Setup: Initiation of heating setback or cooling setup for each of 7 or 365 days shall be provided by a programmed time schedule manually entered into the thermostat. When all or a portion of a manually programmed schedule is unavailable, the thermostat shall control to the default program. e. Setpoint Recovery from Not Occupied to Occupied: The thermostat shall incorporate a ramping feature that gradually changes the space setpoints. During recovery operation, the setpoint changes at a rate in degrees per hour depending on the outdoor air temperature. If there is no outdoor air temperature sensor available, the minimum ramp rate is used. A PDA can be used to individually adjust ramp rates for heating and cooling. f. Fan Operation: Fan operation shall be selectable as follows: (1) On: Fan operates continuously in occupied mode, and during standby modes, and during a call for heat or cool. (2) Auto: Fan is energized with calls for heating and cooling. g. Minimum Stage Operation Time: (1) Minimum On: Heat -1 minute; Cool - 3 minutes. (2) Minimum Off: Cool & Heat Pump - 1 minute. h. Power Interruption: (1) On loss of power, the thermostat shall maintain programmed times and temperatures for 10 years. (2) Clock and day information shall be retained for a minimum of 48 hours. i. Overrides: (1) The Temporary Occupied Override can be used when the thermostat is in Not Occupied or Standby mode. It shall switch to the Occupied mode for an installer-configured number of hours. The default shall be three hours. PACKAGED DX RoorroP UNIT 15853-11 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 1 (2) The Temporary Not Occupied Override shall fix the schedule to operate in Not Occupied mode for a number of days (between 1 ' and 99) without changing programming saved in memory. (3) Pressing "Run Schedule" shall cancel the overrides and return to the program. 4. General a. The Honeywell T7350M 1008 outputs a modulating 4-20 mA signal. By placing a 250 ohm resistor in line with the cooling output to the unit, the signal is translated into the required 1-5 Volt signal needed to control the variable capacity compressor. b. This thermostat can control up to four stages of electric heat. To control the staged electric heat, AAON shall factory install timed sequencers to turn on the additional stages of heat after an adjustable period of time. C. This thermostat has an internal humidity sensor for use in controlling the AAON units with reheat. When humidity in the space rises, a contact in the thermostat will switch a relay in the AAON unit causing the compressor to be controlled by suction temperature instead of the temperature provided by the thermostat. To control the leaving air temperature during dehumidification, AAON unit shall be furnished with a WattMaster reheat module and a suction line monitor will be used to control the compressor capacity to maintain a low suction temperature and maximize dehumidification. K. Smoke Detector: A terminal block shall be provided to allow a field installed smoke detector to shutdown the unit operation. L. Power: I 1. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired internal disconnect. 2. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors in the unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is more than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal. 3. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired 115 volt, 12 amp , ground fault service receptacle powered by a 1.5 KVA transformer. PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT 15853-12 ®ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG. CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 2.03 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Curbs are to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasketing shall be furnished within the control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting of the rooftop unit. 1. Unit shall be mounted on a factory furnished acoustical style solid bottom roof curb, fully lined with 1" of neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation and with a wood nailer strip. * * * END OF SECTION*** PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNrr 15853-13 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 MATRIX PROs. x!09-0260 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PACKAGED DX ROOFTOP UNIT 15853-14 @ ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC.. AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER. AuGusT 12, 2009 MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 15870 POWER VENTILATORS PARTI GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. In-line Cabinet Fans (direct and belt driven). B. Sidewall Exhaust Fans. C. In-line Square Design Fans. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15170....... Motors. C. Section 15242....... Vibration Isolation. D. Section 15890....... Ductwork. E. Section 15910 ....... Ductwork Accessories. X.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99-Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210-Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.Purposes. C. AMCA 300--Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301--Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. E. SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 QUALI7YASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300. C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. POWER VENTILATORS 15870-1 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010 and ' General Conditions. B. Provide product data ceiling and cabinet fans. C. Provide fan marked schedules with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. BASIS OF DESIGN-Greenheck. B. PRE-APPROVED SUBSTITUTES (Approved to Bid) 1. Cook. C. OTHER SUBSTITUTES-Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum. 2.02 IN-LINE CABINET FANS BELT DRIVEN MODEL BCF) A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: Statically and dynamically balanced forward curve wheels, belt driven, with galvanized steel housing lined with 1/2 inch acoustic insulation, resilient mounted drip-proof motor, service access panel for removal. of motor/fan, UL approved and with the AMCA label affixed. B. Provide units with rectangular duct mounting collars, vibration isolation, disconnect switch, and gravity backdraft damper. C. Provide with pulley sized for 150% of driven horsepower, keyed to shaft, adjustable for final balancing. POWER VENTILATORS 15870-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. LJ 1 1 C ?I 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PRoJ. #09-0260 2.03 IN LINE CABINET FANS (DIRECTDRIVENMODEL CSP) A. Duct mounted fans shall be of the centrifugal, direct drive type. The .fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include prepunched mounting brackets. The housing interior shall be lined with 1/2" acoustical insulation. The outlet duct collar shall include an aluminum backdraft damper and shall be adaptable for horizontal or vertical discharge. The access for wiring shall be external. The motor disconnect shall be internal and of the plug in type. The motor shall be mounted on vibration isolators. The fan wheel(s) shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type, constructed of galvanized steel and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seals for sound and air performance and shall be UL Listed and CSA approved. 2.04 IN-LINE SQUARE DESIGN FAN (MODEL BSO A. Duct mounted supply, exhaust, or return fans shall be of the centrifugal belt drive in- line type. The fan housing shall be of the square design, constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include square duct mounting collards. B. Fan construction shall include two removable access panels located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel. The access panels must be of sufficient size to permit easy access to all interior components. C. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. D. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase, and enclosure. Motors and drives shall be mounted out of the airstream. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance. E. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. F. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. G. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A NEMA 1 disconnect switch shall be provided as standard, except with explosion resistant motors, where disconnects are optional. Factory wiring shall be provided from motor to the handy box. ' H. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air performance. I. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. ' POWER VENTILATORS 15$70-3 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 2.05 SCHEDULES A. Refer to drawings. 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 11 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Route ductwork as shown on drawings. C. Refer to details on the drawings. ***END OF SECTION*** POWER VENTILATORS 15870-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRO]. #09-0260 SECTION 15875 POWER ROOF VENTILATORS 11 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Centrifugal Roof Exhausters. B. Gravity and Intake Vents. C. Roof Curbs. D. Base Flashing Cap Sheet. E. Base Flashing Base Ply. 1.02 REL,9TED WORK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15170 ....... Motors. C. Section 15242 ....... Vibration Isolation. D. Section 15890....... Ductwork. E. Section 15910 ....... Ductwork Accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. AMCA 99-Standards Handbook. B. AMCA 210--Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes. C. AMCA 300-Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices. D. AMCA 301 Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices. E. SMACNA-Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 QUAUTYASSUR4NCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300. POWER ROOF VENT>IATORS 15875-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Division 1. B. Provide product data on wall and roof exhausters, and ceiling and cabinet fans. C. Provide fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted. D. Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. BASIS OF DESIGN-Greenheck and [Bayley (Science hood exhaust fans only)]. B. PILE-APPROVED SUBSTITUTES (Approved to Bid) 1. Cook. C. OTHER SUBSTITUTES-Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum. 2.02 CENTRIFUGAL ROOFEXHAUSTERS (MODEL G) A. Roof exhaust fans shall be centrifugal direct drive type. B. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum, and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. C. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing and shroud shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. The fan shroud shall have a rolled bead for added strength. D. Motors shall be mounted out of the airstream on vibration isolators. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants. Motors shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box within the motor compartment. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring. E. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. POWER ROOF VENTILATORS 15875-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 u f? 1 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 409-0260 F. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. 2.03 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHA USTERS(MODEL GB) A. Centrifugal Fan Unit: Belt driven with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2 inch mesh, 16 gage aluminum bird screen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets; secured with stainless steel bolts and screws. B. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators. C. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (1..50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. D. A disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. A fan conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of installation. E. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance. F. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification. 204 GRAVITY VENTS AND INTAKE VENTS A. Gravity and intake vents (hoods) shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum. Hoods shall be constructed of precision formed, arched panels with interlocking seams. Bases shall be constructed so that the curb cap is 8" larger than the throat size. Base height shall be 12". Hood support members shall be constructed of galvanized steel and fastened so that the hood can be hinged open. B. Birdscreens constructed of 1/2" galvanized steel mesh shall be mounted horizontally across the intake/discharge area of the hood. C. Provide unit with motor operated damper and actuator. Coordinate damper requirements with Controls Contractor. 2.05 RooF CURB A. Prefabricated roof curb shall be of box section design, minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel construction, continuous mitered and welded corner seams, integral base plate, factory installed pressure treated wood nailer, and shall be insulated with 1 %" thick, rigid fiberglass board insulation. To install properly, weld, bolt, or screw all curbing to the roof deck or substructure. Panel frames shall be rounded to reduce air flow interference. All curbs shall be minimum 16" high. POWER ROOF VENTILATORS 15875-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRGJ. #09-0260 2.06 BASE FLASHING CAP SHEET A. Provide SBS fiberglass reinforced, 98 mils (minimum) thickness membrane faced with embossed aluminum foil, weight 90 lbs. per 100 sq.ft. (minimum). Product shall be by one of the following: 1. Siplast - "Veral" aluminum surfaced cap sheet. 2. Soprema - "Sopralast 50 TV ALU" aluminum surfaced cap sheet. 2.07 BASE FLASHING BASE PLY A. Provide either glass reinforced asphalt sheet or SBS modified bitumen sheet, weight 89 lbs. per 100 sq.ft. (minimum). Product shall be one of the following: 1. Siplast-"Irex40." 2. Soprema - "Elastophene Flam." PART .3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure roof exhausters with stainless steel screws to roof curb and secure roof curb to roof. 3.02 INSTALLATION OFBASE FLASHING FOR CURBS A. Install aluminum foil faced modified bitumen base flashing cap sheet and base ply by torching in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. Follow manufacturer's torching precautions carefully. ***END OF SECTION*** POWER ROOF VENTu AToRs 15875-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 909-0260 SECTION 15890 DUCTWORK PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Ductwork. B. Duct Cleaning. X.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15140 ....... Supports and Anchors. C. Section 15290 ....... Ductwork Insulation. D. Section 15870 ....... Power Ventilators. E. Section 15875 ....... Power Roof Ventilators. F. Section 15910 ....... Ductwork Accessories. G. Section 15936 ....... Air Outlets and Inlets. X.03 REFERENCES A. ASHRAE-Handbook 1981 Fundamentals; Chapter 33 - Duct Design. B. ASHRAE-Handbook 1983 Equipment; Chapter 1 - Duct Construction. C. ASTM A90-Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles. D. ASTM A167--Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. E. ASTM A653--Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. F. ASTM B209-Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. G. NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. DucxwOtrx 15890-1 0 ENGINEERING. MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 , H. SMACNA--1 VAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 1985 First Edition and 1995 Second Edition. I. UL 181-Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors. J. NFPA 96-Removal of Smoke and Grease-laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. B. Low Pressure: Three pressure classifications: 1. 112 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm; 2. 1 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm; and 3. 2 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. C. Medium Pressure: Two pressure classifications: 1. 3 inch WG positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 4,000 fpm; and 2. 4 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities less than 4,000 fpm. 1.05 REGULATORYREquREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010 and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Submit ductwork shop drawings including plans and sections at a scale of 3/8" to a foot. Indicate duct pressure class, fittings, turning vanes, ductwork accessories, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, duct reinforcement and configuration prior to start of work. Reproduction of the contract documents will not suffice. Shop drawings shall be submitted forty-five (45) days from the date of contract award. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 15010 and Supplementary General Conditions. DuuCTwORK 15890-2 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUsT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. H09-0260 B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 15010 and Supplementary ' General Conditions. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MArEmLs ' A. General: Non-combustible or conforming to requirements for Class 1 air duct materials, or UL 181. ' B. Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25 oz per sq ft for each side in conformance with ASTM A90. ' C. Fibrous Glass Ducts: Not to be used. D. Aluminum Ducts: ANSI/ASTM B209; aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061-T6 or of equivalent strength. E. Stainless Steel Ducts: ASTM A167, Type 304. F. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws. G. Sealant: Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid used alone or with tape or heavy mastic , . H. Hanger Rod: Steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. Hang duct in trapeze fashion in accordance with SMACNA Standards. I. Duct Supports: Straps may be used on ducts 24" wide and smaller, all others shall ' be supported on trapeze with hanger rods. 1 2.02 METAL DUCTWORK A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction ' Standards and ASHRAE handbooks, except as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and scaling for operating pressures/pressure classifications indicated. 1 B. All ductwork shall be sealed in accordance with the requirements of Seal Class "A." Seal all transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations. C. Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Duc [WORK 15890-3 Q ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 D. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Provide turning vanes on all T's, bends, and elbows (including long radius elbows and short radius elbows). E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible. Divergence upstream of equipment shall not exceed 30 degrees; convergence downstream shall not exceed 45 degrees. F. Coordinate ductwork with building structure and all other trades prior to starting work to avoid conflicts. 0. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. Formed on flanges (TDC/TDF/T25A/T25B) will be accepted. Formed on flanges shall be constructed as SMACNA T-25 flanges whose limits are defined on Page 1.36, 1995 SMACNA Manual, Second Edition. Formed on flanges are not allowed beyond 42" wide ductwork, or above 2" w.g. No other duct construction pertaining to formed on flanges will be accepted. 1. Construct rectangular ductwork to meet all functional criteria defined in Section VII, of the SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" 1985 First Edition. All ductwork shall comply with all local, state, and federal code requirements. 2.03 SCHEDULE OFDUCT CONSTRUCTIONREQUIREMENTS A. VAV Supply Ductwork (High Side): 2 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. Test duct leakage in accordance with Seal Class A. B. All Air Handlers (first 40 feet on supply side of unit connection): 4 inch WG positive static pressure and velocities less than 4,000 fpm. Test duct leakage in accordance with Seal Class A. C. All Air Handlers (first 40 feet on return side of unit connection): 3 inch WG negative static pressure and velocities less than 4,000 fpm. Test duct leakage in accordance with Seal Class A. D. VAV Distribution Ductwork (low side): 1 inch positive static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. Seal ductwork in accordance with Seal Class A. Testing may not be required if deemed acceptable by the Engineer during construction. Test duct leakage in accordance with Seal Class C. E. Return Ductwork: I inch negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. Seal ductwork in accordance with Seal Class A. Testing may not be required if deemed acceptable by the Engineer during construction. Test duct leakage in accordance with Seal Class C. DUCTWORK 15890-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 1 1 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoj. #09-0260 F. Exhaust Ductwork and Outside Air Ductwork: 1 inch positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,500 fpm. Seal ductwork in accordance with Seal Class A. Testing may not be required if deemed acceptable by the Engineer during construction. Test duct leakage in accordance with Seal Class C. G. Transfer Ductwork: 1/2 inch positive or negative static pressure and velocities less than 2,000 fpm. Seal ductwork in accordance with Seal Class A. Testing may not be required if deemed acceptable by the Engineer during construction. Test duct leakage in accordance with Seal Class C. H. All Others: Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1985, Table 1- 1 and Table 1-2, unless noted otherwise herein. 2.04 RECTANGULAR SUPPLY AND RETURN DUCTWORK LOCATED WITHIN THE FIRST 40 FEET MINIMUM OFAIR HANDLING UNITS (SOUND ATTENUATED) A. Ductwork shall be rectangular as manufactured by United McGill Corporation, MetalMart, Express Metals, Inc., or approved equal. B. Ductwork (including access doors) shall be double-wall, rectangular; duct and fittings shall be of Pittsburgh-lock longitudinal seam construction with transverse duct connectors. Duct shall be provided in lengths as required to meet the installation requirements of routing the ducts through the existing structure. Standard construction shall conform with the 1985 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and TDC Lockformer Addendum to SMACNA. Duct and fittings shall be shipped fully assembled. The liner perforations shall be 3/32 inch diameter with an overall open area of 23%. C. Duct and fittings shall be fabricated from a minimum G-60 galvanized steel. Fitting tap connections shall extend into liner of double wall ducts, flush with inner liner. Tape and seal along inside joint between inner liner and tap connection. D. Square throat elbows and tees shall be provided with factory-installed, double-wall, hollow turning vanes in accordance with SMACNA recommendations. Turning vanes are required in all radius and square throat fittings. E. Insulation shall be fiberglass that is 1" thick by 3 pounds per cubic foot (Type B duct liner board as specified in Section 15290) and shall be applied to the inner surface of the outer shell using duct liner adhesive. Insulated duct shall have a maximum thermal conductivity (k) of 0.27 Btu/hr/sq ft/°F/inch thickness at 75°F mean temperature. A UL approved mylar film and taped joints shall separate the internal fiberglass lining and the air stream. F. Provide access doors on supply and return; 6-8 feet from the unit; minimum size 18"x 18" and at 10 foot intervals to the end of the 40 foot length. G. Refer to Schedule of Duct Construction Requirements for classification. Duclwow ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15890-5 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoj. #09-0260 H. Ductwork Shop Drawings/Field Coordination: All double wall ductwork shall be factory premanufactured (fittings and straight lengths). As a basic part of this manufacturer's contractual requirements, they shall provide a minimum ''/4" per foot, scaled, coordinated, ductwork shop drawings (coordination drawings). The coordination drawings shall be field verified by a certified manufacturer's representative and the installing contractor(s). The coordination drawings shall ' represent the actual routing, mounting locations, transitions, etc., as necessary to achieve the design intent while optimizing the use of the designated installation space as it relates to equipment and materials of other trades in that space (i.e., piping, air handlers, starters, building structure, electrical panels, etc). These coordination drawings shall be submitted to the A/E for review and approval prior to ordering materials. These coordination drawings shall be submitted to the A/E no later than four (4) weeks after the contract between Owner and Contractor is signed. ' .Z.05 FLEXIBLEDUCT ' A. Inlet VAV Box Connection Ductwork: 1. The duct shall be made from dead soft aluminum sheet, spiral wound into a tube and spiral corrugated. The duct shall be fabricated with a triple mechanical lock to form a continuous secure air tight joint. No adhesives may be used in the manufacture. Duct shall have a factory applied fiberglass insulation blanket with a "C" factor not more than .23. This blanket shall be protected by an outdoor vapor barrier composed of fiberglass reinforced aluminum foil and mylar laminate. Ducting shall be cut to size and hand formed to suite job conditions in accordance with the manufacturer's ' recommendations. The duct shall conform to NFPA 90A, 90B, and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as 181 Class I Air Duct. 2. Flexible duct shall be Triple Lock Type TL-M as manufactured by Flexmaster or approved equal by Clevaflex or Flexible Tubing Corporation. 3. Maximum length of duct shall be 4'-0" on VAV box inlet connections. 4. Install with maximum bend radius of 1-1/2 diameters. B. Air Device Connection Ductwork: Flexible fiberglass duct with a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.24 BTU/HR - degrees F - Sq.Ft. at 75 degrees F mean temperature with a maximum flame spread rating of 25 and smoke developed rating of 50. Flexible fiberglass duct shall be Owens-Corning Valuflex or approved equal. The , duct shall conform to NFPA 90A, 90B, and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as 181 Class I Air Duct. 1. Flexible fiberglass duct shall be provided with bellmouth fitting, volume damper, and metal clamp. 2. Flexible fiberglass duct size shall be same as air device neck size unless otherwise noted. 3. Flexible fiberglass duct length shall be a maximum of 9 feet and a minimum of 4 feet. DUCTWORK 15890-6 ' ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRo.I. #09-0260 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ' A. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate smoke detectors and sensors. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal cap with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. ' B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. ' C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Install motorized control dampers, duct mounted temperature pressure sensors and ' air monitors in ductwork; dampers, sensors and air monitors supplied under Section 15975, installed by the Mechanical Contractor. E. All ductwork connected to motor driven equipment shall be provided with flexible duct connections. F. Install 18" x 18" duct access doors within 6-8 feet of each air handler for both the ' return and supply. G. Aluminum ductwork serving wet areas shall be pitched for drainage toward registers. Bottom of ductwork shall be welded or soldered watertight. H. Install duct smoke detectors in ductwork furnished by others as shown on the ' drawings and as recommended by the detector manufacturer and six (6) duct diameters after a bend or obstruction in the duct. Provide a minimum 8" x 8" access door in duct at location of detector for maintenance and inspection of tube. 3.02 AD usnNG, TESTING, AND CLEANING ' A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning. 1 _ .? . DucrwoRx 15890-7 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING W ELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 B. All ducts of all pressures shall be leak-tested as per SMACNA 1985 Edition, HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, in the presence of the A/E and Owner's representative. The tabulated test results shall be submitted to the A/E. Duct shall be tested in accordance with the applicable leakage class as defined and scheduled herein. Reference Figure 4-1, Duct Leakage Classification, and Table 4-1, Applicable Leakage Classes, of SMACNA Manual. If the leakage constant determined from the tests is lower than or. equal to the specified leakage class, the duct is in compliance. If the duct is not in compliance, the duct shall be resealed and retested until the duct is tested and found to be in compliance. 3.03 DUCTWORKAPPLicATIONSCHEDULE Low Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel Medium Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel Return and Relief Galvanized Steel General Exhaust Galvanized Steel Outside Air Intake Galvanized Steel Emergency Exhaust Galvanized Steel Shower Room Exhaust Aluminum Chemical Storage Exhaust Stainless Steel ***END OF SECTION*** Ducmopm 15890-8 @ ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX IPROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 15895 CLEANING OF AIR CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SCOPE ' A. This section specifies performance requirements and evaluation criteria for the mechanical cleaning of porous and non-porous ductwork, fans, coils, and other components of air conveyance systems (ACS). B. . This project includes the cleaning and decontamination of all interior surfaces of the air systems. The air systems include but are not limited to: supply ducts, return ducts, outside air ducts, double duct boxes, turning vanes, extractors, dampers, diffusers, grilles, registers, and all other existing internal components common to the airstream. C. As a basic part of this project, clean all existing ACS to remain that service areas of the building scheduled to be remodeled on the drawings. Refer to Architect's drawings for remodeling scope of work boundaries. 1.02 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ' . A. The following documents of the issue currently in effect form a part of this specification: G9 ASHRAE 62-1989, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality-American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 1A Military Standard 282-United States Department of Defense (DOD). . Q Building Air Quality-Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). ® HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible--Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). ASHRAE 33-78, Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils-American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). E9 ASHRAE Terminology of Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning & Refrigeration-American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). ® ARI 410-91 Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Air Heating Coils-Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). ' CLEANING OF AIR CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS 15895-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 19 Manual of Analytical Methods, Third Edition - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). W AMCA 99-86 Standards Handbook----Air Movement and Control Association. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Air Conveyance System: The air conveyance system (ACS) is any interior surface of a building's air distribution system for conditioned spaces and/or occupied zones (See ASHRAE 62-1989). This includes the entire air moving system from the points that the air enters the system to the points where the air is discharged from the system. The return air grilles, air ducts (except ceiling plenums) to the air handling unit (AHU), supply air ducts, turning vanes, supply diffusers and registers are all considered part of the ACS. B. Debris: Any solid materials, including particulate substances, in the ACS not intended to be present. C. Mechanical Cleaning: Physical removal of debris and other foreign matter from ACS surfaces. D. Ton-Porous ACS Surface: Any surface of the ACS in contact with the air stream which cannot be penetrated by either solutions or air. This would exclude materials such as wood, fiberboard, thermal insulation, and concrete. E. Visibly Clean: Determined by internal visual inspection, that all portions or components of the ACS are both (1) free of any debris and (2) in the cleaners professional judgment, capable of cleaning verification. F. Visual Inspection: Examination of the cleaned components of the ACS to evaluate the effectiveness of the cleaning process using the human eye or another optical instrument. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MECHANICAL CLEANING A. Non-Porous ACS Surfaces: Any mechanical cleaning method may be used which will render the ACS components visibly clean and capable of non-porous surfaces cleaning verification. No cleaning method shall be used which could potentially damage components of the ACS or negatively alter the integrity of the system. CLEANING op AIR CQNVEYANCE SYSTEMS 15895-2 CD ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 B. : Porous ACS Surfaces Any mechanical cleaning method may be used which will render the ACS components visibly clean. No cleaning method shall be used which could potentially damage components of the ACS or negatively alter the integrity of the system. 3.02 VERIFIC9TWN A. General: Verification of ACS cleanliness will be determined after mechanical cleaning and before the application of any treatment or 'introduction of any treatment-related substance to the ACS. Verification of non-porous surface cleaning shall be conducted after mechanical cleaning and before the ACS is restored to normal operation. B. Verification of Nan-Porous Surface Cleaning 1. All non-porous ACS surfaces must be visibly clean and capable of passing the NADCA Vacuum Test. 2. The weight of debris collected by the NADCA Vacuum Test, as outlined in Appendix A, NADCA 01, shall not exceed 1.0 mg/100 cm2. C. Documentation 1. All testing required to verify ACS shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. 2. All necessary test equipment and materials shall be provided by the Contractor. 3. Visual inspections will be conducted throughout the ACS on each floor at locations selected by the Engineer. 4. Dust vacuum sampling shall be performed at a minimum of one location per floor. Additional sampling tests shall be performed at the option and direction of the Engineer. 3.03 DECONTAMINATIONPROCESS A. Mechanical cleaning procedures shall include the dislodgment of debris and foreign matter deposits on the interior surfaces of the ACS. Loosened debris shall be collected and removed from the ACS via HEPA-filtered vacuum collection equipment. Negative pressure shall be maintained in the ductwork during access, agitation, and air-sweeping to prevent possible spread of contaminants. Negative air pressure must be sufficient to prevent airborne particles from settling downstream. Use HEPA filters with a DOP Test Method Efficiency of not less than 99.97% when tested with 0.3 micron particles. CLEANING OF Am CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS - 15895-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 B. Debris removed during the ACS cleaning/remediation process shall be collected and precautions taken to ensure that debris is not otherwise dispersed outside the ACS during the cleaning process. All equipment and furniture shall be protected and covered in each work area. After the ACS cleaning remediation process, any areas which are affected by the Contractor's work must be as clean or cleaner than their condition prior to the commencement of the ACS cleaning process. C. All debris removed from the ACS shall be disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with all applicable regulations, codes, and ordinances. 3.04 SERVICE OPENINGS A. Any service openings required to facilitate the cleaning of the ACS shall be provided and installed under this Section. B. Duct access doors shall comply with the requirements of Section 15910. C. Access panels shall comply with the requirements of Section 15010. 3.05 WoRKAREA, SAFETY AND HAZARDous MATERIALS A. Contractor shall become familiar with building availability, building layout, security requirements, vehicle access, fire extinguishers, exits, and electrical panels. Contractor shall observe OSHA Safety Regulations at all times during the performance of this project including lock-out/tag-out of all mechanical equipment under decontamination as well as confined space entry requirements for vertical shafts. Contractor shall report to the Engineer promptly the existence of any unsafe conditions which prevent the performance of this project. When hazardous fungi and/or bacteria are encountered, decontamination personnel shall take adequate precautions to insure safety during abatement procedure. Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state, and local requirements for protecting the safety of the Contractor's employees, building occupants, and the environment. No processes shall be employed in such a manner that they will create adverse health effects to the building occupants, Contractor's employees, or the general public. ***END OF SECTION' CLEANING OF Ark CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS 158954 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROs. #09-0260 SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Volume Control Dampers. B. Air Turning Devices. C. Flexible Duct Connections. D. Duct Test Holes. E. Motor Operated Dampers. F. Access Doors. G. Fire Dampers. H. Stationary Louvers. I. Counterbalance Backdraft Dampers. J. Combination Smoke/Fire Dampers. K. Smoke Dampers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010 ....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15890 ....... Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B. SMACNA--Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. DuczwoRK AccEssORm 15910-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 009-0260 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.0I VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS BALANCING A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern for ducts more than 12" in height and single blade dampers for ducts 12" in height or less with maximum blade length of 48 inches. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. C. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. Shaft shall extend beyond thickness of insulation to allow unobstructed operation of handle and locking mechanism. 2.02 ArR TURNING VANES 1 A. Turning Vanes Over 36 Inches: Multi-blade device with double thickness air foil blades with long trailing edge vanes, aligned in short dimension, steel or aluminum construction, with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, First Edition, for spacing, reinforcing, and other construction quality details. B. Turning Vanes up to 36 Inches: Single blade device with long trailing edge vanes, aligned, steel or aluminum construction, with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. Refer to , SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, First Edition, for spacing, reinforcing, and other construction quality details. 2.03 DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, and as indicated. B. Rectangular to Round Runout and Branch Connection: 1. Provide Bellmouth spin-in collar fittings installed per manufacturer's recommendation and in accordance with SMACNA. Provide metal clamps to secure insulation and vapor barrier over the core connection. If height of Bellmouth fitting does not work with duct dimensions, provide a flat oval Bellmouth fitting or rectangle to round fitting. All branch connections shall be provided with volume damper and extended handle/locking mechanism. 2. Fittings shall be completely sealed, insulated, taped, and masticed. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES _ 15910-2 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 C. Air Handler Duct Connection: 1. Provide U.L. listed, fire-retardant, neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density, 36 oz. per sq.yd., approximately 6 inches wide, crimped into metal edging strip. 2. Connections shall be completely sealed, insulated, taped, and masticed. ' 2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Cut or drill temporary test holes in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, ' neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. B. Permanent test holes shall be factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. - • 2.05 MOTOR OPERATED DAMPERS A. Dampers (except smoke or combination fire/smoke dampers) shall be furnished by automatic controls contractor and installed by the mechanical contractor. 1 2.06 ACCESS DODRs A. Access doors shall be provided at all main volume dampers, automatic dampers, before and after booster heaters, air flow measuring stations, thermostats in fan discharges, control devices, fire dampers and other locations where duct access is required. B. Doors shall be constructed of #22 gauge metal minimum or at least two (2) gauges heavier than duct. Door material shall be same as duct system. C. Doors shall be provided with a flat iron or angle iron stiffening frame and so constructed that they can be operated without twisting or distortion. Doors on insulated ductwork shall be of double panel construction, provided with an approved type insulated filler not less than 1" thick. The duct opening at each door shall be provided with a continuous reinforcing galvanized bar or angle against which the door will close, this being provided with a latex foam gasket. Gasket shall be held to bar or angle by applying a flameproof adhesive. All access doors shall be hinged, minimum two (2) hinges. D. Door frames on insulated ductwork shall be placed on an extended metal collar flush with the face of the finished insulation . E. Doors shall be gasketed air tight. i F. Access door and hardware shall be submitted for approval before fabricat on. G. Access door on air handling unit shall open out on draw-through unit and open in on blow through units. DUCrwoRK AccrssotiEs 15910-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRo7. 409-0260 2.07 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fire dampers shall be constructed and tested in accordance with UL Safety Standard 555. Each fire damper shall have a 1'/z hour (unless noted otherwise on the drawings) fire protection rating, 165°F fusible link, and shall include a UL label in accordance with established UL labeling procedures. All dampers shall be out-of- the-airstream type and shall be UL 555 classified static rated for use in HVAC systems that automatically shutdown in the event of a fire. Fire dampers shall be equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the location shown on the drawings. Fire dampers shall be installed in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials, and practices required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer when dampers were tested at UL. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer's instructions. Dampers installed in HVAC systems that shall remain operational in the event of a fire (i.e.; smoke control systems) shall be UL classified dynamic rated with a 1'/2 hour (unless noted otherwise on the drawings) fire protection rating. B. Approved Manufacturers 1. Ruskin. 2. Greenheck. 2.08 STATIOIVARYLOUVERS A. Louvers shall bear the AMCA seal and shall have free area and pressure drop ratings certified to be obtained using AMCA standard tests. B. Louvers shall have the following construction, unless noted otherwise. 1. Shall be stormproof drainable type. 2. Frame and Blades: 0.125 and 0.081 inch thick extruded aluminum respectively. 3. Finish: As scheduled on the drawings or selected by the Architect.. 4. Screen: Aluminum bird screen, interior mount, removable with frame. 5. Mullion: Exposed (used only on louver widths over 60 inches). C. Provide extruded aluminum brick or block vents with mesh insect screen where shown on the drawings. D. Approved Manufacturers 1. Ruskin. 2. Greenheck. DUCTWORK ACCESsowrs 15910-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL C&NTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER - MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 2.09 COUNTERBALANCED BACKDRAFT DAMPER i A. Provide counterbalance backdraft dampers that meet the following minimum construction standards; frame shall be .125" wall thickness 6063-T5 extruded aluminum with 12 gage galvanized steel structural brace at each comer or 4" x 1" x .081". Blades shall be .070" wall thickness 6063-T5 extruded aluminum with extruded vinyl blade edge seals mechanically locked into blade edge. Adhesive or clip-on type seals are unacceptable. Bearings shall be corrosion resistant, long life synthetic type for quiet operation. Linkage shall be 1/2" wide tiebar connected to stainless steel pivot pins. Dampers shall be designed for maximum 3500 FPM spot velocities and up to 4" w.g. backpressure, depending on damper size. Damper, shall be in all respects equivalent to Ruskin Model CBD4. Z.1 O COMBINATION FIRF?SMOKE DAMPERS (MOTORIZED) A. Shall be provided, wired (power and signal), tested and installed by the Mechanical Contractor as shown on the plans. Dampers shall close upon activation of fire alarm system. Refer to Sequence of Operations for applications to fire suppression systems (i.e.; FM 200 or Inergen). Coordinate with fire alarm/fire suppression system installer(s) and manufacturer's instructions for connection to that system. B. Dampers shall be Greenheck [Model FSD-23, 33 or 28, CFSD-23 or OSFD-23 or 331, Ruskin [Model FSD-36, FSD-37, or FSD60-3], or pre-approved substitute. C. Dampers shall be of the motorized multi-blade type construction. Dampers shall be ' 1'/2 hour fire resistence rated in accordance with UL Standard 555. Dampers shall meet all of the requirements for smoke dampers per the latest Edition of NFPA 90A. Dampers shall meet or exceed the dynamic closure rating maximum velocity of 2000 fpm and 8 inches w.g. D. Dampers shall be UL 555S Leakage Class I rated, non-heat degradable design with friction free metal to metal seals incorporated into the blade and frame shapes. Other types of gasketing to achieve low leakage performance such as petrochemical (vinyl, plastic, etc.), spring stainless steel, or aluminum are not acceptable. Dampers and actuator shall be rated to 350T. E. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's UL installation instructions. F. Electric motor actuators shall be UL listed, factory installed for outside of the ductwork. The actuators shall be power open, spring closed, suitable to operate on 120 VAC, 60 cycle. Refer to the mechanical, electrical power and electrical systems drawings for coordination. The dampers shall be furnished with connecting shafts and linkage. ' DucTwoRK ACCESSORIES 15910-5 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 2.11 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Smoke dampers shall be provided, wired (power and signal), tested, and installed by the Mechanical Contractor as shown on the plans. Dampers shall close upon activation of fire alarm system. Refer to Sequence of Operations for applications to fire suppression systems (i.e.; FM 200 or Inergen). Coordinate with fire alarm/fire suppression system installer(s) and manufacturer's instructions for connection to that system. B. Dampers shall be Greenheck (Model SMD-23, 33 or 43), Ruskin Model SD-37, FSD-50, or SD-60, or pre-approved substitute. C. Dampers shall be of the motorized multi-blade type construction. Dampers shall be 1%2 Hour Fire Resistance Rated in accordance with UL Standard 555. Dampers shall meet all of the requirements for smoke dampers per the latest Edition of NFPA 90A. Dampers shall meet or exceed the dynamic closure rating maximum velocity of 2000 fpm and 4 inches w.g. D. Dampers shall be UL 555S Leakage Class I rated, non-heat degradable design with friction free metal to metal seals incorporated into the blade and frame shapes. Other types of gasketing to achieve low leakage performance such as petrochemical (vinyl, plastic, etc.), spring stainless steel, or aluminum are not acceptable. Dampers and actuator shall be rated to 350°F. E. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's UL installation instructions. F. Electric motor actuators shall be UL listed, factory installed for outside of the ductwork. The actuators shall be power open, spring closed, suitable to operate on 120 VAC, 60 cycle. Refer to the mechanical, electrical power, and electrical systems drawings for coordination. The dampers shall be furnished with connecting shafts and linkage 11 PART 3 EXECUTION N 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. C. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. D. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment. DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910-6 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 r 11 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER - MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 E. Provide duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. r F. Motorized dampers are furnished under Section 15975, installed by the Mechanical Contractor. G. Provide 18" x 18" access doors in ductwork within 6-8 feet of each. air handler for both the return and supply. ***END OF SECTION' * * DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 1597-77 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. ?I ?J AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST I2, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 ' r-jl?l u j I THis PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ?J 1 L s DUCTwoRK ACCESSORIES 15910-8 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AucuST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 15936 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Registers/Grilles. B. Diffusers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 15010....... Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Section 15890....... Ductwork. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ADC 1062-Certification, Rating and Test Manual. B. AMCA 500---Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters. C. ANSI/NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. D. ARI 650-Air Outlets and Inlets. E. ASHRAE 70-Method of Testing for Rating the Air flow Performance of Outlets and Inlets. F. SMACNA-Low Pressure Duct Construction Standard. 1.04 QUALITYASSURANCE A. Test and rate performance of air outlets and inlets in accordance with ADC Equipment Test Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70. B. Test and rate performance of louvers in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.05 REGULATORYREQUIREMENTS A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15936-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER _ MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 15010, General Conditions, and Supplementary General Conditions. B. Provide product data for items required for this project. C. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets indicating type, size, location, application, and noise level. D. Review requirements of outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submitting product data and schedules of outlets and inlets. E. Submit engineering data in a manner to facilitate convenient review of aspiration ability, including temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, noise criteria ratings sizes, free area and quality of construction. Outlets shall be selected for maximum noise criteria level as scheduled on drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-CEILING DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS A. BASIS OF DESIGN---Titus. B. PRE-APPROVED SUBSTITUTES (Approved to Bid) 1. MetalAire. 2. Price C. OTHER SUBSTITUTES-Submit a written substitution request, prior to bid, to the Architect/Engineer in accordance with Specification Section 15010. Accepted substitutes will be notified via Addendum. 2.02 CEILING DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES A. Fabricate aluminum and baked enamel white finish. (Refer to schedule on drawings.) B. Provide opposed blade damper adjustable from diffusers and registers faces. C. Coordinate frame type with latest architectural reflected ceiling plan. D. Refer to schedule on drawings for type and model number. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 1$936-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers registers and grilles to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers in diffusers and registers. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. ***END OF SECTION*** AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15936-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 ' t [I i THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I Fi 1 1 1 15936-a AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY STATEMENT A. Test and balance of RVAC systems supply, return, and exhaust systems shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency certified by AABC or NEBR. The cost of the TAB services are a part of the base bid for this Contract. The TAB services provided herein shall be completed and the written report submitted to the Engineer a minimum of 15 days prior to Substantial Completion of each project phase. If discrepancies are found, they will be corrected by this Contractor and the Contractor will be responsible to pay for additional trips for the Owner's TAB representatives to verify. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements set forth in the Bidding Requirements and the Contractual Conditions of Division One shall apply to this Section. B. The requirements of Section 15010, Basic Mechanical Requirements, shall be adhered to in the test and balance work which shall include Section 15260, Piping Insulation; and Section 15890, Ductwork. 1.03 GENERAL A. Scope 1. Baseline Testing Efforts: a. Contractor shall perform Baseline Testing efforts on all air handler systems being impacted by this renovation project. b. All impacted units shall have the following items tested and documented in a Baseline Test Report: (1) Supply air traverse; (2) All supply air outlets served by unit; (3) Return air traverse; (4) All return air outlets served by unit; (5) Outside air cfm; TESTING, AwsTING, AND BALANCING 15990-1 @ ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 (6) Exhaust air fan cfm; (7) Cooling coil entering and leaving air temperatures; (8) Heating coil entering and leaving air temperatures. Contractor shall submit Baseline Test Report for Engineer review prior to any construction work taking place. Contractor shall ensure that all systems are returned to baseline values upon completion of remodeling unless otherwise noted on the drawings. 2. Description a. The Contractor shall, at the Contractor's expense, procure the services of an independent testing and balance firm which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems. This specialty services firm shall balance, adjust and test air moving equipment, air distribution and/or exhaust systems as herein specified. b. Test and balance work shall not begin until all systems have been completed and are in full working order to the satisfaction of the Project Architect/Engineer and the Owner. This Contractor shall make all preliminary tests and adjustments before advising in writing that test and balance work is ready to begin and shall place all systems and equipment into full operation during each working day of testing and balancing. 3. Replacement pulleys (adjustable and non-adjustable), additional balancing dampers, pressure taps, balancing valves, cocks and fittings, etc., required to effect proper air balance shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. This Contractor shall do this work as soon as possible so as not to delay the completion of the test and balance work. 4. Air filters shall be replaced and strainers shall be cleaned by this Contractor before proceeding with test and balance and thereafter as required by the test and balance firm. 5. Systems shall be placed into service using approved start up procedures. This (mechanical) contractor shall be responsible for proper initial setting and adjustment of HVAC equipment, air handlers, VAV boxes, exhaust fans, etc. furnished and installed by him. 6. This Contractor shall provide test openings as required; shall operate HVAC equipment and provide trades persons to assist and make adjustments for test and balance during the process. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AucusT 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. 909-0260 B. 7. The Contractor's test and balance firm shall periodically visit the site during construction of the HVAC system. No less than two visits per phase will be made. Should methods, materials or workmanship being used adversely affect balancing and adjusting work, the test and balance agency shall report its findings in writing to the Contractor with recommendations for correction. 8. The Contractor's test and balance firm has agreed or shall agree to carry out the test and balance in accordance with the AABC National Standards for Total Systems Balance, 1982 or the NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing or Environmental Systems, Fourth edition, and in conformance with ASHRAE Handbook, 1991, Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing and as outlined in this Specification Section. 9. This Contractor shall furnish to the testing and balancing agency a complete set of plans and specifications, addenda, shop drawings, schedules and change orders as may be required. Quality Assurance The final result of balancing shall be to provide uniform air temperatures within a two (2) degree F spread in the conditioned space at peak load conditions. 2. All instruments used shall be accurately calibrated within six months of testing and balancing and shall be maintained in good working order. In the event of dispute, the Owner or Contractor or Project Architect/Engineer may choose to provide verification of test and balance reports, and such verification shall be by a second independent agency selected by the Engineer. Reports found to be inaccurate will be disallowed, and the Contractor's test and balance firm will be required to repeat operations under the supervision of the second independent agency until accurate reports are completed and agreed upon, provided the Contractor's TAB firm is found to be at fault in the judgment of the Engineer. The cost of disputed test and balance work shall be borne by the Owner or Contractor (whichever is found to be at fault). C. Submittals The test and balance firm will submit two (2) copies of data for the testing and balancing for the approval of the Project Architect/Engineer and three (3) file copies to the Owner and two (2) copies to this Contractor. 2. All data and information shall be compiled in a neat, orderly format on 8-1/2" x 11" test forms and shall be signed and sealed by the certified individual as previously described. TESTrNG, ADJUSTING, AND BAL,ANCLNG 15990-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 2. oz EXECUTION A. Air Balance 1. This Contractor shall prepare the air systems for balancing and verify same for test and balance firm as follows: a. Mechanically check fans, blowers and air handling equipment and make such available to operate under design conditions. b. Set volume dampers, air dampers and vanes in their normal position. C. Set grilles, diffusers, etc. installed with vanes, blades in their normal position. d. Mechanically check controls, whether they are electronic, electric or pneumatic or a combination thereof, and make available to operate under design conditions. e. Mark damper shafts and locking devices to accurately represent the position of their respective dampers when in optimum position. 2. The Contractor's test and balance firm shall perform the following tests and balance system in accordance with these requirements: a. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements. b. Test and record motor full load amperes. Verify the sizing and settings of overloads as well as document same on reports. Coordinate with Division 16 to install and size overloads to NEC and manufacturers requirements. C. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply and return ducts and obtain design CFM at fans. d. Test and record system total pressures, suction and discharge. e. Test and adjust system for design CFM recirculated air. f. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air. g. Test and record coil entering air temperatures (D.B. heating and cooling). h. Test and record coil entering air temperatures (W.B. cooling). i. Test and record coil leaving air temperatures. (D.B. heating and cooling). j. Test and record coil leaving air temperatures (W.B. cooling). TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. t AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 k. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design CFM. 1 1 I L 1. Adjust all zones to proper design CFM (f10%), supply and return. Show all DDC readings at time of measured readings. Coordinate with Controls Contractor to resolve differences. m. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within tlO% of design requirements, n. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location, area and system. o. Test and record all room temperatures, D.B. and W.B. Test shall be made near room thermostat where installed at four feet above floor. 3. Size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and all tested equipment shall be identified and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment shall be used to make required calculations. 4. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles and registers, shall include test resultant velocity, required CFM and test resultant CFM after adjustments. 5. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, the test and balance firm shall set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. 6. Testing and balance firm shall check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls requiring adjustment by control installers. 7. Diffusers, grilles and registers shall be adjusted by the test and balance firm to minimize drams in all areas. 8. The test and balance firm shall verify duct work leakage tests. Data from duct work leakage tests shall be tabulated and included with the test and balance report. Leakage tests per SMACNA requirements shall be performed. 9. Tested section of duct work shall be marked by this Contractor and verified by the test and balance firm. All tests and repairs shall be made before duct sections are concealed or insulated. B. Building Pressurization Testing and Balancing 1. This Contractor shall measure the building static pressure relative to the outdoor static pressure (differential pressure measurement) and balance each air delivery system (system) to obtain 0.03 inches of water column positive pressure within that portion of the building with all exterior openings (doors and windows) closed. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING Q ]ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 15990-5 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER W - MATRIX PRUJ. N09-0260 This Contractor shall make preliminary field differential pressure measurements of the building upon completion of the initial testing and balancing of the entire building or buildings HVAC systems. This shall be accomplished once the air delivery systems have been fully tested and balanced to within 10 percent of the scheduled air flow rates per the Contract Documents. A preliminary test and balance report (hand written copies are satisfactory) shall be submitted to the Engineer of Record at this point in the project. Based upon the initial building differential pressure measurements, the Contractor shall proceed with the Building Pressurization Testing and Balancing final field adjustments. If there are any questions regarding the building pressurization testing and balancing requirements, the Contractor should contact the Engineer and clarify the intended process prior to making the final field adjustments. 2. This Contractor shall review the drawings and ventilation schedule for each system to determine whether the system ventilation outside air flow rate is ' determined by the number of occupants "people" or determined by the minimum exhaust "exhaust" requirements. If the ventilation outside air is determined by "people", the building pressurization balancing shall be accomplished by adjusting the relief fan volumetric flow rate for that system. If the ventilation outside air is determined by "exhaust", the building pressurization balancing shall be accomplished by adjusting the volumetric flow rate of outside air for that system. Where the system design employs the use of barometric dampers in addition to or in lieu of relief fans for building pressurization control, the Contractor shall also adjust the barometric damper to obtain the stated building pressure. In either building pressurization balancing adjustment scenario, the ventilation rate shall not be reduced below the minimum required ventilation flow rate as determined by AHRAE 62.1 and represented on the Ventilation Schedule. 3, This Contractor shall document the final building pressurization measurements as a basic part of the test and balance report. The building pressurization measurement data and balancing methodology shall be presented in the report for each system. This shall include a narrative describing the method that was used to adjust each system, and the location of ' each reported differential pressure measurement. C. Equipment , 1. The test and balance agency shall submit, as part of its report, complete identification and operating data on the following: a. Rooftop air handling units. b. New and existing air devices (grilles, registers, diffusers). , C. Exhaust fans. ' d. Existing air handling units serving areas scheduled to be remodeled. TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 15990-6 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT l2, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 D. Certification 1. The test and balance report to the Project Architect/Engineer and to the Owner shall be signed, "sealed" and certified by a certified balancing agent in the State of Florida whose specialty discipline is HVAC, together with a signed statement that this balancer's specialty is HVAC. ***END OF SECTION*** TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 13990-7 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TEST ING, ADJ(]STING, AND BALANCING 15990-8 ' © ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 ELECTRICAL INDEX 16010 ..............BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16060 ..............ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16111 .............. CONDUIT 16120 ..............BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16130 ..............BOXES 16141 ..............WIRING DEVICES 16160 ..............CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16170 ..............GROUNDING AND BONDING 16190 ..............SUPPORTING DEVICES 16195 ..............ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16440 ..............DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16450 ..............SECONDARY GROUNDING 16485 ..............CONTACTORS 16510 ..............LUMINAIRES 16720 ..............FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 7 En1 Matrix,. inc. P. Narrton, P.E. Florida P.E. No. 95071 CsrutkWo of Authorization No. 4288 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. -1 L AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER - - MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK. I.?., z ??tss?ml n3 a ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 ' SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 16 Sections, in addition to Division 1---0eneral Requirements. ' 1.02 INTENT A. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for use." B. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown. 1.03 SURVEISAND MEASUREMENTS ' A. Base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical from established bench marks. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the work. All material take-offs for the site shall be field measured prior to bids. 1.04 DRAwms A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work included in the contract. Drawings are not to be scaled. The architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact location of fixtures and equipment. ' Where they are not definitely locate , this information shall be obtained from the Architect- ' B. If directed by the Architect or Engineer, the Contractor shall,. without extra charge, make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. C. At the time of each shop drawing submission, the Contractor shall call the Engineer's attention (in writing) to, and plainly mark on shop drawings, any deviations from the Contract Documents. ' BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. #09-0260 D. Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, submitted for approval, shall be properly labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used, location, section and article number of specifications governing, Contractor's name, and name of job. All equipment shall be labeled to match labeling on contract documents. E. Catalogs, pamphlets, or other documents submitted to describe items on which approval is being requested, shall be specific and identification in catalog, pamphlet, etc. of item submitted shall be clearly made in ink. Data of a general nature will not be accepted. F. . Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are approved, said approval does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said approval does not in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility or necessity of furnishing material or performing work as required by the contract drawings and specifications. t G. All shop drawings shall be submitted to the A/E by Contractor no later than 30 days from the day of contract award. I H. Failure of the Contractor to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle him to an extension of contract time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. I. Submit all Division 16 submittals at one (1) time in one (1) integral group. Piece-by- piece submission of individual items will not be acceptable. Engineer may check contents of each submittal set upon initial delivery; if not complete as set forth herein, submittal sets may be returned to Contractor without review and approval and will not be accepted until made complete. At the close of the job, prior to final review, five (5) bound copies of the following shall be submitted by transmittal letter to the Engineer for review and acceptance. 1. Equipment warranties 2. Contractor's warranty Parts list and manuals for all equipment Operating Instructions (in writing) Written instructions on maintenance and care of the system 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. B. NFPA 101-Life Safety Code. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER _ .? MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1.06 SUBMITTALS' ' A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Proposed Products List: Include Products specified in the following Sections, but not limited to: 1. Section 16141........ Wiring Devices. r 2. Section 16160........ Cabinets and Enclosures. ' 3. Section 16440........ Disconnect Switches. 4. Section 16485........ Contactors. 5. Section 16510........ Luminaires. 6. Section 16720........ Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection Systems. C. It shall be understood that review of shop drawings by the Engineer does not supersede the requirement to provide a complete and functioning system in compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.07 SUBSTnruno S ' A. Materials and equipment are specified herein by a single or by multiple Manufacturers to indicate quality and performance required. The drawings are based upon equipment scheduled on drawings and specified. If another Manufacturer is considered for substitution during the bidding process, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all electrical, mechanical, structural, or architectural changes. Comparable equipment Manufacturers which are listed as equals shall be considered as substitutes. Manufacturers other than the basis of ' design shall submit a catalog information and 1/4" scale plan and section drawings showing proper fit and all clearances for maintenance items. ' B. Substitutions of other Manufacturer's will be considered for use if, in the Engineers opinion, the item requested for substitution is equal to that specified. The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer a typed comparative list of the basis of design and the ' proposed substitute. Request for approval of substitutions or equals prior to bid must be made in writing. The approval of any substitutions or equals prior to bid shall not be construed as a shop drawing approval. The substitute or equal must be submitted as described in the specifications and meet all the requirements of the specifications and drawings. ' C. All requests for substitutions shall be submitted as described in paragraph 1.07, B., and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the product ' specified as basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQumEMEws 1601073 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. 409-0260 D. Where the Contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the drawing, which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or any other part of the mechanical or electrical, all such redesign, and all new drawings and detailing required therefore, shall be prepared by the Subcontractor at his own expense and submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. E. Where such approved deviation requires quantity and arrangement of equipment from that specified or indicated on the drawings, any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.08 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish in writing to the General Contractor, with copies to the Architect, any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. B. When work installed under this Division will be in close proximity to, or will interfere with work of other trades, assist in working out space conditions to make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the Engineer/Architect, prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale not less than 1/4" = 1'0", clearly showing how work is to be installed in relation to the work of other trades. If the work is installed before coordinating with other trades, or so as to cause any interference with work of other trades, make all the necessary changes in work to correct the condition without extra charge. C. Furnish to other trades, as required, all necessary templates, patterns, setting plans, and shop details for the proper installation of work and for the purpose of coordinating adjacent work. 1.09 PROTECTION A. Protect all work and material provided under this Division from damage. All damaged equipment work or :material provided under this Division shall be replaced with new. Rebuilts are not acceptable. B. Protect all work and equipment until inspected, tested, and accepted. Protect work against theft, injury, or damage; and carefully store material and equipment received on site which are not immediately installed. Close open ends of work with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of obstructing material. 1.10 SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, AND HOISTING A. Provide all scaffolding, rigging, hoisting, and services necessary for erection and delivery into the premises of any equipment and apparatus furnished. Remove same from premises when no longer required. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1.11 REMOVAL OFRUBBISH ' A. This Contractor shall at all times keep premises free from accumulations of waste materials or rubbish caused by his employees or work. At completion of work he shall remove all his tools, scaffolding, materials, and rubbish from the building and site. He shall leave the premises and his work in a clean, orderly, and acceptable condition. 1 1.12 SAFETY A. This Contractor shall comply with Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and ' Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.333), Title 29-Labor, Chapter XIII, Bureau of Standards, Department of Labor, Part 1518-Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; and that his housekeeping and equipment be maintained in such a manner that they comply with the Florida Industrial Commission Safety Code and Regulations of the Federal Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), wherein it states that the Contractor shall not require any laborer or mechanic employed in the performance of the contract to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to his health and safety. ' 1.13 SUPERVISION A. This Contractor shall provide a competent, experienced, full time superintendent ' who is acceptable to the Architect/Engineer and Owner, and who is authorized to make decisions on behalf of the Contractor. 1 1.14 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials and apparatus required for the work, except as specifically specified ' otherwise, shall be new, of first-class quality, and shall be furnished, delivered, erected, connected and finished in every detail, and shall be so selected and arranged as to fit properly into the building spaces. Where no specific kind or quality of material is given, a first-class standard article as approved by the Engineer shall be furnished. Refer to substitutions in this Section. B. Unless otherwise specifically indicated on the plans or specifications, all equipment ' and materials shall be installed with the approval of the Architect and Engineer in accordance with the recommendations of the Manufacturer. This includes the performance of such tests as the Manufacturer recommends. 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQuIREIVIE m 16010-5 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 1.15 QUIET OPERATIONAND VIBRATION A. All work shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer and the Owner. In case of moving machinery, sound, or vibration noticeable outside of room in which it is installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable. Sound or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer and the Owner shall be corrected in an approved manner at no additional expense to the Owner. 1.16 FOUNDATIONS, SUPPORTS, PIERS, ATTACHMENTS A. This Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary foundations, supports, pads, bases and piers required for all equipment furnished under this Division, and shall submit drawings to the Architect and Engineer for approval before purchase, fabrication or construction of same. B. For all floor mounted equipment, provide concrete pads which extend six inches (6") beyond equipment base in all directions with top edge chamfered. Inset six inches (61) steel dowel rods into floors to anchor pads. Shop drawings of all foundations and pads shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer for approval before same are constructed. C. Construction of foundations, supports, pads, bases, and piers where mounted on the floor, shall be the same materials and same quality of finish as the adjacent and surrounding flooring material. D. All equipment, unless shown otherwise, shall be securely attached to the building structure in an approved manner. Attachments shall be of a strong and durable nature and any attachments that are, in the opinion of the Architect and the Engineer, not strong enough shall be replaced as directed. 1.17 ACCESS DOORS FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS A. Provide flush panel access doors with a 16 gauge steel frame and a 14 gauge steel door panel. B. Finish is to be primed painted steel. C. Provide concealed hinges which allow the door to open 175 degrees and have a removable pin. D. Provide access doors with a locked flush mounted vandal proof spanner head operated steel cams.' E. Provide 1-1/2 hour "B" label door for rated chase walls. F. Furnish masonry anchors for installation in masonry walls and metal lath wings with I casing bead for plaster installation. - ' BASIC ELECTRICAL ]REQUIREMENTS 16010-6 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 009-0260 G. Provide a minimum 2'-0" by 2'-0" access doors unless shown or noted otherwise on the drawings. H. Access doors for chase walls shall be mounted 16" off the finish floor. I. Access doors for electrical equipment shall be a minimum of 12" larger than . equipment all around. 1.18 RECULATORYREQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable Codes and Standards as follows: 1. Standard: a. Certain standard materials and installation requirements are described . by reference to standard specifications. These standards are as follows: NEMA ........National Electrical Manufacturers Association. UL ...............Underwriters Laboratories. ANSI-- .....American National Standards Institute. For additional standards and requirements see other sections of the specifications. Whenever a reference is made to a standard, installation and materials shall comply with the latest published edition at the time project is bid unless otherwise specified herein. 2. Codes and Rules: a. All material furnished and all work installed shall comply with the following codes as they apply to this project: -tl NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. 10 Regulations of the Florida Industrial Commission Concerning Safety. KO Applicable County, State, a nd Local Building Codes. -0 Local and State Fire Marshal Rules and Regulations. 10 Chapter 4A-47, Florida Administrative Code - Uniform Fire Safety Standards for Elevators. -0 Occupational Safety and Health Agency Standards (OSHA). -0 Florida State Board of Health Rules and Regulations. -0 Florida Building Code. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT'S 16010-7 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 Applicable codes shall be those adopted by the authority having jurisdiction at the time project is bid. 3. Permits, Fees and Inspections a. The Contractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all government fees, sales taxes and other costs, including utility connections or extensions, in connection with this work; file all necessary approvals of all governmental departments having jurisdiction. b. Obtain all required certificates of inspection for his work and deliver to the Owner/Engineer the same certificates before request for acceptance and final payment for the work. C. The Contractor shall include in the work, without extra cost to the Owner, any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. d. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid. 1.19 PROJECT/SITE CONDI'TI'ONS A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project ' conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections. Obtain permission of Architect/Engineer before proceeding. C. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable codes, standards, laws and regulations before submitting his bid. D. The scope of the work included under this Division of the Specifications shall include complete electrical systems as shown on the plans and as specified herein. The General Conditions and Special Conditions of these specifications shall form a part and be included under this Section of the Specifications. Provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, factory trained personnel, and any and all other items necessary to complete the electrical systems. All items of equipment are specified in the singular; however, provide and install the number of items of equipment as indicated on the drawings, and as required for complete systems. 1.20 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct Work in sequence under provisions of Division 1. BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-8 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CEmrER MATRIX PRod. 409-0260 1.21 LICENSE ' A. The Subcontracting Firm for the electrical and systems installation shall be licensed by the State of Florida and the local authorities, regularly engaged in the installation of electrical systems and other related equipment. The Subcontracting Firm shall be familiar with all local conditions including interpretations, codes and shall have at least 5 years of successful installation experience on similar projects of the same ' magnitude and scope. The Subcontracting Firm shall list at least three projects it has successfully completed over the last five years for proof of experience of this caliber. This list shall be included with submittals for review by Architect/Engineer. The Subcontracting Firm shall hold a Florida State Certified Electrical Contractor license for this project. The Subcontracting firm for the fire alarm system shall be a certified "EF" installer. 1.22 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ' A. This Contractor shall provide AutoCad as-built drawings and copies of each AutoCad file on CD before final payment will be issued. 1 ***END OF SECTION*** ' BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-9 ' (D ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010-10 @ ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 409-0260 SECTION 16060 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL I r? I 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical Demolition. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EL7ummENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company and school facility. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. ' ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIXX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 D. Existing Electrical Service and Distribution System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from the Owner at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. Relocate system to temporary office location. Extend all existing and temporary fire alarm circuit and control wiring to this location. F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify the Owner and telephone utility company at least one week before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. G. Furnish, install, and maintain temporary power and lighting for all areas and for trades. Lighting levels shall equal the existing condition prior to demolition work. 3.03 DEMOLI77ONANDEXTENSIONOFEXI377NGELECTRICAL WORK A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1 and this I Section. B. Prior to any demolition, this Contractor shall survey the building and paint a large red `R' on the equipment to be removed as coordinated with the architectural and HVAC plans and roofer. If any item(s) is incorrectly tagged, then this Contractor shall clean off the paint so there is no confusion. C. If any conflicts arise in the field as to which equipment, ductwork, etc., is to be removed, then this Contractor shall notify the Owner/Engineer in writing and shall include a sketch and description of the field conflict for further direction. D. In areas where demolition is required of this Contractor, then this Contractor shall be responsible for all phases of demolition, including, but not limited to, removal, storage, and reinstallation of items to remain. E. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. F. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. 0. Remove exposed, abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors and patch surfaces. 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AuGusT 12, 2009 ' AT LONG CENTER - MATRYx PROD. #09-0260 H. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if 1 conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed or remove boxes for wall to be patched. 1. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. J. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. K. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. L, Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. ' M. Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify N. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing ' electrical installations, or as specified. 0. Coordinate with roofer and assist in removal of all roof mounted electrical conduit t. devices, equipment, etc., to be removed as indicated on the roofing drawings and HVAC drawings. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR 1 A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1. ***END OF SECTION' ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REm[ODELING 16060-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. installation or provide access panel as appropriate. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER ?' - MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 , THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I I ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 16060-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. f] AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 16111 CONDUIT PART I GENERAL. 1.01 SECTION INCL UDES A. Metal Conduit. B. Flexible Metal Conduit. C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing. E. Nonmetal Conduit. F. Fittings and Conduit Bodies. 1.02 RELATED SEcnom A. Section 16130 ....... Boxes. B. Section 16170 ....... Grounding and Bonding. C. Section 16190 ....... Supporting Devices. D. Section 16195 ....... Electrical Identification. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3-Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. D. ANSI/NFPA 70--National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." F. NEMA TC 2-Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). G. NEMA TC 3 -PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. CON'DUrr 16111-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 1.04 DESIGNREQUIREMENTS A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 1-1/4 inches. B. Accurately record actual routing of all underground conduits. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. ' D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITREQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch homeruns, only with a maximum of 3-phase conductors, one (1) neutral (or more for computer/clean power and lighting circuits), and one (1) equipment ground. B. Underground Installations: 1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 40 PVC. 2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use thickwall nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 40 PVC. 3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use Schedule 40 PVC. 4. Minimum Size: Y4" (PVC). CoNDurr 16111-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 5. Install rigid steel, long radius elbows for conduits larger than V. Paint under slab conduit or poured-in concrete with a coat of Bitumastic, continuously and up through penetration of concrete slabs. C. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade, Concealed: Use rigid aluminum and liyuidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel and liyuidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, and electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel below eight feet and electrical metallic tubing above eight feet. 2.02 METAL CONDUIT A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSINNEMA FB l; all steel fittings. Z.03 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: ANSINNEMA FB 1. 2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: ANSUNEMA FB 1. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSINEMA FB 1; steel set screw type. 2.06 ]NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3. CONDUIT 16111-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. #09-0260 II PART 3 EXECUTION II 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers, E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. Exposed conduits shall only be run in mechanical and electrical rooms. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. All conduit run in public areas, classrooms, offices, restrooms, hallways, etc., shall be concealed. Saw cut walls and floor slabs. Make arrangements with General Contractor to patch all areas with no additional cost to Owner. M. Do not cross conduits in slab. N. Provide nominal 4" cast-in-place concrete curbs at floor mounted electrical distribution panel conduit connections for conduits stubbed-up from below slab. 0. Maintain minimum six inch (61 clearance between conduit and piping. P. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees Q. Q. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. R. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. CONDUIT 16111-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 S. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum. ' T. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. U. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit ' bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender or factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. IV. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. ' W. Provide fittings designed to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit and expansion joints crosses control , . , X. Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. Y. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. Z. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. AA. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. " AB. Install rigid steel long radius elbows, size 1-'/4 and larger, in below grade and first floor slab conduit runs. 1 ' " AC. Exterior conduit stub-ups shall be rigid galvanized coated with Bitumastic 1- /4 and larger. Concrete encase with a minimum 3" coverage from beginning of 90 degree ' elbow stub up to 3" above grade. AD. Maintain Manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radius on flexible ' conduit. AE. Flexible metal conduit shall not be over six feet (6) long. Motors three feet (Y) long. AF. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for a flexible connection only, not raceways. AG. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used in wet location and mechanical room for flexible connections only. ' AH. Install insulated bushing on all conduits. AI. Install grounded metal insulated bushing with lug on all mains, sub-feeders, switchboards, panelboards, transformers, chillers, disconnects, and equipment rated at 100 amps and above. CONDUIT 16111-5 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 A.T. Install and seal boxes and conduit in acoustical treated walls and ceilings per architectural acoustics specifications. 3.02 ,INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRDDUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods that are UL listed and tested. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified under Division 7. ***END OF SECTION*** CONDurr 16111-6 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 16120 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building Wire and Cable. B. Remote Control and Signal Cable. C. Power Limited Fire Protective Signaling Cable. D. Wiring Connectors and Connections. 1.02 RELATED SECTXONS A. Section 16111 ....... Conduit. B. Section 16130 ....... Boxes. C. Section 16195 .......Identification. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. B. NEMA WC5-Thermoplastic-insulated wire and cable for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Conductor sizes are based on copper. C. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Division 1. B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. BUILDING WmE AND CABLE 16120-1 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUs'r 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. #09-0260 C. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor: Copper, 412 minimum. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN, XHHW material rated 90 degrees C. 2.02 CLASS Y REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type TFFN, THHN. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 2.03 CLASS 2 OR 3 REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE A. Description: NEMA/ICEA WC5, thermoplastic insulated cable, individual insulated conductors twisted together, metallic shielded and covered with PVC jacket when installed in metal raceway. B. Conductor: Copper, stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 300 volts. 2.04 CLASS 1 AND NONPOWER LIMITED FIREPROTECTIVESIGNALING CABLES A. Description: NEMA/NFPA 70, type TFFN, THHN installed in metal raceway. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 2.05 POWER LIMITED FIRE PROTECTIVE SIGNALING CABLES A. Description: NEMA/NFPA 70, type TFFN, THHN installed in metal raceway. B. Conductor: Copper. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 u AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. 3.03 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire and cable (all types) in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: For feeders, branch circuits, and class 1 remote control circuits, use only building wire in raceway. For class 2 or 3 control cable and power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote control cables use only building wire in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cables run exposed. For power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote ' control cables use only building wire in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cable and power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway. ' E. Exterior Locations: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote control cables use only building wire run in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cables and fire protective signaling cables run in raceway. ' F. Underground Installations: For feeders, branch circuits and class 1 remote control cables use only building wire run in raceway. For class 2 or 3 remote control cables and for power limited fire protective signaling cables run in raceway. ' G. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions. ' B. Each computer/clean power receptacle and lighting circuits shall have a dedicated neutral conductor. C. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 12 AWG and smaller. ' BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-3 ® ICNGINE6RING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 D. Use stranded conductors for control circuits and for feeder and branch circuits No. 8 and larger. E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. I. All conductors size 46 and smaller shall be color coded insulation. Equipment grounding conductors #6 and smaller to have green or bare exterior finish per NEC 250-119(A). Grounded conductors (neutral) #6 and smaller to have a white or grey exterior finish per NEC 200-6. Conductors size #4 and larger shall be color code by use of colored plastic tape applied within 6" of each conductor end. All color coding shall be with the same color being used with its respective phase or bus through the entire job as follows: J. Grounding conductors shall be identified with a continuous outer finish that is either green, or green with one or more yellow stripe. K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. L. Protect exposed cable from damage. M. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. N. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. 0. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. P. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-4 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. ' S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor S AWG and smaller lices and ta s s . p , p T. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. U. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. ' V. Splice only in accessible junction boxes. 3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRDDUCTS A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. ' B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on Drawings. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CoNTRoL A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Division 1. B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. E. Verify continuity of each control circuit conductor. F. Verify proper phasing of conductors. ***END OF SECTION*** BUILDING WME AND CABLE 16120-5 V ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 11 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK g L 17 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16120-6 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 909-0260 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONXNCLUDES A. Wall and Ceiling Outlet Boxes. B. Floor Boxes. C. Pull and Junction Boxes. D. In-ground Cast Concrete Boxes. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16010 ....... Basic Electrical Requirements. B. Section 16141....... Wiring Devices. C. Section 16160 ....... Cabinets and Enclosures. D. Section 16195 ....... Electrical Identification. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSUNEMA OS 1-Sheet-steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. B. ANSVNFPA 70-National Electrical Code. C. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). 1.04 PROJECT CONDITTONS A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets to rough-in. C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Boxes 16130-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRM INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROs. 909-0260 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTLET Boxo A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. 2. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy deep type. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. 2.02 FLooR BoxEs A. Floor Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable. B. Material: Cast metal with brass cover plate. C. Shape: Round or Rectangular. D. Conform to regulatory requirements for concrete-tight floor boxes. E. Hubbell: B-2436, B-4233, and B-4333 Series. F. Walker: 880CS1, 880CS2, and 880CS3. G. Replace trims, covers, and device with new in existing floor boxes. 2.03 PULL AND ,IUNcnoN BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface- mounted junction box. 1. Material: Cast aluminum. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. C. In-Ground Cast Concrete Box: NEMA 250, Type 6, inside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting: 1. Material: Cast concrete or polymer concrete reinforced. 2. Cover: Nonskid cover with stainless steel cover screws capable of light vehicular traffic. BOXES 16130-2 ® ]ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AuGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 3. Cover Legend: Electric, telephone, fire alarm, CATV, etc. ' 4. Cut conduit openings using tools and methods recommended by the manufacturer. 5. In-ground pull boxes shall have solid bottoms with weep holes as manufactured by Quazite TO series or approved equal. 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 1 V PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LNSTALLATION A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. ' B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical appearance. ' C. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. ' E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods that are UL listed and tested. F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices with each other. ' G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished areas. H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls, provide minimum 12 inch separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. 1 I. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. ' J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. ' K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. BOXES 16130-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box. 0. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. Provide barriers to separate different voltage systems. P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets, Q. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. R. Set floor boxes level. S. Large Pull Boxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches (1 600 cubic centimeters) in volume or 12 inches (300 mm) in any dimension. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section 16160. 2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box. T. Identify boxes under provision or Section 16195. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with General Contractor and other trades. B. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit comer only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. C. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches and backsplashes. D. Position outlet boxes to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plan. 3.03 AwusnNG A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material. B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closure in unused box opening. ***END OF SECTION*** BOXES 16130-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. €109-0260 SECTION 16141 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECHONINCLUDES A. Wall Switches. B. Wall Dimmers. C. Receptacles. D. Device Plates and Decorative Box Covers. E. Floor Box Service Fittings. F. Time Switch. 1. 02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16130 ....... Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NEMA WD 1-General Purpose Wiring Devices. B. NEMA WD 5-Specific Purpose Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device Configurations. D. Federal Specification---W-FS-W-C-596 Series-General Specifications. E. Federal Specification--FS-W-S-896 Series-Toggle Switches. 1.04 SUBMITTALs A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. WIRING DEVICES 16141-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING W ELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Slater. 2. Hubbell. 3. G.E. 4. Leviton. 5. Pass & Seymour. 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy-duty AC only general-use snap switch. C. Device Body: Ivory plastic with toggle handle. D. Indicator Light: Separate pilot strap; red color lens. E. Locator Light: Lighted handle type switch; red color handle. F. Voltage Rating: 120-277 volts,'AC. G. Current Rating: 20 amperes. H. Motor Rating: Motor rated for fractional horsepower. I. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: Provide switch with thermal overloads to match motor nameplate rating, if motor does not have built-in overload protection. 2.02 WALL DIMMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Lutron. 2. Leviton. 3. G.E. 4. Pass & Seymour. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Type I semiconductor dimmer for incandescent lamps. C. Device Body: Ivory plastic with rotary knob and slider knob. WIRING ?DEVICES .?... 16141-2 C) ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL, CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER - MATRIX PRoi. #09-0260 D. Voltage: 120 volts. E. Power Rating: Match load shown on Drawings; 1000 Watts minimum. ' 2.03 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Slater. 2. Hubbell. 3. G.E. 4. Leviton. 5. Pass & Seymour. 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. B. Description: NEMA WD 1; heavy-duty general-use receptacle, 20 amp. C. Device Body: Ivory plastic for general use receptacles. Gray plastic for clean/data communications receptacles. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; type as specified and indicated. ' E. Convenience Receptacle: NEMA Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit requirements interru ter to meet regulator p . y 0. Childproof Receptacles: Shall be hospital grade with integral thermoplastic safety shutter to prevent access of foreign objects to the electrical contacts of the receptacle. ' 2.04 WALL PLATE4 A. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth stainless steel. ' 1. Slater. 2. Hubbell. ' 3. G.E. 4. Leviton. mour 5 Pass & Se . . y 6. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. ' WMMG DEvIcw 16141-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRO.1. 909-0260 B, Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device cover with straight key cylinder lock. 1. Slater. 2. Hubbell. 3. G.E. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.05 FLOOR MOUNTED SERVICE FITTINGS A. Flush Cover Convenience Receptacle: 1. Walker. 2. Hubbell. 3. Slater. 4. Steel City. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 6. Material: Brass 7. Configuration: Duplex flap opening. B. Flush Cover Combination Fitting: 1. Walker. 2. Hubbell. 3. Slater. 4. Steel City. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 6. Material: Brass. 7. Configuration: Duplex flap opening, C. Carpet or Tile Trim Ring: Brass. 1. Walker, 2. Hubbell. 3. Slater. 4. Steel City 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. W1Rmc DEvius 16141-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. e AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 409-0260 2.06 TIME SN7TC11E'S A. Manufacturers 1. Intermatic. 2. Paragon, 3. Tork. B. Furnish and install where shown time switches of the twenty-four hour or seven day type, powered by a self-starting synchronous motor, capable of being set for different on-off times each day of the week, to an operating accuracy of plus or minus 15 minutes of the desired time and with day omitting device. C. Time switch contacts shall be capable of switching 40 amperes per pole 1 continuously at rated voltage as indicated and shall have pole and switching arrangement as indicated on the drawings. D. Removable on-off trippers shall make possible multiple on-off periods. Separate manual on and off levers shall enable operation by hand without disturbing automatic settings. E. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1 for indoor flush use and NEMA 3R for outdoor use. NEMA 1 enclosure shall have combination 1/2" - 3/4" knock-outs on bottom and both sides. Provision shall be made for positive padlocking and/or sealing. F. Terminals shall be capable of receiving up to #8 AWG wire. G. Spring-driven reserve power shall be provided sufficient to operate the time switch contacts at least 16 hours after power failure. On restoration of power, time switch shall transfer to synchronous motor drive and automatically rewind reserve. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify conditions under provisions of Division 1. B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height. l d b ll l t d ill b l C. y covere y wa p a es. w e comp ete Verify wall openings are neatly cut an D. Verify floor boxes are adjusted properly. E. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. I WHUNG DEVICES 16141-5 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 2.03 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. 1. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. L. Assemble all devices and equipment shipped loose with furniture furnished by others as a part of this project. Provide all necessary wiring, plugs, conduit, etc., required to complete this work. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on Drawings. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter and coordinate with Architectural drawings. E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. WIRING DEVICES 16141-6 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 F. Install telephones and computer outlet boxes eighteen inches (18") above finished floor. G. Install telephone and computer outlet boxes six inches (6") above backsplash of counter, 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. V if th t h t l d i i C i d er y eac recep ac ev ce s energ . a e ze . D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. ***END OF SECTION*** 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 4 WIRING DEVICES 1614I-7 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I Ll 1 WIRING DEVICES 16141-5 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. ' I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 SECTION 16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Hinged Cover Enclosures. 8. Cabinets. C. Terminal Blocks and Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). B. ANSUNEMA ICS 1-Industrial Control and Systems. C. ANSYNEMA ICS 4--Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. ANSUNEMA ICS 6-Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI NEMA ICS 1. PART 2 PRODUCTS 201 HINGED CovER ENCLOSURES A. Construction: NEMA 250; Type 1 steel. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. C. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. D. Panel for Mounting Terminal Blocks or Electrical Components: 14 gage steel, white enamel finish. CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-1 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRix PROD. #09-0260 2.02 CABINETS A. Cabinet Boxes: Galvanized steel with removable endwalls, 24 inches wide, 24 inches high, 6 inches deep minimum. Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard painted matte white, for mounting terminal blocks. B. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, surface type with screw cover front, concealed hinge and flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel. 2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL listed. B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. D. Copper Ground Bar Strip with #6 Copper Grounding: Electrode conductor to building steel. 2.04 MANUFACTURERS A. Burndy #RK Series. B. Buss. C. Belden. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble enclosures and cabinets housing terminal blocks or electrical components in accordance with ANSI/NEMA ICS 6. B. Provide conduit hubs on enclosures. C. Provide protective pocket inside front cover with schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components within enclosure. CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-2 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT WNG CENTER MATRIX PROs. #09-0260 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures. C. Install trim plumb. ***END OF SECTION*** CABINETS AND ENCL )suREs 16160-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK , F I r CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16160-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusx 12, 2009 AT L,oNG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. Grounding Electrodes and Conductors. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors. C. Bonding. X.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70--National Electrical Code. 1.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Metal frame of the building. C. Concrete-encased electrode. D. Rod electrode. 1.04 PERFORMANCEREQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 10 ohms. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. 1.07 REGULATORYREQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROD ELECTRODE A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 3/4 inch. C. Length: 20 feet. 2.02 AfECHAN/CAL CONNECTORS A. Material: Bronze. 2.03 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Foundation Electrodes: 2 AWG. C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. C. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together. D. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. E. Bond together metal siding not attached to grounded structure; bond to ground. GRQUNDING AND BONDING M 16170-2 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT.L)NG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 F. Bond together each metallic raceway, pipe, and other metal objects. G. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, 'insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway, Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Interface with systems installed under Sections 16450 and 16610. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL f i h d or t g tness an A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections proper installation. B. Use suitable test instrument to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. Submit test results to Engineer for review and approval immediately upon completing the test and prior to energizing new utility service. The testing shall include sufficient ground resistant data readings from distances up 100 feet away from the ground triad in order to plot a distinct plateau between two distinctive slopes. I ***END OF SECTION*** 11 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER _ .? MATRIX PRO.I. #09-0260 1 a i THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK r GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AT LONG CENTER AUGusT 12, 2009 MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 16194 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART I GENERAL 1.01 1GVORK INCL UDED A. Conduit and Equipment Supports. B. Fastening Hardware. 1.02 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads. 1.03 QUALITXASSURANCE A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including wiring, which they carry. PART Z PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERULIFINISH A. General Locations: Steel equipment hangers, miscellaneous steel supports, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., not specified to be plated or coated shall be hot dipped galvanized with a minimum of 1.50 oz/ft. on all sides and all field cuts shall be zinc coated. B. Located In or Around Cooling Tower Yards: Pipe hangers, equipment supports, miscellaneous structure components, hardware, bolts, washers, nuts, screws, etc., shall be non-metallic polyester resin, vinyl ester resin, fiberglass, glass reinforced polyurethane, or 316 stainless steel. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-1 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIx PRor. 009-0260 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building structure using expansion anchors, beam clamps, or spring steel clips. B. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction. C. Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. E. Do not drill structural steel members. F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under all nuts. G. In wet locations install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads. H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off wall. 1. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and panelboards in stud walls. J. Safety of Overhead Materials, Fixtures, and Equipment: 1. Each troffer or surface mounted fixture (even if integral with the ceiling system) shall be independently secured by a secondary and supplementary system of one (1) separate wire from each of four (4) corners of the fixture to the building's structural framing above. 2. Each pendant mounted fluorescent light fixture shall be independently secured by a secondary and supplementary system of two (2) wires from the canopy and support system of each pendant leg of such fixtures to the building's structural framing above. 3. Each incandescent (or other fixture) shall be independently secured by a secondary and supplementary system of one (1) wire from the fixture can or canopy and support system of each such fixture to the building's structural framing above. 4. Other similar equipment (ceiling speakers, etc.) shall be similarly secured with an independent secondary and supplementary support system. I SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-2 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 i 1 1 1-1 11 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 Connection to structure, fixtures, equipment: a. Wire shall penetrate the cans or canopies of light fixtures and equipment or otherwise connect to such in a fool-proof and positive manner. Wire shall loop through structural framing members above. Wire shall be turned back onto itself and be given two (2) minimum full twists with at least one inch (1") tail remaining beyond the twist. Wire kinked or evidencing failure at twists or elsewhere shall be replaced. Wire shall be installed in a taut fashion (not slack). b. Wire rope and cable shall penetrate or pass through a portion of the fixture or equipment in a manner adequate to sustain the force developed by the fixture or equipment should it drop or fail. Wire rope and cable shall be either turned back into itself or continue into a complete loop until it lays beside-itself. Wire rope and cable shall be secured to itself with a minimum of two (2) each swagings or clips fully tightened. A minimum of one inch (1") tails shall protrude after tightening of the clamping device. C. Chain shall pass through a portion of the fixture or equipment in manner adequate to sustain the force should the fixture or equipment drop or fail, or should the primary support system fail or fall. Chain shall be secured to the fixture or equipment and to the building's structural framing by means of special links, shackles or fittings. Wire, chain, wire rope, and cable shall be installed as nearly vertical as possible and in no event at an angle of more than 45 degrees from the vertical. 6. Materials a. Chain, General Specifications: Equivalent to Campbell Chain Company's specified system of steel, electrically welded standard finish (do not galvanize or electroplate), in continuous lengths. Comply with Manufacturer's recommendations. b. Drop Forged Chain Fittings (eye bolts, pad eyes, inks, chain shackles, snaps, anchor shackles, swivels, turn buckles): Of the same materials and finish as the chain and of the same or greater working load limits, of the same manufacturer or as may be specifically recommended by the chain manufacturer. C. General Specifications for Wire: 8-gauge galvanized annealed steel wire (multiple strands of lesser gauge will not be considered acceptable). Each wire shall, itself, be looped through the building structural framing above and not to other wiring systems. The angle of the wires shall be kept as vertical as possible and not over 45 degrees from the vertical. SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-3 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 d. Cable for Exposed-to-Public-View-Applications: Where suspended chandeliers, light fixtures, or special equipment occurs, stainless steel flexible aircraft cable or stainless steel flexible marine cable, 302/304, as manufactured by Paulsen, or equal, or Sailbryte as manufactured by Macwhyte corrosion resistant stainless steel or better, right regular lay, in continuous lengths, shall be used. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. e. Forged and other stainless steel fittings for stainless steel aircraft or marine cable (turnbuckles, swagings, Nicro-Press sleeves, wire rope clips, use only in concealed positions), connecting links shoulder rivets, jaw fittings, eye fittings, lifting eyes, thimbles, swivels, eye nuts, heavy thimbles, clevis nuts, eye pads, shoulder pins); of same material, of same or greater working loads limits as the cable, of the same manufacturer or as recommended by the cable manufacturer, of type 304/316 electro-polished finish, drop forged, non-magnetic (when available for particular fitting). Manufactured by Merrill or equal. See Workmanship paragraph below. f. Stainless steel cable for loads (per cable) not exceeding 100 lbs.: 3/32" 7x19 with tensile load limit of 920 lbs. minimum. g. Stainless steel cable for loads (per cable) not exceeding 500 lbs.: 3/16" 7x19 with tensile load limit of 3,700 lbs. minimum. h. Workmanship: Stainless steel cable is required to be used only in areas where such is exposed to "public view" therefore only fittings designed for cold swaging or Nicro-Press fittings or swagless terminals such as Macwhyte Norseman Terminals are to be used whereby no wire ends, nuts, pins, or cotter keys, or clips are visible. Swaging shall be done only with a rotary swager (not a roll swager.) Manufacturer's recommendations and specifications shall be adhered to. Pertinent portions of the booklet Wire Rope Facts published by Banks Wire Rope and Sling, Inc. (available in Tampa) and Construction Care and Maintenance of Marine Rigging by Macwhyte Wire Rope Company (available at the Lazzerette Company) which may pertain also to stainless steel cable, shall be adhered to. ***END OF SECTION*** SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRo.i. #09-0260 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Nameplates and Tape Labels. B. Wire and Cable Markers. C. Conduit System Junction Box and Pull Box Color Coding. D. Receptacle Outlet Faceplate Labeling. E. Panelboard Circuit Index Labeling. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on a white background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type. C. Receptacle Outlet Faceplate Labeling: Labels shall be a permanent typewritten self adhesive labels with minimum 1/8" black lettering on clear or white background. Labels shall not exceed one line and not overlap the cover. D. Circuit Index: Provide heavy cardstock paper with permanent typewritten circuiting slipped into a clear plastic pocket fastened to the inside of the panelboard door. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 909-0260 B. Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets. Secure nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application, E. Receptacle Outlet Label: Lettering shall be typed -- not handwritten. The associated panelboard and circuit number designation shall be permanently labeled on the face of every power receptacle outlet faceplate (as labeled on the drawing). Labels shall be installed level. F. Typewritten panelboard circuit index cards shall be cut to fit door pockets. Provide one line per circuit and circuit breaker. Each line shall state the type of device or equipment the circuit serves with the location of the device or equipment (room number). For example; include the room number (s) served by the designated device or equipment. 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. 3.03 ]NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source. C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters In Panelboards, Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify circuit and load served, including location. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served. E. Transformers: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location. 3.04 CONDUIT SYSTEM, JUNCTION BOX, AND PULLROX COLOR CODING SCHEDULE A. Coordinate color of paint with Section 09900, Painting, to identifying conduit system junction boxes and pull boxes as scheduled below. B. Emergency Distribution System: Red. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PRoi. #09-0260 C. 480 Volt, Single and Three Phase System: Blue. D. 208 Volt, Single and Three Phase System: Black. E. Fire Alarm System: Red. F. Motor and Other Control Systems: Purple. G. Telephone System: Yellow. H. Television System: Brown. ' I. Security System: White. 3.05 !WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and at load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder ' number for power and lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams or equipment manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring. *** END OF SECTION I I I I ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoj. 909-0260 1 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I E I ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Disconnect Switches. B. Fuses. C. Enclosures. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSWL 1980--High-Intensity Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types. B. ANSI/UL 198F?--Class R Fuses. C. FS W-F-870----Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses). D. FS W-S-865-Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-Mounted. E. NEMA KS 1-Enclosed Switches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Include outline drawings with dimensions, and equipment ratings for voltage, capacity, horsepower, and short circuit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS-DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Square D. B. Siemens. C. Cutler Hammer. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. DISCONNECT SwrTCHES 16440-1 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD, FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. Fuse Clips: FS W-F- 870. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; as indicated on drawings. 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FUSES A. Bussmann. B. Gould-Schawmut. C. Littelfuse Tracor. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.04 FUSES A. Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSIIUL 198E, Class J for feeders and transformer loads and class RK 5 for motor loads. Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 250 or 600 volt. B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. C. Provide three (3) spare fuses for each different size and class of fuse being provided. Store in fuse cabinet (provided by Electrical Contractor) located by Architect/Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-2 ® L+ NGINEERING MATRIX, INC. r-, Li AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROB. #09-0260 C. Disconnect switch enclosures shall be NEMA Type 3R for exterior applications unless otherwise noted on the drawings, except for installations in or around Cooling Tower Yards, in which the enclosure shall be NEMA Type 4X, stainless steel, unless otherwise noted on the drawings. ***END OF SECTION*** DISCONNECT SWITCHES 16440-3 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. ?I LJ AGING WELL CENTER AUGOST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER' MATRIX PROB. 909-0260 1 a THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I 11 [1 1 DISCONNECT SWrrcHES 16440-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER - - MATRIX PRcu. 009-0260 SECTION 16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORKINCLUDED A. Power System Grounding. B. Communication System Grounding. C. Electrical Equipment and Raceway Grounding and Bonding. 1.02 SYS1 EMDESCRIPTION A. Ground the electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to metallic water service, concrete encased rebar, building steel, and to supplementary grounding electrodes. B. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to nearest effectively grounded metallic water pipe, concrete encased rebar, nearest effectively grounded building structural steel member, and separate grounding electrode. C. Provide communications system grounding conductor at point of service entrance and connect to separate grounding electrode. D. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems. E. Install lightning surge protection on all service entrances as shown on drawings. 1.03 SUSMITT m A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Division 1. B. Indicate location of system grounding electrode connections, and routing of grounding electrode conductor. ' SECONnARY GROuNwNG 16450-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LoNG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Ground Rods: Copper-encased steel, 5/8 inch diameter, minimum length 20 feet. B. Lightning surge protector to withstand a minimum of a Class "C" test. Refer to Section 16600. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Provide a separate, insulated equipment grounding conductor in feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing. B. Connect grounding electrode conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around water meter. C. Supplementary Grounding Electrode: Use driven ground rod on exterior of building. D. Use minimum 6 AWG copper conductor for communications service grounding conductor. Leave 10 feet slack conductor at terminal board or cabinet. E. Provide grounding and bonding at Utility Company's metering equipment and pad- mounted transformer in accordance with Section 16420. F. Install lightning surge protector per manufacturer's recommendations on all service entrances as shown on drawings and connect to ground bus. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper installation. B. Prior to energizing, measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground reference point using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. ***END OF SECTION*** ftcoNDARv GttoUNDWG 16450-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 AGING WELL. CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 SECTION 16485 CONTACTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTIONINCLUDES A. General Purpose Contactors. B. Lighting Contactors. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSINNEMA ICS 6-Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. B. NEMA ICS 2-Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. C. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Product Data: Include dimensions, size, voltage ratings and current ratings. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual locations of each contactor and indicate circuits controlled. 1.05 OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for replacing and maintaining coil and contacts. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. ' CONTACTORS 16485-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROS. #09-0260 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS-GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS A. Square D. B. General Electric. C. I.T.E. D. Cutler Hammer. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. Z.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. B. Coil Voltage: 120 or 277 volts, 60 Hertz. C. Poles: As scheduled. D. Size: As scheduled. E. Enclosure: ANSI/NEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Square D. B. General Electric. C. I.T.E. D. Cutler Hammer. E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. 2.04 LIGHTING CONTACTORS A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. B. Configuration: Electrically held, 2 wire control. C. Coil Voltage: 24, 120 or 277 volts, 60 Hertz as coordinated with mechanical and electrical drawings for intent of design for control method. D. Poles: As indicated. CONTACTORS 16485-2 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 E. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous loads. F. Enclosure: ANSUNEMA ICS 6, Type as required to meet conditions of installation. 11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Lighting and power contactors to be located in same room/space as electrical panel serving same equipment. Electrically held contactors shall not located in any space or room sensitive to the contactor holding coil noise output. ***END OF SECTION*** CONTACTORS 16485-3 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 1 1 L__J THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT ]BLANK r I_I 71 Li r CONTACTORS 16485-4 @ ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. r ACING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRO]. #09-0260 SECTION 16510 LUMINAIRES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SEC A. B. C. D. E. TION INCL ODES Luminaires and Accessories. Exit Signs. Ballasts. Lamps. Luminaire Accessories. X.02 REL4 1"ED SEC770NS A. Section 16130....... Boxes. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379-Electric Lamps-Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps-Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1-Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps-Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4-Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type). D. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. E. ANSI/NFPA 101----Life Safety Code. F. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. LUMINAIRES 16510-1 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROJ. 909-0260 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.05 PROrEcT REco,RD DocUMENTs A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Accurately record actual locations of each luminaire. 1.06 OPERATIONAND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of Division 1. B. Maintenance Data: Include replacement parts list. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three (3) years experience. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide two (2) of each plastic lens type installed. C. Provide one (1) replacement lamp for each type lamp installed. D. . Provide two (2) of each ballast type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish products as specified on Drawings. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. LUMINAIRES 16510-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. I AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 ' AT LONG CENTER T ^T _ MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 2.02 BALLASTS A. Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electronic ballast class "P" energy efficient type. Input current third harmonic content is held to below 13% of the input current. 2. Provide ballast suitable for lamps specified. 3. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. 4. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. 5. Ballast shall be fused and have class "A" sound rating. 6. Ballast shall not contain PCBs. B. High Intensity Discharge (HID) Ballast: I. Description: ANSI C82.4, as scheduled. 2. Provide ballast suitable for lamp specified. 3. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. 4. LS-NC Rating: NEMA LE2; equal to or less than ratings listed in Table C-1. 2.03 LAMPS A. Incandescent Lamp Inside-Frosted type. B. Fluorescent Lamp--Warm white all by the same manufacturer. ' C. Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: ANSI C78.379. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 Ex4mimnw A. Examine substrate and supporting grids for luminaires. B. Examine each luminaire to determine suitability for lamps specified. LUMINAIRES 16510-3 @ ]ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER T MATRIX PRO.1. #09-0260 ' 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. ' B. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. C. Support all luminaires independent of ceiling framing. D. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. E. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prohibit movement. F. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. ' G. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. ' H. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. 1. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. Provide extra tie ' wires from "T" ceiling bars to structure at each comer of fixture to support fixture. J. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lights, and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings. K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. L. Connect luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16130 using flexible conduit as indicated. M. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. N. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. ' 0. Install specified lamps in each luminaire and exit sign. P. Fixtures are not to be used as a raceway unless stamped for use as raceway by Manufacturer. Single fixture in lay-in ceilings shall not be used for raceway and ' shall be connected to an outlet box located within 6-0" of fixture with flexible 3/8" conduit or 3/8" MC cable. #14 THHN/THWN is OK for single fixture connections. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper ' connection and operation. LumiNAm Es 16510-4 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. ' 11 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 ' AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 3.04 ADJUSUNG A. Adjust Work under provisions of Division 1. B. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. C. Adjust exit sign directional arrows as indicated. D. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean work under provisions of Division 1. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide minimum of two (2) hours demonstration of luminaire operation. C. Light bulb replacement guarantee shall be limited to ninety (90) days after the date of Substantial Completion. The Electrical Contractor shall, at the end of this period, inspect the work and replace all burned out or defective light bulbs. ***END OF SECTION*** LummAnms 16510-5 @ ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST I2, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. 1$09-0260 Il LJ 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK I 71 LUMINAIRES 16510-6 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. ' AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PRoJ. #09-0260 ' T SECTION 16720 FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 1 PART I GENERAL ' 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES ' A. Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection Systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16120 ....... Building Wire and Cable. B. Section 16130 ....... Boxes. C. Section 16195 ....... Electrical Identification. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70--National Electrical Code. B tion NFPA 72-1999--N l Fi Ala C d . a a re rm o e. C. ANSI A117.1---1986-American National Standard for Building and Facilities ' Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. D. NFPA 101-Life Safety Code. ' E. NEC Article 760--Fire Protective Signaling Systems. F. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. G. Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction-1994. H. Florida Fire Prevention Code. ' 1.04 REGULA TOR Y REQUIREMENTS A. System; UL listed. ' B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. UL Listed-UL 1076. FutE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION Sysum 3 16720-1 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PRoa. #09-0260 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide new fire alarm devices compatible with the existing fire alarm system as required to provide an electronically operated fire alarm system as described herein and shown in the plans. All units on the fire alarm system shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. for fire alarm use, and the control panel shall bear the UL label. The system shall be installed in accordance with requirements set by National Electrical Code and in compliance with applicable provisions of Standard 72 published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). B. System's Connection: The control panel shall be capable and wired so that any one or multiples of fire alarm devices, upon activation, shall sound alarm throughout the entire facility. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems with five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in smoke detection and fire alarm systems with five years experience, certified by Florida State Licensing Board as fire alarm and security system installing contractor. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Division 1. B. Provide wiring diagrams, point to point with voltage drop calculations, data sheets, and equipment ratings, layout, dimensions, finishes, and battery calculations. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Division 1. D. Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Division 1 that system meets or exceeds specified requirements, certification per NFPA 72. E. Provide training for two (2) people on the operation, maintenance, and repair of the system at the Contractor's expense. Training shall be certified by the manufacturer and be at different times for each person. Include transportation, room and board where needed. . 1.08 PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS A. Submit documents under the provisions of Division 1. B. Include location of end-of-line devices. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit data under provisions of Division 1. FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 16720-2 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 ' AT LONG CENTER - ?? MATRIX PROJ. #09-0260 B. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures, with parts ' list. Three (3) copies of complete troubleshooting and repair manuals. C. Include manufacturer representative's letter stating that system is operational. D. Maintain system for a minimum of one (1) year, after complete acceptance by the Owner, in accordance with NFPA 72. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Division 1. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Division 1. 1.11 ExTRA MATERIALS A. Provide spare parts under provisions of Division 1. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The system design is based on the existing Busch D7412 fire alarm control panel and existing zone devices. All new devices provided as part of this project shall be compatible with the existing to remain devices. Notification devices installed in areas west of Room 102 shall be voice evacuation devices compatible with the ' existing system. . B. If equipment of another manufacturer is to be submitted for approval as equal, the Contractor shall, at the time of bid, list all exceptions taken to these Specifications, all variances from these Specifications, and all substitutions of operating capabilities or equipment called for in these Specifications and forward said list to the Engineer. Any such exceptions, variances, or substitutions which were not listed at the time of bid and are identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment. Final determination of compliance with these Specifications shall rest with the Engineer, who, at his discretion, may require proof of performance. ' PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OFRREALARMSYSTEM ' A. Install fire alarm system as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer s written instructions and complying with applicable portions of NEC and NECAs "Standard of Installation." Fm ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 16720-3 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 , B. Wiring Systems and Materials 1. Wiring shall be in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code and NFPA Regulation #72. The fire alarm system, including components and wiring shall be completely installed and wiring shall be properly tagged and color coded. The Electrical Contractor shall make final connections as shown and required by the equipment manufacturer's wiring instructions. Use 14 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm detection/initiating and signal circuit conductors. Install wiring in conduit along with continuous ground wire. Provide wiring of adequate size to prevent voltage drop. Submit load calculations for each signal circuit and zone circuit indicating actual voltage drop and proper size conductors. 3. Color Code-the color codes of the fire alarm cabling shall conform with the existing system. 4. All junction box covers shall be painted red and all lengths of conduit shall have at least one red stripe. 5. Shutdown relays and control equipment shall be mounted within three feet of controlled device. Label all fan shutdown relay modules with an affixed nameplate. Relays to be located directly adjacent to motor starters. 6. Visual flashing lamps shall be wired on a separate circuit from horns and other indicating and initiating devices. 7. Horn and strobe appliance circuits shall be loaded a maximum of 70% of the circuit's operating capacity. 8. Power supplies to be provided with a minimum 30% spare capacity. 3.02 QUAHTYASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance---Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm and detection system components and accessories. B. UL Compliance and Labeling-Provide fire alarm and detection system components which are UL listed and labeled. Installation is to be by a UL listed installer. C. Miscellaneous Compliance-The fire alarm system is to be installed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's written instructions and complying with all applicable portions of the NECAs "Standard of Installation" and all local codes and ordinances. FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 16720-4 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. ?11 1 1 1 1 AGING WELL CENTER AuGusT 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PRo,i. #09-0260 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect relays and signals for malfunctioning, and where necessary adjust units for proper operation to fulfill project requirements. Any final adjustment shall be performed by specially trained personnel in direct employ of manufacturer of fire alarm and detection system equipment. The Manufacturer's representative shall perform a quality inspection of the final installation and, in the presence of the Electrical Contractor, fire marshal and Owner's Representatives, shall perform a complete functional test of this system. A system certification verifying the proper system operation shall be required prior to acceptance by the Owner. B. Testing: The Contractor shall perform all electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment manufacturer's form and National Fire Protection Association Standard 72. All test and report costs shall be in the contract price. A checkout report shall be prepared by the installation technicians and submitted in triplicate, one (1) copy of which will be registered with the equipment manufacturer. The report shall include, but not be limited to: O A complete list of equipment installed and wired. O Indication that all equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms with these specifications. O Tests of individual zones, as applicable. O Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each installed detector. O Response time on thermostats and flame detectors (if used). O Technician's name, certificate number and date. O Voice Evacuation Speaker Audible Intelligence Testing: This test shall be accomplished with audible intelligence meter on a 10 foot by 10 foot grid over the entire floor space of the areas covered by voice evacuation. All readings shall exceed the equivalent of a Common Intelligibility Scale (CIS) score of 0.70. These grid locations and readings shall be recorded in a graphic document and shall be included in the overall fire alarm testing report package. C. Documentation: After completion of the tests and adjustments listed above, the Contractor shall submit the following information to the Owner. A copy of the test report described in this specification and a Certificate of Compliance prepared as per National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 Chapter 2, Section 2-2.4, and State Fire Marshal's Rule 4A-48 to be complete at final test. Affixed to FACP a standard service tag, as described in rule 4A-48 for fire alarm contractors by the Office of the State Fire Marshal. FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 16720-5 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT KONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 Final tests and inspection shall be held in presence of the Owner and Engineers' representatives and to their satisfaction. The Contractor shall supply personnel and required auxiliary equipment for this test without additional cost. To assure that wire size, power supply, number of devices on a circuit, etc. are suitable to support 100% of devices being in alarm or operated simultaneously, this test shall include the following: Place all sensors and monitor modules in alarm. Each shall display it's address or zone and alarm condition. At least the first five (5) devices on each circuit shall also have their alarm LEDs lighted. Operate all control modules for the alarm or operated condition. Each module shall display it's address and condition. Reset all alarmed and operated devices. The panel shall display the address or zone of any off-normal devices. Test a representative number of sensors for alarm verification by momentarily testing for alarm. The sensor shall not initiate an alarm. Then, test by placing the sensor in alarm such that it remains in alarm for the selected verification time. The sensor shall initiate an alarm. Acceptance of the system shall also require a demonstration of the stability of the system. This shall be adequately demonstrated if the system operates for a ninety (90) day test period without any unwarranted alarms. Should unwarranted alarm(s) occur, the Contractor shall readjust or replace the detector(s) and begin another ninety (90) day test period. As required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall recheck the detectors using the fire test after each readjustment or replacement of detectors. This test shall not start until the Owner has obtained beneficial use of the building under tests. If the requirements provided in the paragraph above are not completed within thirty (30) days after beginning the tests described therein, the Contractor shall replace the system with another acceptable manufacturer and the process repeated until acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide three (3) sets of signed and sealed submittals to be accepted upon the Engineer's approval. A statement of guarantee including date of termination and name and phone number of the person to be called in the event of equipment failure. Individual factory issued manuals containing all technical information on each piece of equipment installed. In the event that such manuals are not obtainable from the factory, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to compile and include them. Advertising brochures or operational instructions shall not be used in lieu of the required technical manuals. FIRE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 16720-6 0 ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. 1 1 1 t AGING WELL CENTER AUGUST 12, 2009 AT LANG CENTER MATRIX PROJ_ X109-0260 One (1) copy of all approved shop drawings, instruction sheets, operating instructions, and spare parts bulletins. A training session, for personnel selected by the Owner, shall be presented by a fully qualified, trained representative of the equipment manufacturer who is thoroughly knowledgeable of the specific installation. Provide a written description of standard control panel functions and user instructions at each FACP. These instructions shall be written in standard laymen's English so that an unfamiliar operator can accomplish basic functions such as reset. 3.04 SYSTEM GUARANTEE A. All components, parts, and assembles supplied by the Manufacturer shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months commencing the date of Final Acceptance by the Fire Department or Substantial Completion, whichever is later. Warranty service shall be provided by a qualified factory-trained representative of the equipment manufacturer during normal working hours. The representative must be able to respond to warranty calls within twelve (12) hours, including weekends, of notice whether oral or written. B. Provide, within one (1) year after final acceptance, testing as per National Fire Protection Association 72, which shall consist of: 1. Regularly and systematically examine, adjust and clean all the electrical and mechanical components of waterflow switches as required by code. 2. Test and Written report which certify that all initiating devices have been tested and which indicate the result of the inspection. 3.05 LIGHTNING PROTECTION A. Isolated Loop Circuit Protector (ILCP) 1. Furnish and install an isolated loop circuit protector device on all fire alarm (initiating device circuit), (signaling line circuit), (audio riser), (telephone riser or circuit) wiring, (including shields), which extends beyond the main methods (walkways, bridges, or other above ground connectors). 2. The ILCP shall be located as close as practical to the point at which the circuits leave or enter a building. 3. The ILCP grounding conductor shall be a No. 12 AWO wire having a maximum length of 28 feet to be run in as straight a line as practical and connected to a building ground electrode system (unified ground) per the (1987) National Electrical Code. ' 4. The ILCP furnished shall have a line to line response time of less than one (1) nanosecond capable of accepting greater than 2,000 amps (35 joules each line) to earth. Shield to earth current shall be 5,000 amps maximum. FmE ALARM AND SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 16720-7 C ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. AGING WELL CENTER AUGUsT 12, 2009 AT LONG CENTER MATRIX PROD. #09-0260 5. The ILCP shall be protected by a high dielectric insulating material and of small enough size to mount in a standard 4" square 2-1/8" deep electrical box. 6. Spark gap devices or devices incorporated in or installed within the fire alarm control panel in lieu of the specified ILCP are not acceptable. B. Provide Ditek DTK Series or equivalent Isolated Loop Circuit Protectors. ***END OF SECTION*** IFME ALARM AND SmoKE DETECTION SYSTEMS 16720-8 ® ENGINEERING MATRIX, INC. C Greenfield EEnAronmerdal REPORT OF THE NESHAP INTERIOR RENOVATION SURVEY, SAMPLING AND EVALUATION OF ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS at the LONG RECREATION CENTER AND UPARC BUILDING SELECT RENOVATION AREAS 1501 N. BELCHER ROAD CLEARWATER, FLORIDA. March 24, 2009 GE Project Number 1051-1029 SubMitted to: City Of Clearwater Parks And Recreation Department Mr. Leroy Chin P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, Florida 33758 Prepared by: Greenfield Environmental, Inc. 432 3'd Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 432 31d Street North, St. Petersburg, FL 33701 • Phone: 727.896.1266 - Fox: 727.896.1566 GE NOW No. 1151-IM EXECUTIVE SUMMARY The survey and laboratory analysis conducted at the Long Recreation Center and UPARC Building select interior renovation areas located at 1501 N. Belcher Road in Clearwater. Florida indicated that of the one hundred and seventeen (117) samples collected, none of the materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in amounts greater than one (1) percent. As such, no specialized asbestos handling or disposal techniques are required prior to or during interior renovation activities. TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page 1.0 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................1 2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION ....................... ...........................................................2 3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS ............................................3 4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS ...........................................4 5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS .............................................................................5 6.0 CONCLUSIONS ......................................................................................................10 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS APPENDIX B- CERTIFICATIONS APPENDIX C- FLOOR PLAN I GE Project No. 1051.1029 1.0 INTRODUCTION A survey for asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) was conducted by Greenfield Environmental, Inc. (GE) at the Long Recreation Center and UPARC Building select interior areas located at 1501 N. Belcher Road in Clearwater, Florida . The survey was performed on March 11 and March 13, 2009 by Nick Ellerman and Jeff Summers, EPA Accredited Inspectors for GE. Greenfield Environmental, Inc. is a Florida Licensed Asbestos Consulting Firm with a corresponding license number of ZA-0000268. The survey was conducted in order to identify any asbestos-containing materials which may exist prior to interior renovation activities in accordance with the National Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Regulation. More specifically,. our scope of services for this project consisted of the five following steps: - Structure Walk Through and Observations, - Bulk Sampling of Suspect ACMs, - Polarized Light Microsc?py (PLM) Analysis of Bulk Samples, - Hazard Assessment and Evaluation, and - Final Report Development. The findings of this report represent Greenfield Environmental, Inc.'s (GE) best professional judgement and no other warranty is expressed or implied. This report is intended only for the use of the CITY OF CLEARWATER. The contents should not be relied upon by any other parties without the expressed written consent of GE. 1 1 . S GE ftled No. 1051-1029 2.0 FACILITY DESCRIPTION The Long Recreation Center and UPARC' Building consist of two-story concrete block structures located on a slab. Ceilings were finished with drop-in calling the panels, textured ceiling material and drywall. Floors were finished with vinyl floor tile, bare concrete and ceramic tile. The HVAC ductwork observed consists of metal ductwork and fiberglass ductboard with flex-duct leading to the ceiling diffusers. Roof and building exteriors were not included In the scope of this survey. I The interior renovation areas consist of the following areas: Long Recreation Center -11 i Floor, Areas #1 through #9, Long Recreation Center - 2"° Floor, CFY Storage Room, UPARC Building -11 Floor, Areas #10 through #18, and UPARC Building - 2"d Floor, Areas #19 through #20. Thb floor plan for the buildings, found in Appendix C,- contains all renovation areas included in the scope of this survey. GE did not perform destructive sampling activities at mirrors, doors,.waik-in coolers, hood vents and cafeteria movie projector screens at the occupied renovation areas. These materials will need to be inspected prior to renovation activities that may disturb these materials. f F 2 I GE Project No. 10514029 3.0 SURVEY METHODS AND LABORATORY ANALYSIS The sampling. conducted in this asbestos survey was performed in accordance with Title 40, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Part 763 for suspect ACMs. The EPA regulations require that sample locations be randomly selected. All suspect asbestos-containing materials and PACM (materials presumed to contain asbestos under the OSHA Asbestos Rule, 29 CFR 1810) were identified and samples of each different material were obtained. I The bulk sampling procedure utilized for collection of suspect samples required the establishmentof homogeneoussampling areas. A homogeneous sampling area Is defined . as an area of friable or non-friable material of similar type that appeared to be applied or installed during the same general period of time. All sample locations were identified with numbers corresponding to those listed'in Section'5.0 " Description of Materials" of this report. , Samples which were collected from these pre-determined homogeneous sampling areas were labeled and transported to Air Quality Environmental, Inc. (NVLAP No. 200757-0) 1. for analysis. All samples were analyzed using EPA approved Polarized Light Microscopy ^ (Pl-M) coupled with dispersion staining. Properties such as refractive indices, birefringence, sign of elongation and extinction angle are unique to crystalline asbestos forms and are used to identify the type of asbestos mineral as chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, anthophyllite, tremolite or actinolite. Percentages of the identified types of asbestos are determined by visual estimation.. Attempts are made to mix the sample thoroughly to provide a more accurate percentage. Any material containing greater than one percent (1%) by weight of any type of asbestos is considered by the EPA to be an ACM and if disturbed must be handled according to specific regulations. . 3 GE Project No. 9051-9025 4.0 SUSPECTED ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS The following is a summary of the materials sampled and tested during the survey and evaluation of the interior renovation areas: • Ceiling Tile • Fireproofing • Vinyl Floor Tile with Mastic • Carpet Glue • Vinyl Cove Molding • Drywall, Tape & Compound • Wall and Ceiling Texture • Duct Mastic • Wall Mastic • Sink Mastic • Pipe Wrap 4 GE prof d No. 1051-1029 5.0 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIALS The fol Is a descrlp0on of the materials sampled at the Interior renovation areas: ?n9 A 1 1 1 I U 11, } D - LONG RECREATION-CENTER Area #1- Cafeteria 01 White'2' X 2' Dot A 1 02 Furrow Ceiling Tiles Asbestos Friable Good ----- 03 Located at Select Ceiling Detected Areas Throughout 04 Black Vinyl Cove Molding . -No Non- 2 05 Located at Base of Wall Asbestos Friable Good ----- 06 Areas Throughout Detected 07 Gray 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor No Non- . 3 08- `Tile with. Mastic Located Asbestos Friable Good ----- 09 at Floor Areas Detected 4 10 11 Tan Wall Mastic Located No Asbestos Non- Good ----- 12 at Select West Wall Areas Detected Friable ., 13 White 2' X 2' .Rough No 5 14 Pattern Ceiling Tiles Asbestos Friable Good ----- 15 Located at Select Ceiling Detected . Areas Throughout 16 Gray Fireproofing Located No. 6 17 Above Ceiling Areas Asbestos Friable Good ---- 18 Throughout Detected Area #2 - Kitchen 19 'White Texture Located at No 7 20 Ceiling and Bathroom Asbestos Friable Good ---- 21 Wall Areas Detected 22 Black Pipe Wrap Located No $ 23 on Copper Lines at Chiller Asbestos Non- Good ----- 24 Units Inside Walk-In Detected Friable - Cooler Areas Black Foam Rubber Plpe 25 Wrap Located on Copper No Non- 9 26 Lines at Chiller Units Asbestos Friable Good _ ---- 27 Inside Walk In Cooler Detected 1 11 Areas . GE PF*01 No. 10514029 •ti4 •3 28 Drywall, Tape & No 10 28 Compound Located at Walt Areas Throughout Ap Asbestos , -: Friable Goad 30 Areas . Detected 31 White Pipe Wrap Over NO 11 32 Fiberglass insulation Asbestos Non- Good ----- 33 Located on Chilled Water Detected Friable Lines Above Ceiling Areas 34 Gray Mastic Located at No . Non- 12 35 Ductwork Above Calling Asbestos Friable Good ----- 36 Areas Detected Areas #4 & #5 - Men's and Women's Loc ker Rooms 13 37 38 White Texture Located at No Asbestos Friable Goad 39. ..... Ceiling Areas Detected ' Area #3 - Dol phin Roorn 40 Blue 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor No Non- 14 41 Tile with Mastic Located Asbestos Friable Good ?--- 42 at Floor Areas Detected 43 Black Vinyl Cove Molding No Non- 15 44 Located at Base of Wall Asbestos Friable Good ---- 45 Areas Detected 46 White 2'X 2' Dot & No 16 47 Furrow Ceiling Tiles Located at Ceiling Areas Asbestos Friable Good ----? - 48 Throughout Detected 49 Drywall; Tape & 17 5U Compound Located at Wall Areas Throughout All Asbestos Friable Good ----- 51 Areas Detected *Area # 7 - Concessions 52 Blue 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor No Non- 18 53 Tile with Mastic Located Asbestos Friable Good ---- 54 at Select Floor Areas Detected 55 Red 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor No ' 19 56 Tile with Mastic Located Asbestos Non Friable Good ---- 57 at Select Floor Areas Detected 1 t CJ 1 1 . GE Project No. 1051-1088 ism= 4 Area #6. Pool Pump and Chemical Room 58 Brown Cloth Pipe Wrap No 20 59 Located on Pipes at Asbestos NoeGood ---- 60 Ceiling Areas Detected Friable UPARC BUILDING Area #14 - Exterior Restrooms and Janitor Closet Drywall, 21 62 Compound Located at Asbestos Friable Good --- 63 Wall and Ceiling Areas Detected Throughout Building Areas 010 -13 - Two Classrooms, Hallway and Mechanical Room Gray with Dark Gray 64 Speckles 12" X 12" Vinyl No Non- 22 65 Floor Tile with Mastic Asbestos Friable, Good --- 66 Located at Select Floor Detected Areas - 67 White With Tan Speckles .23 fib 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor Ilia Asbestos Non- Good ---- 69 -with Mastic Located at Detected Friable Select Floor Areas Gray with White Speckles 70 Spots 12" X 12" Vinyl No Non. 24 71 Floor Tile with Mastic Asbestos Friable Good ----- 72 Located at Select Floor Detected Areas 73 Black Vinyl Cove Molding No 25 74 Located at Base of Wail Asbestos Nom Good 75 Areas Detected Friable 76 White Z X V Dot & No 26 77 Furrow Ceiling Tiles Asbestos Friable Good ---- 78 Located at Ceiling Areas Detected Throughout White Pipe Wrap Over 27 gp Fiberglass Insulation Asbestos Non- Goad ----- 81 Located on Chilled Water Detected Friable Lines Above Celli Areas t 7 F GE Project No. 1051-1029 82 White With Blue Speckles No " 28 •83 12" X. 12 Vinyl Floor Tile Asbestos Non- Good ---- 84 with Mastic Located at Detected Friable Select Floor Areas Areas #16-18 -. Four North Classrooms 29 86 Tan Carpet Glue Located Asbestos Non- Good ---- 87 Underneath. Carpet Areas Detected Friable 88 Gray Vinyl Cove Molding No Non- 30 89 Located at Base of Wall Asbestos Friable Good ----- 90 Areas Detected 31 91 92 Pink Sink Mastic Located No Asbestos Non- Good ----- 93 Underneath Sink Areas Detected Friable 94 Maroon Vinyl Cove No Nan- 32 95 Molding Located at Base Asbestos Friable Good 96 -of Wall Areas Detected , 97 Yellow 12"X 12" Vinyl No Non- 33 98 Floor Tile with Mastic Asbestos Friable Good. 99 Located at Floor Areas Detected 100 Gray Fireproofing Located .No 34 101 Above Ceiling Areas Asbestos Friable Good ??- 102 Throughout Detected 103 White with Gray Speckles No 35 104 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor Tile Asbestos Non- Good 105 with Mastic Located at Detected Friable #16 and 17 Floor Areas White With Tan Speckles 106 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor Tile . No 'Non- 36 107 with Mastic Located at Asbestos Friable Good 108 #18 Floor Areas Detected (Top Layer) Tan 12" X 12" Vinyl Floor 109 Tile with Mastic Located No Non- 37 110 at #18 Floor Areas Asbestos Friable Good 111 (Bottom Layer) Detected 8 OE Pro?ct rfo. 7054-1029 purposes. *All other suspect materials in Area #7-Concessions were inspected and sampled as part of GE Report #1051-1020 and were determined to not be asbestos containing materials. **No suspect materials were viewed or sampled In Area M-Pool Storage Room, Area #9-Lifeguard Storage Room and the 2"d Floor CFY Storage Room. 9 GE PMjGd No. 1061-1029 6.0 CONCLUSIONS, The surveyand laboratoryaanalysis conducted at the Long Recreation Center and UPARC Building select interior areas located at 1501 N. Belcher Road in Clearwater, Florida indicated that of the one hundred and seventeen (117) samples collected, none of the materials sampled were found to contain asbestos in amounts greater than one (1) percent. As such, no specialized asbestos handling or disposal techniques. are required prior to or during Interior renovation activities. GE did not perrorm destructive sampling activities at mirrors, doors, walk-in coojers, hood. vents and cafeteria movie. projector .screens at the, occupied renovation areas.. These materials will need to be inspected prior to renovation activities that may disturb.these materials. t 10 I PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS The discussions and conclusions contained in this asbestos survey have been prepared and reviewed by the following environmental professionals. Nicholas Eilerman Project Manager AHERA Inspector #7ME081378011003 ichael enburg, PE Florida Licensed Asbestos Consultant #EA0000041 4 e APPENDIX A LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS LUA4 "On", T I X9335. ntei?utcuaurl, dsrelo,Ftnxidrr33?92 (WY393P M FAX 3Rt1.091 Client Name: Greenfield Environmental Project MWke: 10514029 CRY of Clearvmter 432 3rd Street North Long Center SL Petersburg, Florida 33701 Date Analyzed: March 18, 2009 Asbestos, Bulk Sa Analysis Test Method: PLUM / DS - EPA Method 6MR-93M 16 Lab # Client le T n 96 Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders 86422 4 ng Tile / tan HAD 60% Celurk)se 40% Perlite and Binders 10% Mineral Wool 86423 2 Ceiling Tile i* / tan NAD 5D% Cellulose 40% PerGte and Binders 10% Mineral Wool 88424 3 Ceiling Tile while / tan NAD W% Cellulose 40% Perlite and Binders 1 D% Mineral V1Aao1 88425 4 Cove Base bW*vlnyl NAD 10D% Carbonates and Binders n nrrastlo NAD 100% Binders 86426 5 Cove Base btackvinyl NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders tan nmtb HAD 100% Binders 88477 B Cove Base black vinyl NAD 100% Carbonates and. Binders tanirmllo ..NAD 100% Binders 86428 7 floor Tile blue b7e NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders allow mastic NAD 100% Binders 86428 8 Floor7ite blue file NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders flaw mastic NAD 100% Binders 86430 9 now Tile blue lute NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastic NAD 100% Binders 86431 10 Mastic yellow NAD 100% Binders 88432 11 Mastic yellow NAD 100% Binders 86433 12 Mastic yellow MAD 100% Binders 86434 13 Ceiling rile white / tan NAD 40% Cellulose 40% Pedile and Binders 20% Mineral Wool 86435 14 iling T9e while / tan NAD 40% Cellulose 40% Perite and Binders 20% Mineral Wool $eruitfir•i' _ ..- ?IanytryM"" AWN°grasx X* WOO V4 ?-W:, R" hr Y f 9ee?7abt6oa? uee? euwror??xt .. ?4ht sand +? a atIRIP*mreR?.' lkrseNaas? bvmmw ••'4gra'°eagao!s??..?.i? __. ! a fl4iisr Lab File Number: 14258 NVLAP Lab No_ 200789.0 Analysis Pages 1 of 8 Client Name: Greenfield Environmental Project Names 105i4029City of Clearwater 432 31d Street North Long Center 5t Petersburg, Florida 33701 Date Analyzed: Mardi 18, 2009 Asbestos, Bulk Sam a sls Test Method: PLM I DS . EPA Method OM R4WIl8 Lab # Client# Sample T Descfl tort % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders 85436 15 Calling Tile white / tan MAD 40% Cellulose 40% Penile and Binders 20% Mineral Wool 86437 16 Insulation tan, fibrous. MAD 95% Mineral %lbol 5% Carbonates and Birders 66438 17 Insulation tan, fibrous MAD 9546 Mineral Wool 5% Carbonates and Binders 88439 18 Insulation tan, fibrous MAD 95% Mineral Vdbol 5% Carbonates and Binders 86440 19 Surfadrq Material rite MAD 100% Quartz and Binders 86441 20 Surfacing Material white MAD 11.00% Quartz-and Binders 86442 21 Surfacing Material de MAD 100% Quartz and Binders ' 86443 22 Mastic black MAD 10% Cellulose 80% Bitumen and Binders 10% Glass Fibers 86444 23 Mastic black MAD 10% Cellulose 80% Bdumen and Binders 10% Glass Fibers 86445 24 Mastic black MAD 10% Cellulose 80% Bitumen and Binders 10% Glass Fibers 86446 25 Insulation Material black NAD 100% Synthetic Foam 88447 26 Insulation Material black MAD 100% Synthetic Foam OM48 27 Insulation Material block MAD 10096 Synthetic Foam .66449 28 Drywall System joint compound MAD 10096 Carbonates and Binders mat layer MAD 100% Cellulose wader layer MAD 12% Glass Fibers 84% Gypsum and f3'inders 4% Cellulose 88460 29 Dgwall System Joint oompound MAD 100% Carbonates and-Binders mat layer MAD 100% Cellulose powder layer MAD 12% Glass Fibers 84% Gypsum and Binders 4% Cellulose 86451 30 Drywall System joint compound MAD 10096 Carbonates and Binders mat layer MAD 100% Cellulose powder layer MAD 12% Glass Fibers 84% Gypsum and Binders F' cs:m were Crams Sec tlrltaar. ' 4% Cellulose ' r?e?e;ounteneii?c?d:+??iciiraJ'evru?f 1'nv`? d1icB'tr?t ! ?e>r tr( a1 ervgg [4'if, ISMT*hw4,3:iD esu,>at ?ook rr C . , oa?ei r1.u6pati4 lakeit It"4?solr s,. ?iY vrxlrwrrer t1a] muupr?? rii+amhav?castafir? A?'Y}dpye t ro ?m b: t ai a 3bbi? . r-?u'??ra pE6t*?!er>,a?Eac?amebpod?r. •ohw?l???o!d?n!5-roYhwrtnk; (y4? -fy?? ?ae?nl?x r1?F?da?anGarermner4: ' 'tFrcw'r'i7kr?d ?veayr6avir4mal:•irt?dAaly+rauL3'r?A?coBytrvM?ir?dr?dn?ngr ?+?Ii?R+?F 6bcbA'p?ur6?fFjt' tea ete?r 9c rtrat?rr+iareerrtla l?btfguiyPirllixii .. .. ! ...... . n+6lfw ?ontiindv i`?m cr „? pyy MF??esrotiisr Lab File Npmber. 14259 NVLAP Lab No. 200759.0 Analysis Pages 2 of 8 e Client Marne: Gmerdield Emrirorurrantal project 14ar ne: 1051.1029 CRy of Clearwater 432 31d Street North Lone Corder St. Peterw..6urg, Florida 33701 Dade Analyzed: March 18, 2009 Asbesttrs, Bulk Sample Analysis Test WOW: PI.M I DS - EPA WOW 60Mt4Wjje lab # Cram nVIe Type DesW 96 Ash 06M Fibers % Binders ew2 31 Invtlation backing layer NAD 3096 Cellulose 40% Foil and Binders 30% Glass Rbers yellow fnsulats HAD 100% Mineral Woof 86453 32 Insulation backing layer HAD 30% Cellulose 40% Foil and Binders 30% Blass Fibers yellow insulate HAD 100% Mbrerat Wool 86454 33 Insulation backing layer HAD 30% Cellulose 40% Foil and Binders ' 30% Blass Fibers yellow insulate HAD 100% Mineral Wbol 86455 34 MRS50 gray HAD 100% Carbonates and Binders 86456 35 Masao ray HAD 100% Carbonates and Bin' dam 86457 36 Mastic ray NAD 10096 Carbonates and 6-inders 86458 37 Surfakling IJledertal vAft HAD 100% Quartz and Binders 86459 38 Swfacing Material wWte HAD 100% Quartz and Binders 86460 39 $udaft ft vh& ..... HAD .... .: ..... .... .... 100% Quartz and Binder's . . 86461 40 Floor Tile P&Ple Ole HAD 100% Carbonates and Binders yellowmastic HAD 10D% Binders 86462 41 Floor Tile purple the HAD 10D% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastic HAD 100% Binders 86463 42 Floor Tile purple file HAD 100% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastic HAD 100% Binders 86464 43 Cove am black vinyl NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders lte mastic NAD 100% Binders 86465 44 Cove Base _ blackvinyt NAB 10096 Carbonates and Binders white mastic HAD 100% tinders 88468 45 Cove am black vinyl HAD 100% Carbonates and Binders White masW HAD 100% Binders 86467 46 WoThe be /tan NAD 80% Ceti 40% Penile and Binders I 30% WNW Wool Ka wbii& itl?? •7`hsE'A dDbd36 1MlrliidbA ps4si?ro r,?a - M ' ILA: a t? ae ?Aodr •Wo rqq nBf f?? sa a r ?'eriarnaara? ' ? aoea aa°x' ,der la Mlw!!, ?i .... . .. Lab File Number. 14259 NVLAP Lab No. 200759.0 Anaiysis Pages 3 of 8 r r Client Narne: Greenfield Environmental 432 3rd Street North St. Petersburg, Florida 33701 Bulk 86468 47 Ceiling Tile white 1 tan 86489 48 Gelling Tile ita / tan 86470 49 Drywall System mat layer powder layer 86471 50 Drywall System mat layer powder layer 88472 51 Drywall System mat layer po*er layer 86473 52 Floor Tile purple tile yellow mastic 86474 53 Floor Tile purple file yellow mastic 86475 54 Floor Tie purple the yellawmastic 86476 55 FloorTile nauvetite yellow mastic 86477. 56 Floor Tile mauve file yellow mastic 66478 57 Floor Tile mauve we yellow mastic 86478. 56 Mastic yellow, fibrous 86480 59 astir yellow, fibrous 86481 60 Mastic yellow, fibrous 88482 61 Drywall System Joint compound mat layer powder layer Lab File Number. 14259 Project Name: 1051-10x9 Cdy of Clearwater. Long Center Date Analyzed: March 18, 2009 T est Method: PLM / DS • EPA Method 6001R•53/116 % Asbestos % 6ffier Fibers % Binders NAD 3D% Cellulose 40% Fertile and Binders 30% Mineral V" MAD 30% Cellulose 40% Pedite and Binders 30% Mineral Wool NAD 100% Cellulose NAD 14% Cellulose 86% Gypsum and Binders NAD 10D% Cellulose NAD 14% Cellulose W% Gypsum and Binders NAD 100% Cellulose NAD 1486 Cellulose 89% Gypsum and Binders NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonatesand Binders 100% Carbonates end Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 1160% Carbonafes.and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonafesand Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 50% Synthetics 50% Binders 50% Synthetics 50% Binders 50% Synthetics 50% Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Cellulose 14% Mass Fibers 86% Gypsum and Binders Ad64 W' WbA t MWAMI "nub = NVLAP Lab No, 200759-0 Analysis Pages 4 of 8 1 Client Name: Greenfield Envirornnenigii Project Name; 10514028 Cky of Glearvrater 432 3rd SkM North Long Ceraer SL Petersbugh Florida 33701 hate Analyzed Mamh 18, 2009 Asbestos, Bulk b Analysis Test Mettgd PLM IDS • EPA Metmd BOD -031116 - Lab # Client # -SampleTy Desari 96 Asbestos % Other Fibers % .Ram- 8e483 62 Drywall Syjtenn jointomripound NAD 10046 Carbonates and Binders mat layer t*D 100% Cellulose !powder layer NAD 14% Glass Film W% Gypsum and Binders 86484 63 Dgvml Syslem joint compound NAO 10D% Carbonates end_Binders mat layer NAD 1011% Cellulose taw layer NAD • 14% Glass Mbets 86% Gypsum and Binders 88485 64 Floor Tile mite tine NAD 10D% Carbonates and Binders black ma llo NAD 16% Ceiuiose 85% Biluman aind Binders 86486 65 Flow Tile Whib toe NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders black masf NAD 16% Cellulose W% Shm n and Binders 8646 Be Floor Tde to do NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders black mmsllo NAD 15% Cellulose 8596 Bitumen and Binders 86488 67 Floor Toe Ito die NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastio MAD 100% Binder* 86489 68 Flow Tpe Mile, the NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders Yellow mastic NAD 100% Binders 86490 69 Floor The white file NAD I OD% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastic NAD 100% Binders 86491 70 Floor Tile tan tie NAD 10046 Carbonates and Binders . Yellow mastic NAD 100% Binders 86492 71 Floor Tile tarn tie NAD 100% Carbonates and tinders yellowmastic NAD 100% Binders 86493' 72 Floor Tile tan tie NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders yellow masts NAD 10096 Binders 86494 73 Cove Base black vinyl NAD 10D% Carbonates and Binders white mastic NAD 100% Binders 88495 74 ove Base blackvinyl NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders white mastic NAD - 100% Binders 86496 75 Cove Base blackvinyl NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders mastio NAD 100% Binders 'iTk"wii; to?? Aal?darwnrelefod . ?o?x 4t'dt?ltttip"t'• f??op' ttbdr ?2. :A ?w ?' rferc uat W. preebiet , eppewr aaioorinne °' s•-. G?"L .MT . ?tsa wart ttrlm, Cow* - at., Lab File Number. 14259 NVLAP Lab No, 2007SM ArrAycs Pages 5 of 8 Client Name: Greenfield Environmental 432 3rd Street North St Petersburg, Florida $3701 Project Name: . 1051.10714 City of Clearwater Long Center Date Analyzed: March 18, 2009 Test Method: PLM / DS -SPA Method 600/R-93RI6 % Asbestos % Other Fibers 95 Binders NAD 30% Cehubse 40% Perille and Binders 30% Mineral Wool NAD 30% Cellulose 40% Perfite and Binders 30% Mineral Wool NAD 90% Cellulose 40% Pedlte and Binders 30% Mineral Wool NAD 30% Cellulose 40% Full and Binders 30% Glass Fibers NAD 10D% Mineral Woof NAD 30% Cellulose 40% Foil and Binders 30% Glass Fibers . NAD 100% Mineral Wool NAD 30% Cellulose 40% Fog and Binders 30% Glass Fibers NAD 1DD% Mineml V" NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders NAD 100% Binders NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders NAD 100% Birders NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders NAD 100% Binders NAD 100% Binders NAD 100% Binders NAD 100% Binders NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders NAD 100% Binders NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders NAD 100% Binders ' NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders NAD 100% Binders Bulk 86497 8549B 86499 86500 The Tile The /tan / tan 86501 86502 86503 82 Floor Tile 86504 83 Floor Tile 86505 84 Floor Tide 86508 85, carpet mastic 88507 $6 Carpet Mastic 86506 87 Carpet Masdo 86509 88 Cove Base 86510 89 Cave Base 86511 90 Cove Base Lab File Number. 14259 Ake / tan e?cidng layer edlow insulate "loo layer 'eilow insulate eclting layer file r mastlo tike r mastic fife r mastic vinyl w mastic vinyl w mastic vinyl w mastic Yr -F • iJ??d(i,tn. "?fk?lw1 NVLAP Lab No. 20076" Analysis Pages 8 of 8 0 ' Client Name: Greenfield Enviro F'raject Hamer: 10514029Cky of CtewwaW 432 3rd Street North Lori Center SL Petersburg, Florida 33701 Date Abet March 18, 2009 Bulk Sample Analysis Test Matiwtk PLM ! DS • EPA Method 8M RMHI6 Lab # Client Deamptiae % Asbestos % Other Fibers % Binders 86512 91 Sink Lbt!dw=t vAft NAD 95% Cetluose 65% Carbonates and Binders 86513 92 Sink Undercoat Vdft NAD 55% Cellulose W% Carbonates and Binders 86614 93 Sink Lbuwcoat While NAD 36% Ceiluk ee 65% Carbonates and Binders 86515 94 Cove am jed vinyl NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastic NAD 10096 Binders 86516 95 Cove Base red virryl NAD 100% Caibormtes and Binders yepowmasw NAD 100% Binders 86517 96 Cave Base red Vinyl MAD 100%•Carbonates and Binders mastic . NAD 10D% Birders 88518 97 Floor Tile tie NAD 10095 Carbonates and Binders ' bklr mastic NAD 15% Cellulose 85% lumen and Binders 86518 98 Floor Tile 'lo tits NAD 10095 Carbonates and Binders black masdo NAD 15% Cellulose 85% Bitumen and Binders 8652D 99 Floor Tile white the NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders ... black mastic NAD 15% Celk"e 06% Bitumen and Binders • 86521 100 wMallon. tan, fibrous NAD 95% Mineral Wool 5% Carbonates and Binders 86522 101 Insulation tan, libmus NAD 95% Mineral Wbot 5% Carbonates and Binders 88523 102 Insulation tart, fibrous NAD 95% Mineral Wad 5% Carbonates and Binders 86524 109 Flout Tile White tiles NAD 10D% Carbonates and Binders r black mastic NAD 15% Cellulose 85% Bitumen and Binders 86525 104 . Floor Tile VAIIIO file NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders black masdo NAD 15% Cellulose 85% Bitumen and Binders ?.. 86526 105 Floor Tile No NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders black mastic NAD 15% Cellulose 85% Bitumen and Binders ' 86527 106 Floor Tile tan No NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders yellow mastic NAD 100% Binders 86528 107 FloorTrle tan No NAD 100% Carbonates and Binders ' ow usastic NAD 10D% Binders iawgsa?s v tl br a *WOA WOW U?1Ik?r+a+ ift+ra ,yg'" per?n? f+r!oa+ wvoyted A M 151 •Ful??r? ?balis??e?Ur??ro-aradrir4 ' eranadrscroerdbyrrpN.nt:•: ? ? arena '? u:tik+l?tnr? Ysgetu? ibclaoalwMft vo ' ....... ?E Lab File Number: 14259 NNI.AP Lab No. 20075M Analyels Pages 7 of 8 Client Name: Greenfield Environmental 432 3rd Sired North SL Petersburg, Florida 33707. suit 86529 s6530 86531 (110 86552 1111 86533 112 86534 113 86535 114 8=6 115 86537 1116 1117 l ne tan Se yellow mastic Tile black mastic white the yellow mastic Tile black mastic WNW % yellow mastic Tile black mastic while the yellow mastic Bass blue vinyl tan mastic Base blue vinyl tan mastic Bass blue vinyl tan mastic . Tile k black mastic tan ins yellow Mastic Til® black mastic tan ttie yellow mastic Tile black mastic tan too yellow masse Project Name Date Analyze Asbestos NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD Lob File Number. 14258 1051-1029 Cdl Lang Cereer d: March 18,, 200 Test Mettwd; PLM ! D; % Other Fibers 16% Cellulose 15% Cellulose 15% Cellulose 15% Cellulose 15% Cellulose 15% Cellulose Analysts pages a d 8 of Clearwater a i . EPA Method 6DOFt-63!116 % Binders 1015 Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 85% BiWmen and Binders 1W% Carbonates and Binders 10095 Binders 85% Bitumen and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 86% Bitumen and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders . 100% Caarbonates and Binders IOD% Binders 100% C OFbonates and Binders 100% Binders 10096 Carbonates and Binders 100% Si nders 85% Bitumen and Binders 10096 Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 115% Bitumen and Binders 10D% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders 85% Bitumen and Binders 100% Carbonates and Binders 100% Binders W.?anly?ril?r; ri+rn . NVLAP Lab No. 200759-0 d APPENDIX B CERTIFICATIONS A r .5 O V ." M r? O -4 tsls o w o t oo P z b ' I~ o 00 fi MiK ? CS ? O ?.. N. to 44 h o c „? y 4 D A] d Lt1 57 ?O ,Z w t7 N ?00 Q co ?1 21:5 q C) co d' to, y , cs % G ?do??? ww ?c 3 b'?U mm to, U ?. y ?.? U a to _o "t9 N ¢ co e, ' a- ? O ? ' - W • a tea O W ? w a U l1w b V? b nt N b UQ,t ?• a b tivtoo_L a pq e_q 'F7 of ? M STATE'OF FLORIDA DEPARTM$NT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION ASBESTOS LICENSING UNIT (850) 487-1395 1940 NORTH MONROE STREET TALLAHASSEE FL 32399-0783 GREENFIELD ENVIRONMENTAL INC MICHAEL ROTHMURG 432 3RD STREET NORTH ST. PETERSBURG FL, 3370 . s• R r n?•. oh ON 7 M% 'k"Aa!l:eio?pt bc t!{1: 6 9 t DETACH HERE Acv 338715D ,r 04D, 3, N The Name ?e a _ >.•;S9 s d -% sf, "• !. ! Expa.ra t 1.an date : NOV 3.0 • •':?5.:?•;; ?.}_ ..,._ ' ,. ' ' ,'`• - - •• .LRr fLim ,, ??r ... R=X, •AO 50 4m. ti• r • •y?r•• Y.• . 432 39D S'I`AE s'`T NoRTH? ST. PETERS?BUPq FL„-31 tiff, MR7 CA. V, &.0, r+L7t?lDi`S?*i+" if`?(p3k(4M•'. . ta i APPENDIX C FLOOR PLAN wr- ?? ????